Mep Specifications

CH C
PROJECT
ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

PROPOSED BUILDING (G+4+R)
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared by
April , 2014

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16000.
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
16000
16010
16110
SCOPE AND EXTENT OF WORKS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS
CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS FOR WIRING AND CABLING CONDUITS,
TRUNKING, TRAYS, LADDERS, DUCTS AND UNDER FLOOR TRUNKING
LOW VOLATGE CABLES, WIRES AND ACCESSORIES
DU GUIDELINES
TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV SYSTEMS
WIRING ACCESSORIES
EARTHING SYSTEM
LOW VOLTAGE AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CORRECTION PANEL
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR, MAIN, SUBMAIN AND FINAL
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, ISOLATORS AND LOADBREAK SWITCHES
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS
ANOLOGUE ADDRESSABLE VOICE INTEGRATED FIRE DETECTION AND
ALARM SYSTEM
16123
161241
161242
16141
16170
16411
16426
16510
16511
1672116770
16780
CENTRALLY MONITORED SELF CONTAINED EMERGENCY LIGHTING

SYSTEM
16781
MASTER DIGITAL SATELLITE AND TERRRESTRIAL ANTENNAE

SYSTEM
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION AND VIDEO SECURITY SURVEILLANCE
SYSTEM
INTERCOM SYSTEM DIGITAL AUDIO INTERCOM
SOLAR WATER HEATER SYSTEM
VENDOR LIST
16782
167821
16783
File: ELECSPEC16000.doc
Page 1 of 1

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16000.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS

SECTION 16000
SCOPE AND EXTENT OF WORKS
1.
SCOPE OF WORKS
1.1
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
1.7.
1.8.
2.
The enclosed Specifications cover the Electrical Installation works for the
project design is proposed to be B+G+4 Residential with Retail Building
for Rajesh Building .
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, delivery to site, installation,
commissioning and testing of the various electrical systems outlined briefly below
and as described in detail in the relevant Specifications and drawings.
Prior to submitting his offer, the Contractor shall be required to visit the site for
familiarization with all site conditions and scope of works.
The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing all workshop drawings for each
electrical system and submit to the Engineer for his study, comments and
subsequent approval.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining approvals for all workshop
drawings from respective statutory authorities prior to commencing execution of
any works.
The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer for all equipment and
materials at an early date to enable placing of orders in good time. Contractor
shall be responsible for applying, coordinating and obtaining/ issuing of all
permits and necessary NOCs from the local authorities (DM, DEWA, Etisalat,
DU, RTA, Dubai Police, etc).
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with Dubai Electricity and
Water Authority (DEWA) for making all necessary arrangements for provision of
H.T. electricity supply to the sub-station, and thence to respective Main L.V.
Electrical room for connection to the Main distribution board, MDB. All costs,
charges and fees required by the statutory authorities shall be included in his
offer, except the power connection charges, which shall be paid by the Client.
Contractor shall be responsible to comply with Dubai Municipality and DEWA
Green Building Regulations.
EXTENT OF WORKS
The Electrical Installation works shall include the supply, installation, testing,
connecting and putting into satisfactory and safe service the following in compliance
with details in relevant drawings, Specifications, Schedules of Luminaries, Schedule
of equipment and accessories, and Load Schedules for various distribution boards:
2.1.
Main L.V. ACB/MCCB Distribution Board, designated as MDB shall be form 4

Type 6, complete with kilo-watt-hour meter, ammeters, voltmeter/selector
switches, cable glands, other necessary accessories etc. The MDB shall be
complete with Power Factor Correcting Panel, designated as PFCP, housed in an
independent enclosure, which shall not form an integral part of the MDB.
Scope and Extent of Works
Page 1 of 3

SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
2.8.
2.9.
2.10.
2.11.
2.12.
2.13.
2.14.
2.15.
2.16.
2.17.
2.18.
2.19.
ELEC/SPEC.16000.
All Sub-main L.V. MCCB Distribution Boards designated SMDBs.

All Final TPN MCB Distribution Boards designated DBs.
All heavy-duty isolators constructed to protection grade IP65.
All L.V. cabling between MDBs and SMDBs, and between SMDBs and DBs,
isolators for fire fighting and other pumps, lifts, A/C Condensing Units and
other similar equipment, all in compliance with details in drawings.
All L.V. cabling/wiring between MCB boards and respective outlet points
associated with internal and external lighting points, exhaust fans, general
purpose socket-outlets, hand dryers, isolators etc., all in strict compliance with
details in drawings and load schedules for respective boards.
All internal and external lighting points and respective fixtures.
All Emergency and Exit lighting points and respective fixtures.
All single gang, multigang and two-way lighting switches, other SP and DP
switches; timer activated contactor operated multi-gang switch assembly units
with manual override facility for control of external lighting and roof
projection lighting circuits.
All Exhaust fans.
All recessed domestic type general purpose 13A single and twin switched
socket outlets in offices and similar areas.
All single and twin surface mounted industrial type 13A switch socket outlets
to IP65 in external areas.
Fused connection units for connection to water heaters, hand dryers and
similar equipment.
Cord outlets for connection to exhaust fans.
For structured cabling voice and data system, only priority containment
system comprising individual conduits to each voice and data outlet from
respective Voice Data distributors, trays from main distributor to sub-main
distributor, all in coordination with and to the requirements of the specialist
sub-contractors who shall be responsible for supply and installation of all
structured cabling equipment, voice and data socket outlets and cabling.
3 No. UPS units, UPS1 feeding SPN board DB-CT1 in ground floor Computer
and Telephone Room for lighting and small power circuits; UPS2 feeding
SPN board DB-CT2 in first floor Computer and Telephone Room for lighting
and small power circuits; UPS3 feeding SPN board DB-SEC in ground floor
Security Room for supply to socket outlets for all E.L.V. systems inclusive of
outlets for CCTV Cameras, Card Access System Magnetic Locks, Security
Panel, Fire Alarm Control Panels etc.
High quality, high performance integrated Security System comprising CCTV
and Card Access Control System complete with all necessary containment
system, components and accessories deemed essential for a safe and reliable
Security System.
Telephone system inclusive of PABX and complete with necessary external
and internal conduits with draw tapes/wires, wiring, line jack outlets, main and
sub-main distribution frames, junction boxes etc. all in strict compliance with
the current rules, regulations, requirements and recommendations of
ETISALAT.
State-of-the-art Analogue Soft Addressable Voice Integrated Fire Detection
and Alarm System, all in strict compliance with the current rules, regulations,
requirements and recommendations of the local Civil Defence Autority.
Page 2 of 3

SPECIFICATIONS
2.20.
2.21.
2.22.
2.23.
2.24.
2.25.
ELEC/SPEC.16000.
High quality high performance Satellite Master Antennae System for

integration with the structured cabling system.
High quality high performance intelligent lighting control system for control
of lighting circuits in respective public areas, Libraries, Multipurpose Halls
etc.
Complete earthing system, inclusive of clean earthing for Telecommunication
rooms.
Adequate and suitably sized uPVC conduits complete with draw wires for
incoming ETISALAT cables.
Adequate numbers and suitably dimensioned manholes for telephone and
electrical power cables.
Complete and satisfactory testing of all items of equipment and accessories for
each system described above.
END OF SECTION 16000
Page 3 of 3

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16010.

SECTION 16010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS
1.
GENERAL.
1.1
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
1.7.
1.8.
1.9.
1.10.
These Specifications cover the supply, delivery, storage, installation, connection,

testing and commissioning of all equipment and materials required for the
electrical installation works for the project, all in compliance with the General and
Particular Specifications and Drawings
Prior to bidding, the Contractor shall be required to visit the site to ascertain
limitations or constraints that may affect his works on site. In addition the
Contractor shall study the Specifications and tender design drawings in detail as
no variations shall be allowed due to lack of knowledge relating to site conditions
and drawings implications.
The General and Particular Specifications shall be read in conjunction with
the Contracts Documents and Tender drawings. In the event of any
discrepancies between the drawings and the Specifications, the drawings shall
be deemed correct for tendering purposes. The Contractor shall, however, be
required to draw attention to such discrepancies at the time of submitting his
offer.
All electrical installation works shall be carried out in strict compliance with
details in drawings, load schedules for distribution boards, Schedules of
equipment and materials, technical Specifications of equipment and materials,
and any other instructions issued by the Engineer.
All electrical installation works shall conform to the best principles of modern
practice and shall be carried out by fully competent tradesmen of appropriate
grades to the full satisfaction of the Engineer.
All equipment and materials shall be installed to guarantee satisfactory
operation at specified parameters.
To avoid delays and to facilitate smooth running of the works, the Contractor
shall ensure that after receipt of all necessary approvals from the Engineer,
prompt orders for all items of equipment and materials shall be placed.
High quality brand new equipment and materials free from any flaws and
defects shall be used. Any equipment and material not accepted by the
Engineer shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
The Contractor shall ensure all equipment, accessories and components are of
appropriate protection grade for installation in various areas, taking into
account environmental considerations relating to dampness, sand, dust,
corrosion etc.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all equipment, materials,
accessories and fittings proposed for installation in the project. The Contractor
shall submit Quality Inspection Plan for all items for Engineers study and
review.
General Requiremenst and Conditions
Page 1 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
1.11.
1.12.
2.
ELEC/SPEC.16010.
All equipment shall be manufactured by reputable manufacturers of

international repute with ISO 9001 accreditation. The manufacturers should
have been regularly engaged in the manufacture of respective items for at
least ten years, and their products have been used satisfactorily in similar
projects.
The Contractor shall submit original documents of origin of country of all
respective equipment and materials proposed for the project. In addition, Bill
of Lading of all the said items of equipment shall also be submitted.
STANDARDS AND CODES

All electrical materials and equipment used in electrical installation works shall
comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the relevant International
Electro-Technical Commission (IEC) publications, British Standards (BS), and
NFPA.
All electrical installation works shall be carried out in strict compliance with current
rules, regulations, requirements and recommendations of the following institutes and
statutory authorities:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
3.
Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA) Wiring Regulations.

Wiring Regulations of the Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE), UK, now
published as BS7671:2001.
IEC Regulations for Electrical Installations in Buildings, publication IEC 364.
Local ETISALAT Office for all works related to Telephone and Structured
Cabling Systems.
Local Civil Defence Authority for all works related to Fire Detection and
Alarm System.
Dubai Municipality, DEWA and Green Building Regulation.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
All electrical equipment, materials, apparatus, accessories and fittings used in the
installations shall be suitable for use in the climatic conditions prevalent in Ajman as
detailed below :
a)
b)
4.
Maximum ambient temperature : 55 degrees C (to be reviewed).

Relative humidity : 95%
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY AND SERVICE CONDITIONS

All electrical equipment, materials, apparatus, accessories and fittings used in the
installations shall be designed and manufactured to operate safely and continuously in
the electricity supply system provided by DEWA with the following characteristics:
Voltage
Frequency
:
:
380V +/- 5%, 3 phase, 4-wire

50 Hz +/- 2%
Neutral
Fault level
:
:
solidly earthed, TNT system

20 MVA, supplied from a 1000 kVA transformer
Page 2 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
Fault duration
5.
STATUTORY APPROVALS, FEES AND INSPECTION

5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.
5.7.
5.8.
6.
ELEC/SPEC.16010.
30 MVA, supplied from a 1500 kVA transformer

1 second.
The Contractor shall coordinate with DEWA to obtain all relevant information,
data and instructions pertaining to his parts of the works.
The Contractor shall coordinate with DEWA to make all necessary arrangements
for the supply and installation of all high-voltage equipment for connection of
electricity supply for the project.
The contractor shall coordinate with ETISALAT to obtain all relevant
information, data and instructions pertaining to telephone, voice and data
system installation works.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the local Civil Defense Authority to
obtain all relevant information, data and instructions pertaining to installation
works for Fire Detection and Alarm system.
Prior to commencement of any installation works, the Contractor shall submit
specified number of copies of drawings to relevant authorities for checking,
comments and approval. Any modifications or additional requirements by the
relevant authority shall be brought forthwith to the attention of the Engineer
for further action and compliance.
To avoid unnecessary delays, the Contractor shall arrange for inspection of
works by the relevant authorities on an on-going basis during the course of
works.
On completion of works, final approval certificates from each statutory
authority shall be submitted to the Engineer for handing over to the Client.
The Contractor shall pay all attendance and other charges to the relevant
authorities.
CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES AND SUPPLIERS.

6.1.
The contractor shall coordinate with the plumbing works sub-contractor to

ascertain locations and routes of all water and drainage pipes to ensure
sufficient and safe clearances are maintained between these and electrical
services in all areas.
6.2. The ratings of isolators for water pumps, fire fighting pumps, booster pumps, A.C.
Condensing Units, Extract Fans, lifts, and other electrically operated equipment
have been stipulated after coordination at the design stage with the Plumbing and
Mechanical Engineers. However, the Contractor shall be required to coordinate
with the concerned sub-contractors and manufacturers of proposed equipment and
supply and install suitable isolators of correct ratings to match requirements of
equipment finally selected for installation.
6.3.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the suppliers and installers of all
specialist equipment inclusive of false ceilings; A.C. equipment and duct
work; Fire Detection and Alarm System; Closed Circuit TV vigilance system ;
Structured
Cabling System for voice, data and TV Systems; P.A. system,
Access Control Security System, Telephone System installation etc. to
facilitate, wherever applicable, correct and satisfactory installation of
containment network comprising conduits, trunking, trays etc. for points
associated with the respective systems.
Page 3 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16010.
6.4.
Layout of A.C. grills, fire alarm detectors, sound system speakers, emergency
lighting luminaires, indoor and outdoor CCTV cameras, Access Conrol
Security System clearances above false ceilings etc. shall be fully coordinated
with other trades for proper and satisfactory siting of lighting fixtures in the
false ceilings.
6.5. Prior to commencement of any works, the Contractor shall liase with all other
sub-contractors for all services and submit co-ordinated drawings to the
Engineer for his study, comments and final approval.
6.6. The Contractor shall include in his tender all necessary expenses, if any,
or
providing services to other specialist sub-contractors.
7.
TENDER DRAWINGS AND POSITIONS OF FITTINGS.

7.1.
7.2.
8.
Approximate locations of various items of electrical equipment inclusive of

wiring accessories, lighting luminaires, isolators, distribution boards, panels
and components of Fire Detection and Alarm system, Structured Cabling
System, Telephone System, CCTV System, P.A. System, Access Control
Security System etc. indicated in the drawings shall be assumed to be
correct for tendering purposes only, and are intended to indicate general
requirements and arrangement of aforementioned equipment and accessories.
Locations of items of electrical equipment may be changed on site to comply
with furniture layout and/or architectural requirements.
The electrical design drawings do not intend to show architectural, structural,
fabrication or installation details. For accurate dimensions refer to architectural
and structural drawings. Elevations for all services shall be verified prior to
commencement of any electrical installation works.
CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
Four sets of tender drawings for all electrical works shall be provided to the
Contractor. Any necessary design modifications shall be in the form of design
notes and / or sketches as directed by the Engineer.
To facilitate satisfactory execution of electrical installation works and to avoid
any conflict with other trades and services, the Contractor shall be responsible
for preparing all relevant coordinated construction drawings.
The Contractor shall submit, within thirty days of Engineers instructions for
commencement of works, three copies of drawings indicating dimensioned
details of sleeves, openings, holes, chases etc. required in the structure; piping
and equipment in shafts; piping and equipment in mechanical and plant rooms
and other critical areas; equipment foundations; trenches; anchors; inertia
slabs etc. to be provided by others to enable him to fulfil his part of the works.
Transparencies and four sets of printed copies of all coordinated construction
drawings approved and stamped by all other trades shall be submitted to the
Engineer.
Page 4 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
9.
WORKING AND AS FITTED DRAWINGS AND OPERATING MAUALS

9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.
9.6.
9.7.
10.
ELEC/SPEC.16010.
During the course of the works the contractor shall maintain a fully detailed
record of all changes to the Tender Drawings as true record of actual
installations.
The drawings shall show the complete electrical installation works of all
electrical systems within and external to the building, inclusive of the type,
cross- sectional areas and runs/lengths of all L.V. cables, the precise locations
of all cables which may be buried within the structure, and those sections of
any external cables which are buried directly in the ground.
The locations and depths of all underground cables and uPVC conduits for
incoming ETISALAT cables at the various entry points shall also be clearly
indicated.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the accuracy of dimensions of all
equipment with respect to space available, for accessibility of equipment for
maintenance and service, and for compliance with the rules, regulations,
requirements and recommendations of the statutory authorities.
Preparation and submission of drawings is subject to Contractual obligations
and any delay shall be subject to penalties and other remedies as determined by
the Engineer.
Within one month of completion of the installations, the Contractor shall
provide 3 No. complete sets of the following record drawings for all above
mentioned systems, as detailed below, for Engineers study, comments and final
approval :
i) General arrangement of all electrical services AS FITTED, to scale
not less than 1:100 metric.
ii) Details of all items of plant and equipment including name and address
of respective manufacturer, type and model, serial number, duty, rating
and any other pertinent information.
iii) Single line schematic drawings to a scale not less than 1:100 metric,
indicating position of all distribution boards, isolators, switches, control
panels etc. with relevant notes describing their functions.
After obtaining approval in writing for the drawings, the Contractor shall
provide one negative and two prints of each drawing together with two bound
sets of all manuals and operating instructions to the Engineer for issuing these
to the Client.
PERSONNEL TRAINING
10.1.
10.2.
Prior to acceptance of the works, the Contractor shall be required to train and
instruct Clients personnel in the correct use, operation and supervision of
Fire Detection and Alarm System, Sound System, CCTV System and any
other system installed in the building.
Prior to acceptance of the works, the Contractor shall also be required to
demonstrate and explain to the clients personnel the correct operation of all
items of switchgear and the starting, running and stopping of all item of
mechanical plant installed in the building.
Page 5 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
10.3.
10.4.
11.
ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

11.1.
11.2.
11.3.
12.
ELEC/SPEC.16010.
The cost of the training programme shall be deemed to be included in the

Contract price.
The supplier shall be required to provide operating manuals to supplement the
training courses.
As a guide to the quality of workmanship required, names of three

manufacturers together with technical details and, wherever applicable,
catalogue number shall generally be specified for each item in the Schedule of
Luminaires, Equipment and Materials.
Clients list of recommended and preferred manufacturers for lighting
fixtures, wiring accessories, switchgear, cables, busbar ducts and other
relevant equipment, materials and System shall be provided.
Any alternative offered shall be equivalent or better in quality than those
specified, and shall be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to placing
order or installing in the project.
INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

12.1.
12.2.
12.3
12.4.
12.5.
12.6.
12.7.
12.8.
The Contractor shall provide necessary assistance and facilities to the Engineer
to inspect all materials and equipment at works on site during the progress of
the works.
The Contractor shall provide, free of charge, all necessary labour, materials,
testing equipment and measuring instruments which may be required to carry
out the various tests on the installations in compliance with the
recommendations of the relevant statutory authorities and as directed by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall give fourteen days notice before the installation is ready
for inspection and testing. Subject to the Engineers agreement, the Contractor
may proceed with the tests and forward three certified copies of the results
obtained to the Engineer. If the results are found satisfactory in every respect,
the installation shall be accepted, but such acceptance shall be without any
prejudice to any claims in respect of any defects which may develop during the
guarantee period for maintenance.
To facilitate progress of works it may be necessary to test sections of works
separately.
Tests shall be repeated, within reasonable time and without extra charges, on
any sections of the installations which have failed the tests.
In case where sections of works are located above false ceilings, the Contractor
shall notify the Engineer that the works are ready for inspection and testing.
No enclosures shall be installed until inspection and testing have been
completed.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of electrical connections
to all equipment prior to switching on the supply for their operation.
After connection of electricity supply, the Contractor shall commission all
sections of the installations to demonstrate to the Engineer the satisfactory and
correct operation of all items of installations.
Page 6 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
13.
ELEC/SPEC.16010.
ELECTRICAL TESTS.
13.1. On completion of the installations and prior to its being made alive for service, the
Contractor shall carry out the recommended electrical tests, on all sections of the
works in the presence of the Engineer and the representative of the Federal
Electricity and Water Authority.
13.2. All tests shall be carried out in strict compliance with the requirements and
recommendations of the 16th Edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations
(BS7671:2001) and the current Wiring Regulations of DEWA.
13.2. Electrical Tests shall include the following :
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
14.
Insulation resistance tests between conductors, and between conductors

and earth.
Earth continuity tests.
Earth resistance measurements.
Verification of polarity.
Ring circuit continuity tests.
Operational tests on all Residual Current Circuit Breakers.
Operational tests on all equipment and relays.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING.

The Contractor shall provide maintenance, servicing and replacement of all defective
parts during the maintenance guarantee period from the date of handing over the
project.
15.
SAMPLES.
The Contractor shall submit samples of all materials, fittings and fixtures to the
Engineer and obtain his written approval prior to placing order or using or installing
these in any part of the works.
16.
SPARE PARTS.
In accordance with respective manufacturers recommendations, the contractor shall
provide, as part of the Contract, all special tools required for equipment maintenance
together with list of spare parts deemed essential for two years, together with
individual prices of all items of spares.
17.
NOTICES.
In each electrical room the following Notices relating to important instructions
and information shall be provided and hung in all electrical rooms :
i) The instructions for the treatment of electric shock, in Arabic and English
languages, mounted on a steel frame and screwed to the wall.
Page 7 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16010.
ii) A schematic diagram of the switchgear located in the room together with a
complete single line schematic drawing of the complete electrical distribution
system, framed and mounted on the wall.
18.
LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION MARKS.

All equipment and apparatus shall be permanently marked with the manufacturers
name, and shall also be identified by engraved labels to indicate the services
controlled or to identify individual apparatus or equipment. Labels shall be securely
fixed to the front cover of equipment in an approved manner.
19.
NOTES FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS.

19.1.
19.2.
19.3.
19.4.
19.5.
19.6.
19.7.
19.8.
19.9.
Each Final MCB Distribution Board shall be sectionalized as indicated in

respective load schedules in compliance with DEWAs requirements.
Multigang lighting control switches incorporating more than one phase shall
be equipped with phase barriers.
Lighting control switches shall be adequately rated to control respective
inductive loads.
Each hand dryer or hair dryer shall be supplied via a connection unit and shall
be controlled by a 20A DP switch with neon indicator.
Final locations of all wiring accessories shall be determined in coordination
with Architects instructions and in compliance with final furniture and
equipment layouts.
All wiring shall be carried out in strict compliance with details in load
schedules of respective final MCB distribution boards.
Voltage drops to the farthest point of electrical supply shall not exceed 2.5%
of DEWAs declared nominal voltage.
All isolators shall be designed for heavy-duty service and shall comply with
degree of protection IP55 for internal and IP65 for external installations. All
isolators supplying motoring circuits shall conform with the requirements of
type AC23.
Where cables, bus-ducts, cable trays, trunking, ladders, conduits etc. pass
through fire rated floors, walk or roof, the Contractor shall provide internal and
external fire sealant. For non-fire rated locations, the silicon sealants shall be
used.
Page 8 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16110.

SECTION - 16110
CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS FOR WIRING AND CABLING
CONDUITS, TRUNKING, TRAYS, LADDERS, DUCTS AND UNDER
FLOOR TRUNKING
The Contractor shall supply and install a complete network of containment system
comprising conduits, underfloor trunking, cable trunking, trays, ladders and duct works in
various area of the premises for satisfactory, correct, orderly and segregated distribution of
wiring and cabling for electrical power, voice, data and other ELV services.
1.
GENERAL GUIDELINES
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
2.
All conduits, trunking, trays etc. shall be arranged in a neat and inconspicuous
manner, and each system shall be completely assembled, inspected and tested
prior to cables/wiring being drawn in them.
All works shall be carried out in strict compliance with the recommendations
of the manufacturer and with guidelines and recommendations in BS
7671:2001, which incorporates the I.E.E. Wiring Regulations.
Notional routes of cables and other related instructions shall be indicated in
the drawings. However, prior to commencement of any parts of the works, the
Contractor shall be required to submit, for Engineers study and approval, two
prints of comprehensive working drawings indicating proposed routes of
conduits, trays, trunking, trays, ladders and ducts together with all relevant
dimensional details.
All containment systems shall be supported and secured to the building fabric
in a manner to ensure these are fully protected and have no load or stresses
other than the loads of wiring and cabling they are designed to carry.
All accessories, fittings and components shall be of same manufacture as for
respective items of containment system.
INSTRUCTIONS AND GUIDELINES FOR CONDUIT INSTALLATIONS

2.1.
2.2.
No conduits of diameter smaller than 20 mm shall be used.

All conduits, throughout the installations, shall be of sufficiently large crosssectional area and shall be arranged, with sufficient number of strategically
located draw-in boxes, to allow easy drawing of any or all the cables. Care
shall be exercised to ensure that the number of wires drawn in a conduit,
relative to its diameter, does not exceed the number stipulated in the Wiring
Containment Systems for Wiring and Cabling

Conduits , Trunking, Trays, Ladders
Page 1 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
2.8.
2.9.
2.10.
2.11.
2.12.
ELEC/SPEC.16110.
Regulations BS 7671:2001. Should these differ in any way with the

regulations of the Dubai Electricity Supply Authority, the requirements of the
latter shall be adhered to.
All conduits shall be run in a manner to facilitate self-draining to outlet
boxes. Each length of conduit shall be cleaned and dried with the help of a
swab drawn through its length, and all boxes shall be cleaned to remove
moisture prior to installing cables.
Conduit bends shall be made with the bore of the tube remaining full and free
throughout and all conduits shall be perfectly smooth inside and outside, and
free from any burrs and sharp corners. Bends shall be made without heating
the conduits and by using approved type of bending machine or bending
block to give results consistent with the best grade of craftsmanship.
No more than two right angle bends shall be permitted between draw-in
boxes. No diagonal runs of conduits shall be allowed on the walls of
structure. Conduits concealed in the ceiling slab shall run parallel to walls
and beams, and those concealed in walls shall be run vertical and/or
horizontal.
All conduits cast in concrete or laid in floor screeds shall be effectively
secured, positioned and protected against mechanical damage, ingress of
concrete etc. Allowance shall be made for thermal expansion and contraction
of straight runs of conduits.
Where conduits run parallel to one another, the distance between adjacent
conduits shall not be less than 15 mm. At junction of multi-run of conduits,
rectangular adaptor boxes having internal dimensions not less than 150 x 100
x 50 mm, shall be used. Maximum of 3 Nos. 20 mm diameter and a
maximum of 2 nos. 20 mm diameter conduits shall enter the longer and
shorter sides of the boxes respectively. For more or larger sized conduits,
larger boxes of appropriate sizes shall be used.
All conduits embedded in walls shall be fully recessed to permit a minimum
thickness of 15 mm plaster or other finish to be obtained. Ceiling boxes for
lighting fixtures shall be brought flush with the ceiling plaster or finish. The
mounting boxes for flush type switches, socket outlets etc. shall be recessed
squaring into the wall structure until the front edge is level with the finished
surface of the plaster or other finish.
Conduits shall be terminated in accessories, distribution boards etc. either by
being screwed into the tapped spouts or holes where such are provided, or by
locking into clearance holes by means of couplers and smooth bore
hexagonal male bushes. Connections between the conduits and box with
clearance holes shall, in addition, be filled with a brass compression washer
between the box and the coupling with no exposed thread.
Under no circumstances holes shall be drilled in any structural steel or
prestressed concrete without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
Adaptable switch and socket-outlet boxes in 1-gang and 2-gang configuration
shall be constructed of pre-coated galvanized steel complying with the
requirements of BS 4662:1970. These shall be complete with adjustable lugs,
brass earth terminals, oval knock-outs, rubber grommets etc.
Separate and dedicated conduits shall be installed for lighting, small power,
telephone, structured cabling and other ELV systems.

Page 2 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
2.13.
2.14.
2.15.
3.
PVC CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES

3.1.
All PVC conduits shall be high-impact, rigid and heavy gauge complying
with the requirements of BS EN 50086-1:1994. Fittings and accessories shall
be of same manufacture as the conduits. Minimum thickness of walls
corresponding to respective outside diameter of conduits shall be as follows :
OUTSIDE DIAMETER
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
4.
ELEC/SPEC.16110.
The Contractor shall be required to submit calculations to justify the

proposed dimensions of the containment system in compliance with the
space factors recommended by IEE Wiring Regulations and by DEWA.
In general, space factor for conduits shall be 0.45 and space factor for
trunking and ladders shall be 0.4.
Conduits installed on surface of walls and ceilings shall be supported along
their entire runs by saddlers that shall be spaced in compliance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
Conduits passing through water-proof membranes shall be equipped with 50
mm thick collars of appropriate thickness welded all around at membrane
level, with the membrane pressed over the collars. After installation of
conduits, the sleeves shall be filled with approved water tight sealant.
WALL THICKNESS
(mm)
(mm)
20
1.8
25
1.9
32
2.5
38
2.5
All conduits shall be unthreaded, slip-fit and push-on type. Unless otherwise
specified only plain couplers shall be used. All joints shall be made with
weather-proof adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.
Terminations in metal equipment and accessories with a tapped entry shall
employ flanged couplings locked to the metal case with smooth bore
brass/PVC bushes.
At all expansion joints in the structure, expansion couplers shall be installed.
Draw-in boxes and switch mounting boxes shall be made of PVC and shall be
equipped with earth terminals.
Wherever necessary, approved type of flexible conduits and adaptors maybe
used.
Spacing of conduits runs from other services shall be the following minimum
values:
i) Cold water
: 50 mm
ii) Hot water
: 250 mm
iii) Air ducts
: 20 mm
GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES.

4.1.
All metal conduits shall be heavy gauge welded screwed steel tubing
complying with the requirements of BS 4568:PART 1:1970, and shall be
heavily galvanized both inside and outside throughout their entire lengths.

Page 3 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.
4.8.
4.9.
4.10.
5.
ELEC/SPEC.16110.
All conduit fittings and accessories shall be finished to the same

classification of protection as for the conduits.
All conduits shall be fixed in approved manner by means of crampets,
saddles, spacer bar saddles, cast distance saddles, cadmium plated steel
screws, bolts, nuts etc. all complying with the requirements of BS 4568:
PART 2:1970.
All conduits shall be threaded so that the ends of the conduits butt close
together in conduit coupling. Lock nuts shall be thoroughly coated with red
lead after installation.
All conduits shall be mechanically and electrically continuous and shall be
effectively bonded and earthed. Earth connections and bonding to conduits
shall be by means of copper tape or copper earth wire and earthing clamps
complying with BS 951:1999. Where the conduit makes contact with
structural steel, an efficient and permanent bond shall be made between the
conduit and metal work.
All conduit boxes shall be constructed of malleable iron or pressed steel and
shall have the same classification for protection as for the conduit. Where
they do not serve as outlets, they shall be fitted with lids secured with brass
screws. Earthing terminals shall be provided in all outlet boxes.
On completion of installations, the conduits shall be checked and all
imperfections shall be made good. Rust, minor damage and exposed threads
in conduit runs installed on the surfaces shall be painted with two coats of
Zinc Chromate paint and finished with approved air drying metallic paint.
Conduits concealed in the building structure shall be painted with two coats
of air drying red lead paint. The paints shall be applied immediately after the
completion of conduit installation.
Wherever there is likely to be excessive condensation, boxes shall be filled
with suitable plastic compound approved by the Engineer.
At all expansion joints in the structure an approved type of flexible sliding
connection shall be provided in every run of conduit to take up any
expansion or contraction of the conduits under service conditions. Bonding
across the joint shall be maintained by separate circuit protective conductor.
All conduit runs shall have adequate clearances between them and all other
service lines.
To facilitate movement between cabling and isolators for equipment, flexible
conduit tubing and adaptors complying with the requirements of BS 7311:1952 shall generally be used for housing the cables. For such connections
approved type of solid bronze adaptors with standard thread for flexible
conduits shall be used.
PVC TRUNKING INSTALLATIONS

5.1.
5.2.
Rigid heavy gauge PVC trunking of approved manufacture may be used in

lieu of multiple conduit runs. The trunking shall be rigidly supported along
their entire lengths at intervals not exceeding 1.25 m. All fixings shall be
carried out with cadmium plated steel screws.
All PVC trunking, lids, fittings and accessories shall comply with the
requirements of BS 4678-4:1982.

Page 4 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.6.
6.
ELEC/SPEC.16110.
The installation of PVC trunking shall be carried out in strict compliance with
the recommendations of the manufacturer.
Allowances shall be made for expansion of the trunking by using washers at
all fixing points.
Separate circuit protective conductors shall be used throughout the system for
earthing purposes.
All jointing shall be carried out using vinyl cement glue in compliance with
manufacturers recommendations.
GALVANIZED STEEL TRUNKING INSTALLATIONS

6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6.
6.7.
6.8.
6.9.
6.10.
Heavy gauge galvanized sheet steel trunking of approved manufacture and of

minimum thickness 1.6 mm may be used in lieu of multiple conduit runs. The
trunking shall be rigidly supported along their entire lengths at intervals not
exceeding 1 m. On horizontal runs the lid or cover plates shall always face
upwards.
All galvanized steel surface trunking, fittings, bends, tees, cable retainers,
cable separators, reducers, supports and other accessories shall comply with
the requirements of BS 4678-1:1971. These shall be rust-proof and shall be
complete with external fixing lugs. Site fabricated accessories shall not be
allowed under any circumstances.
The lids or access plates shall be removable in easily-handled sections over
the entire length of straight runs of trunkings. Overlapping collar sections or
other similar approved linking arrangement shall be provided at the junction
of adjacent sections of the trunking.
All fittings and accessories shall be installed to ensure there are no sharp
edges, projecting screw threads or similar points within the trunking that may
result in damage to the cables.
All under-floor steel trunking shall comply with the requirements of BS
4678-2:1973. These shall be rust-proof and shall be complete with external
fixing lugs.
Thickness of steel sheets for different sizes shall be as follows :
i)
Sizes up to and including 50 x 50 mm
20 SWG
ii)
Sizes from 50 x 50 mm to 75 x 75 mm
18 SWG
iii) Sizes from 75 x 75 mm to 225 x 150 mm 16 SWG
Lengths of trunking shall be efficiently bonded to each other using strip
copper links not less than 12 mm x 2 mm and fixed with brass nuts and bolts
and serrated washers. All lengths shall be connected by Fish Plate
connectors. All trunking shall be supplied with cable retaining straps at
intervals of 1 m.
Trunking run horizontally shall be provided with cable separators with
insulated pins at 1 m intervals. Trunking run vertically shall be provided with
a cable support unit with insulated pins at 3 m intervals.
Where trunking passes through floors and walls, fibreglass or an approved
ceramic fibre packing shall be fixed into trunking to form effective fire
barrier.
Under no circumstances cutting and bending of trunking to form flanges and
attachments shall be permitted.

Page 5 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
7.
CABLE TRAYS
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.
7.7.
7.8.
8.
ELEC/SPEC.16110.
All cable trays shall be constructed of hot dip galvanized and perforated sheet
steel complying with the requirements of BS 1449:1.1:1991.
Cables trays shall be supplied in nominal 2.4 m lengths and shall be of the
return flange type.
Trays up to but not including 150 mm width shall be of thickness 20 SWG.
Tray of width 150 mm to 375 mm shall be of thickness 16 mm SWG.
Trays of width 400 mm to 600 mm shall be of thickness 14 SWG.
Sections of trays shall be jointed using 6 mm diameter mushroom-headed
safety bolts and nuts complying with the requirements of BS 1449.
Adequate copper earthing strips shall be fitted at every joint.
Holes cut in trays for passage of cables shall be suitably bushed.
Cables shall generally be fixed to and supported by perforated galvanized
sheet steel trays either wall mounted or suspended and supported from
ceilings by sturdy galvanized iron brackets. Cables shall be clipped to trays
by nylon or plastic cable ties.
Plastic or stainless steel trays shall be used in high corrosion areas.
CABLE LADDERS
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.
8.6.
8.7.
8.8.
8.9.
8.10.
All cable support ladders shall be manufactured from pre-galvanized steel

sheet, of minimum thickness 2 mm, complying with the requirements of BS
449-2:1969.
Ladders shall be hot-dip galvanized to comply with the requirements of BS
729:1971, and shall be suitable for installation in humid conditions prevailing
in the U.A.E.
The rungs of ladders shall be supported on either ends by hexagonal profiled
steel sheet channels.
In both horizontal and vertical runs the ladders shall be firmly secured to
walls or suspended from ceilings by brackets to ensure they are able to
withstand the weight of cables.
Where ladders are mounted on walls, a minimum distance of 25 mm shall be
maintained between walls and cable surfaces.
Where ladders are run horizontally supported by cantilevers or other devices,
the spacing of the latter shall be in compliance with manufacturers
recommendations.
The width of ladders shall be adequate to ensure that the minimum spacing
between surfaces of adjacent cables shall be minimum the diameter of the
larger cable.
The ladders shall be connected to earth and electrical continuity shall be
maintained throughout their entire lengths.
The installation shall be complete with all accessories inclusive of necessary
joints, coupling, bends, support brackets, wall and ceiling plates, mounting
rails, take off hooks etc., all manufactured by the manufacturer of the ladders.
For aesthetic reasons, factory fabricated covers of suitable dimensions shall
be fixed below horizontally run ladders, with minimum 30 mm spacing
between cable surfaces and covers, throughout their routes, particularly in
open areas like garages.

Page 6 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
9.
ELEC/SPEC.16110.
UNDERFLOOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.
9.6.
9.7.
Wherever required and indicated in drawings, the Contractor shall supply and
install one of the following underfloor trunking/ducting cable distribution
systems, which shall be complete with all essential components and
accessories:
i) Under floor trunking/ducting laid in screed.
ii) Under floor trunking/ducting cast in-situ into the structural slab.
iii) Flush floor cable trunking/ducting.
The selected system shall comprise:
i)
High-quality corrosion-resistant trunking/ducting manufactured from
hot-dipped zinc coated low carbon sheet steel complying with the
requirements of BS EN 10142:2000, or uPVC trunking/ducting
complying with the requirements of BS 4678-4: 1982.
ii) Robustly designed high-pressure, load-bearing, corrosion-resistant
die-cast zinc alloy floor service and junction boxes in compliance
with the current EN Standards.
iii)
Electrical power, voice, data and video socket outlets, complete with
wiring, cabling and all necessary accessories.
To achieve high degree of flexibility, the layout of the trunking system shall
be based on a grid pattern.
Galvanized steel ducts may be of single compartment or of multiple
compartment type with metallic segregation between power and other ELV
cables. Alternatively, single uPVC ducts may be used for providing insulated
enclosures for the different services.
All installation works shall be carried out by skilled and experienced
personnel in strict compliance with manufacturers installation guidelines and
recommendations, and in close co-ordination with the Main Civil Contractor.
Prior to placing order for equipment and materials and prior to commencing
any installation works, the Contractor shall submit, for Engineers study and
written approval, manufacturers installation instructions, schedule of
materials and detailed workshop drawings showing layout of trunking, floor
service outlet and junction boxes.
For Inscreed systems, the recommended dimensions of service outlet boxes
and junction boxes shall be 300 x 300 x 75-90 mm.
The boxes shall have provisions for access of ducting from all four sides, and
all unused entries shall be plugged with detachable side blanks.
The covers of boxes shall be designed with 6 mm recess to receive tiles,
carpets etc.
The service boxes shall be equipped with suitable hinges designed to enable
the trap cover to open through 180 degrees and to give free access at all times
to power, voice and data outlets.
All boxes shall be adjustable in height independently of the ducting system to
account for the difference in floor thickness.
Adequate measures shall be provided to ensure protection of all emerging
cables against damage.
All boxes and covers shall be equipped with waterproof gaskets and circuit
protective conductors.

Page 7 of 8

9.8.
SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16110.
For Raised floor systems, the trunking shall comprise of triple compartment
rectangular steel structure designed to serve as main feeder for distribution of
power, voice and data cables. The recommended depth of the trunking shall
be 38 mm and it shall be complete with covers, compartment segregators and
earthing continuity studs for each length. The thickness of the trunking,
segregators and junction boxes shall not be less than 1.2 mm.
Service boxes shall be constructed from galvanized sheet steel and shall be
complete with polyamide trap frame with a carpet trim to cover carpet edges.
The traps shall be designed to accommodate 7 mm thick carpet.
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS

The Contractor shall liase with the specialist sub-contractors for CCTV and
ACCESS CONTROL SECURITY Systems, FIRE DETECTION and VOICE
ALARM SYSTEM, and STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM and provide all
containment systems in strict compliance with their respective requirements.

Page 8 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16123.

SECTION - 16123
LOW VOLATGE CABLES, WIRES AND ACCESSORIES
The contractor shall supply, install, test and connect all cables and wires, commencing from
the Main Distribution Board, designated MDB, to sub-main Distribution Boards, designated
SMDB, and thence final sub-circuit MCB Distribution boards, designated DB, to isolators for
water and fire fighting pumps, lifts, A/C condensing units etc., all in compliance with these
Specifications and details in single line power distribution schematic drawing and respective
load schedules for various boards.
1.
GENERAL.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
1.7.
2.
Unless specified otherwise, copper conductors of 600/100 V insulation grade

shall be used for all cables. All cables shall be adequately protected in finishes.
No joints shall be permitted in cable runs between any two points unless lengths
involved are longer than standard manufactured lengths. The joints, if any, and
their positions shall be approved by the Engineer.
Cable lugs, terminals and sweating sockets, all manufactured in strict compliance
with the requirements of BS 91:1998, including latest amendments, shall be of
correct bores appropriate to the sizes of cables to be connected. The bore shall be
of adequate diameter to accommodate all strands of cables core as filling-in of
surplus space with solder shall not be permitted. All soft solder used in cable
installation shall comply with the requirements of BS 219:1977 Grade E or F for
tinning and Grade H for wiped joints.
In general, routes of various cables shall be indicated in the cable routes drawing
for tendering purposes only. The final routing shall, however, be approved by the
Engineer before any installation is undertaken.
All works associated with installation of cables shall include jointing material,
cable supports, cleats, brackets, perforated cable trays, ladders etc. together with
all necessary accessories.
L.V. cables from transformer to MDB shall be supplied and installed by the
Dubai Electricity and Water Authority.
Without prior approval of the Engineer, the Contractor shall neither drill any
steelworks nor weld any part, component or device to the steelworks to provide
support to the cables.
INSTALLATION OF CABLES.
2.1.
2.2.
In general, cables from MDB to SMDBs and from SMDBs to Final MCB
distribution boards, isolators etc. shall be drawn in appropriate size uPVC
conduits, trunking or ducts cast in concrete floors, trenches, or run on
perforated sheet steel cable trays/ladders along routes to be finalized on site.
External cables laid direct in ground shall be drawn in suitable and
appropriate sized uPVC conduits when crossing roads, footpaths, trenches
Low Voltage Cables, Wires and Accessories
Page 1 of 4

SPECIFICATIONS
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
3.
ELEC/SPEC.16123.
etc. The diameter of uPVC pipes shall generally be between 100 mm to 150
mm.
Final sub-circuit wiring shall be drawn in conduits or trunking. In general, the
installations shall be concealed within the building fabric. However, in
general service areas, workshop, plant rooms, main electrical room etc., the
installation may be surface mounted.
In all horizontal and vertical runs of cables along walls, beams, columns,
service ducts, air-wells etc., all cables shall be supported by Claw type
cleats or by ladders in compliance with recommendations in BS 7671:2001.
For vertical runs, the spacing between adjacent cables shall be minimum
twice the diameter of the larger cable. The spacing between wall and cables
shall be minimum 25 mm.
Bends in cables shall be properly supported and shall be of the maximum
possible radius in the space available. The internal radius of every bend shall
not be less than the recommended value in BS 7671:2001.
Prior to commencing installation works, the Contractor shall submit, for
Engineers study and approval, the proposed method of installation of cables
in each area. The submission shall be complete with working drawings with
all details and dimensions for ducts, openings, chases, trenches etc. and
supports for cables.
The Contractor shall provide numbered brass or plastic discs at each end of
every cable run for easy identification of cables.
CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE (XLPE) INSULATED COPPER

CABLES
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
All thermosetting cables specified shall be of 600/1000 V insulation grade

conforming to the requirements of BS 5467:1997, including latest
amendments.
The Conductors shall be stranded and of plain annealed high-conductivity
electrical copper complying with the requirements of BS 6360:1991, IEC
228.
All 4-core cables specified shall have the conductors insulated by XLPE
compound, and the core insulation shall be colored Red, Yellow, Blue and
Black for identification. The bedding for the four cores shall be PVC
compound over which a single layer of galvanized steel wire shall be
provided as armour. The final serving over the armour shall be extruded PVC
sheath of black colour.
PVC compound used for bedding and sheath shall comply with the
requirements of BS 6746:1990.
XLPE insulated cables with low emission of smoke and corrosive gases
under fire conditions shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 6724:1997
for armoured cables and B.S. 721:1998 for non-armoured cables.
XLPE insulated 300/500 V multicore cables with limited circuit integrity
under fire conditions shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 7629:1993.
Page 2 of 4

SPECIFICATIONS
4.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) INSULATED ARMOURED AND NONARMOURED COPPER CABLES :

4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
5.
5.2.
All single and multicore PVC insulated PVC sheathed non-armoured cables
of insulation grade 450/750 V with copper conductors shall comply with the
requirements of BS 6004 : 2000.
Particulars relating to specifications of copper conductors, PVC compound
etc. shall be the same as for those described for XLPE cables under Item 6.3
above.
FLEXIBLE CORDS AND CABLES

6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
7.
All PVC insulated, single wire armoured/non-armoured

PVC sheathed
multicore cables with stranded copper conductors shall conform to the
requirements of BS 6346: 1997, including latest amendments.
Particulars related to specification of copper conductors, core colour codes,
bedding, sheath etc. shall be the same as for those described for XLPE cables
under Item 6.3 above.
PVC compound used for insulation, bedding and sheath shall comply with the
PVC INSULATED PVC SHEATHED NON-ARMOURED COPPER

CABLES.
5.1.
6.
ELEC/SPEC.16123.
All insulated flexible cords and cables shall be of 300/500 V grade complying
with the requirements of BS 6500:2000.
All insulated flexible cords and cables for use in high temperature zones shall
comply with requirements of B.S. 6141:1991.
Final connections to luminaires and pendants shall employ cables suitable for
continuous temperature of 150 deg.C. The cables shall have nickel-plated
conductors and shall be double fibre glass wrapped, braided and silicone
varnished.
Final connections to heating equipment, and where otherwise subjected to
heat, shall be silicone rubber insulated multicore cables suitable for
continuous temperature of 150 deg. C.
FIRE ALARM AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING CABLES.

Thermosetting insulated flexible cords and cables shall be of 300/500 V grade
complying with the requirements of BS 7629: 1993 and BS 6387:1994 Category
CWZ. These cables shall be designed for reduced flame propagation, for low smoke
and corrosive gas emission, and shall be surge, moisture, abrasion and damage
resistant.
8.
RUBBER INSULATED CABLES

Rubber insulated cables for electrical power and lighting shall comply with the
Page 3 of 4

9.
SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16123.
CO-AXIAL CABLES.
Low-loss co-axial cables conforming to the requirements of BS: 5425:1986 shall be
used for Satellite/Terrestrial Master TV antennae system.
10.
MINERAL INSULATED METAL SHEATHED COPPER CABLES.

10.1.
10.2.
10.3.
11.
CABLE TERMINATIONS.
11.1.
11.2.
11.3.
12.
Mineral insulated copper sheathed copper conductor cables with rated voltage
not exceeding 750V, with or without an overall high-grade PVC sheath, shall
conform to the requirements of BS 6207-1:1995.
All terminations for mineral insulated cables shall comply with the
All works shall be carried out in strict compliance with the manufacturers
recommendations and in compliance with BS 6207-3:1995. The Contractor
shall ensure that all installation works shall be carried out by qualified and
specialist personnel who shall have received an approved course of
instructions in the termination and installations of mineral insulated cables.
All cables shall terminate in glands recommended by the cable manufacturer.

An earth tag shall be provided to facilitate fitting of earth bonds to the frames
of equipment. A PVC shroud shall be fitted over each gland.
All terminations shall be carried out using a system of compression jointing
as recommended by the cable manufacturer.
Special protective bushes shall be used at points where cables pass through
metal surface such as distribution boards and trunking.
BINDING AND IDENTIFICATION SLEEVES

Binding and identification sleeves for use on electric cables and wires shall comply
with the requirements of BS 3858:1992.
Page 4 of 4
INTRODUCTION
This document contains dus guidelines for the design, installation and commissioning of building
infrastructure for supporting telecommunications services in the UAE. The document is to help
building developers deliver high quality, future proof facilities that comply with dus Fibre technology
(FTTX) network standards. To ensure this compliance du requires building developers to go through
a No Objection Certificate (NOC) process, to submit to sites inspections and to provide material
samples for testing. Please contact du for more details about the NOC process.
The guidance in this document is based on international standards and dus extensive experience in
offering telecommunications services. du always advises its clients to use qualified and certified
professionals in all aspects of telecommunication infrastructure design, installation and
commissioning.
It is recommended to engage with du at an early stage in any development so that process and
design issues can be explained. du welcomes questions from developers so that it can always offer
the best advice and information.
It is important to note that if a building developer or tenant has special needs or enhanced
requirements that may require modifications to these guidelines du must be consulted at the design
stage. In exceptional cases du may need to increase the requirements specified in this document to
be able to offer service.
This document covers the following building types:
Single villas and villa complexes

Residential towers and groups of residential towers
Commercial towers and groups of commercial towers
Shopping malls
Group of shops or retails outlets
Hospital, hotels and other bulk service applications
Warehouses and sheds
The document is structured so as to provide clear sections on all aspects of the infrastructure
Telecommunication spaces
Pathways
Electro-Mechanical
Cables
Duct entry
All telecom spaces, pathways, ducts and cabling system specified in this document are for the
exclusive use of du.
Emirates Integrated Telecommunications Company PJSC (EITC)

Building infrastructure standards V4
The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing.
There are separate documents that cover developing outside plant (OSP) for master plans. Please
contact du if you require more information on such cases.
July 2008
www.du.ae
Copy right Emirates Integrated Telecommunications Company PJSC (EITC)
-1-
www.du.ae
TELECOMMUNICATION SPACES
and pathways. This could involve the installation of covers to cable trays; if this is the case these
covers must be removable to allow for the installation of additional cables.
General specifications
The walls, floor, and ceiling of telecom rooms must be finished so as to minimize dust and static
electricity. Walls and ceilings shall receive primer and finish coat of light colour paint.
A number of telecom rooms will be required in a building depending on the characteristics of the
building. The following room types are required and the details of these rooms are included in the
text below and summarised in Appendix 1.
In order to move equipment into and out of telecom rooms no access from outside of the building to
these rooms should be less than 900mm x 2100mm (WxH)
A telephone socket must be provided in each area of the telecom rooms wired to the building
telephone system.
Main telecom room

Mobile-service room
Roof-top mobile-service room
Floor telecom closet
Safety and other considerations
The height measurements specified are the minimum finished clearance after taking into account
allowances for raised floors, overhead cable trays and any other obstructions. In the case that
overhead trays are used a minimum headroom access of 300mm is required above the tray.
All telecom rooms must comply with all municipality and national authority standards and
regulations; such as those issued by civil defence and utility companies. Notwithstanding this, it is
expected that following will be provided:
In multi-story buildings the telecom rooms should be vertical aligned and linked by a shared
containment system. This containment system must not reduce the minimum requested space.
All telecom spaces should be fitted with smoke detectors connected to the building
management system.
All telecom rooms must be dedicated to the use of du. The rooms must be easily accessible to du
personnel 24 hours a day and secured from unauthorised entry.
All telecom spaces should be fitted with normal and emergency lighting.
All containment openings to telecom spaces must be sealed with a regulation fire retardant
material.
All doors to telecom rooms must be of solid wood core or steel construction, fire retardant
with a minimum rating of 2 hours. All doors to telecom rooms must be outward opening with
an automatic door closer system fitted on the hinged edge.
All doors to telecom rooms must be labelled. Details of the labeling scheme are given in
Appendix 2.
The room must free from contaminants and pollutants as defined in Appendix 3.
All telecom rooms should have basic fire fighting provision of two handheld CO2 cylinder
type extinguishers.
Telecom rooms must not be in close proximity to any sources of the following:
Heat
Moisture
Corrosive atmospheric or environmental conditions
High voltages,
Radio frequency interference (RFI)
Electro-magnetic interference (EMI)
The rooms must not be directly beneath or next to wet areas such as:
Showers
Washrooms
Swimming pools
Garbage areas
Temperature and humidity
If for any reason it is proposed that any part of a telecom room will be located below the water table
then this must be raised at the design stage. This situation will require a floor drain fitted with an
automatic submersible pump to counter any risk of water ingress.
The rooms should be clean and free from any items not directly related to the specifications in this
document such as:
To enable the building developer to design the air conditioning system the maximum heat
dissipation of the equipment in the various room types is given in Appendix 1
Whilst the detailed design of the air conditioning system is the responsibility of the building
developer the following design principles must be followed:
Equipment
Utility pipes
Cables
Sprinkler systems
Windows
Pests
All telecom spaces and pathways must be pest controlled using best available practices. In the case
of pests it should be noted that rodents often gnaw cables resulting in damage and the potential of
service disruption. Special attention should be given to preventing rodents entering telecom spaces
All the telecom rooms, with the exception of the floor telecom closets, must be provided with an air
conditioning system to main the temperature at 20C 3C and the relative humidity at 50% 10%.
-2-
www.du.ae
Dedicated duty and stand-by units

Units interlocked based on sensing power failure or over temperature.
Stand-by unit connected to emergency electrical supply
All units located outside the telecom rooms
Both units connected to the building management system
Air flow to feed each telecom space via dedicated ducting
-3-
www.du.ae
MAIN TELECOM ROOM
MAIN TELECOM ROOM - raised flooring system:
A main telecom room must be provided on the ground floor for all multi-story buildings. This room
will be used for the termination of telecom cables and to house telecom equipment both now and in
the future.
The main telecom room should have a raised floor. This raised floor should provide a minimum
depth of 300mm above the base floor of the room. The floor should comply with the following
additional specifications:
The minimum room dimensions will depend on the function and features of the building. The
specifications are detailed in Table 1 below and drawings are provided in Appendix 4.
Tile dimensions
Single villas
No requirement
Complex of villas
Multi-Tenant
Multi-tenant
15 to 50
up to G+10
or
up to 150 apartments
or
up to 9,000m2
G+11 to G+100
or
151 to 1000 apartments
or
9,001 to 90,000m2
3 x 3 x 3m
(W xDxH)
4 x 3 x 3m
(W xDxH)
3 x 3 x 3m
(W xDxH)
Located in a common
area of the master plan
Located on the ground floor

Located on the ground floor
common area
common area
Table 1 - Main telecom room specifications
Shopping malls,
warehouses, groups of
shops, retail outlets
and bulk service
applications
A standard size of 600mm x 600mm must be used. The thickness of bare tile, excluding top and
bottom coverings, must be 35mm.
Tile surfaces
The top surface of the raised floor tiles must be a high pressure laminate anti-static type. The
underside must have a conductive surface.
4 x 3 x 3m
(W xDxH)
Located on the ground
floor common area
The door to the main telecom room must be outward opening with a minimum opening of 900mm x
2100mm (WxH). The door should be labelled Main Telecom Room.
The main telecom room must be provided with a raised floor with a height of 300mm above the base
floor of the room. The detailed specification of the raised floor is provided in the next section.
Tile core
Calcium Sulphate based tiles are preferred.
To comply with UAE regulations the tile panel must have the following fire rating:
Fire retardant - 2 hours with a flame spread of 20

Heat resistant minimum of 60 minutes.
Load rating - uniform: The minimum uniform distributed load must be 7kN/m
Load rating - concentrated

In addition to the basic fire fighting provision detailed earlier, the main telecom room must be
provided with an additional automatic fire suppression system that uses inert atmospheric gases.
The system must be linked to a fire suppression system panel outside of the room.
The minimum concentrated load is 18.6kN/m2. Tile deflection must not exceed 2mm.
Load rating - collapse or ultimate
If the inside level of the room is not at the same height as the outside access then a suitable ramped
entry with an anti-slip surface must me provided. A threshold step of 100mm must also be provided
inside the room under the raised floor to prevent any ingress of water from outside the room.
The minimum collapse load must be 55kN/m
Electrical performance
All cables in the main telecom room must be properly routed to the desired destinations under the
raised floor, for that an adequate sized cable tray system must be installed to maintain the
connectivity as described in appendix 4
Surface and volume resistance (at 500V) 1x105 1x1010 ohm

All metal parts of the raised floor system must be earth bonded
Pedestals
The pedestal specification must be as follows:
All pedestals in contact with the finished slab surface

Fixed with glue and screws to the finished slab
Allow a void below the raised floor of minimum depth 300mm
Support a minimum off-center loading of 12kN
Support a minimum centre loading of 30kN
Have a height adjusting and locking nut system
Understructure system
A stringer system must be provided where the stringers are able to support a minimum loading on
the raised floor of 1kN.
Tile lifter
A tile lifter must be provided in each area of the main telecom room.
-4-
www.du.ae
-5-
www.du.ae
CLUSTERED BUILDINGS- group of towers

If a project consists of a cluster of multi-tenant buildings then all of the requirements of a single
tower still apply. However, it may be possible to reduce the requirements for individual telecom
rooms. This would require the cluster of buildings to be linked to the designated main telecom room.
The details of this arrangement should be discussed with du at the design stage.
A floor telecom closet must be provided on each floor of all multi-story buildings. The floor telecom
closet is required to provide a flexible point for the installation and maintenance of telecom cables.
The specifications are detailed in Table 2 below and drawings provided in Appendix 4
Complex of
villas
15 to 50
No
requirement*
No
requirement*
The mobile-service rooms must have a minimum distributed floor load rating of 10 KN/m2
The doors to these rooms must be outward opening with a minimum opening of 900mm x 2100mm
(WxH). The doors should be labelled Mobile service room
FLOOR TELECOM CLOSETS
Single villas
Mobile-service rooms must be provided every 10 floors starting at the lowest basement level with a
size 3m x 2m x 3m (WxDxH) with a secured access.
Multi-Tenant
Multi-tenant
up to G+10
or
up to 150
apartments
or
up to 9,000m2
G+11 to G+100
or
151 to 1000
apartments
or
9,001 to 90,000m2
Shopping
malls
Residential:
2 x 1 x 3m
(W xDxH)
Residential:
2x1x
3m(W xDxH)
Commercial:
2 x 2 x 3m
(W xDxH)
Commercial:
2 x 2 x 3m
(W xDxH)l
Groups of shops,
retail outlets and
bulk services
applications
Warehouses
ROOF-TOP MOBILE-SERVICE ROOM (up to G+10)

Roof-top mobile-service rooms must be provided on the roof of all multi-tenant buildings up to G+10
and access must be provided to the building riser system. The specifications are detailed below in
Table 4 and drawings are provided in Appendix 4.
Single
villas
Complex of
villas
15 to 50
3 x 3 x 3m
(WxDxH)
2 x 2 x 3m
(W xDxH)
Located in all
served floors
Located in a common
area on each floor
No
requirement*
No
requirement
No
requirement
Multi-Tenant
Multi-tenant
up to G+10
or
up to 150
apartments
or
up to
9,000m2
G+11 to
G+100
or
151 to 1000
apartments
or
9,001 to
90,000m2
No
requirement
3 x 3 x 3m
(W xDxH)
Shopping
malls
Groups of shops, retail

outlets and bulk services
applications
Warehouses
Defined at
design stage
Defined at
design stage
Defined at
design stage
On roof top
Table 4 - Roof-top mobile services room specifications
Located in a
Located in a
common area on
common area on
each floor
each floor
Table 2 - Floor telecom closet specifications
* Note: In the case of a multi-story home, office, warehouse, retail shop, etc, floor distribution boxes will be required
with a minimum size of 300 x 300 x 150 mm (WxHxD)
The door to this room should be outward opening with a minimum opening of 900mm x 2100mm
(WxH); the doors should be labelled Roof Telecom Room.
The roof-top mobile room must have a minimum distributed floor load rating of 10 KN/m
The temperature of the floor telecom closets must be maintained in range 20 30oC. In special
cases where the floor telecom closet may need to house non-standard equipment the room
specification must be increased in line with those for a main telecom room. This must be discussed
at the design stage.
The closets must be provided with two outward opening doors with a minimum total opening of
1500mm x 2100mm (WxH). The door should be labelled Floor Telecom Closet
An opening must be provided with a dimension of 600mm x 400mm (WxH), 500mm below the room
ceiling in walls facing the buildings roof-top area.
Space must be reserved on the roof-top of the building for the installation of mobile-service
antennas. This will vary from building to building, but will typically be at the corners of the building or
on any raised structure on the roof-top. The exact details will be defined at the design stage.
MOBILE-SERVICE ROOMS (more than G+10)

Mobile-service rooms must be provided in all multi-tenant buildings above G+10. The specifications
are detailed in Table 3 below and drawings are provided in Appendix 4.
Single
villas
Complex of
villas
15 to 50
No
requirement
No
requirement
Multi-Tenant
Multi-tenant
up to G+10
or
up to 150
apartments
or
up to 9,000m2
G+11 to G+100
or
151 to 1000
apartments
or
9,001 to 90,000m2
No
requirement
Shopping
malls
Groups of shops,
retail outlets and bulk
services applications
3 x 2 x 3m
Defined at
Defined at
design stage
design stage
(WxDxH)
Every 10 floors
starting from
lowest basement
Table 3 Mobile-service room specifications
-6-
Warehouses
Defined at
design stage
www.du.ae
-7-
www.du.ae
HOME CONSOLIDATION CABINETS - residential
OFFICE CONSOLIDATION CABINETS (commercial shell and core)
The home consolidation cabinet is a space to house dus network termination equipment. It also
serves as the distribution point for all of the local wiring. A consolidation cabinet should be provided
in each home. This should be a telecom cabinet with the following minimum specifications:
In the case of a shell and core development one consolidation cabinet must be provided in each
floor telecom closet. The cabinet specifications are as follows:
Minimum internal dimensions 860mm x 600mm x 150 mm (HxWxD)

Mounted flush with the wall
Located in an accessible area inside the home close to the entrance and not inside a
kitchen, laundry room or bedroom
Installed at a height of 1200mm (measured between the finished floor level and the bottom
edge of the cabinet)
An adequate safe working space around the location
Adequate ambient lighting
Not close to sources of water or heat
Not close to any electrical distribution or bus bars
Adequate ventilation must be provided; minimum of one air change per hour.
Fitted with RJ45 patch panel
Lockable front door
Vertical and horizontal cable management for (Unshielded Twisted Pair) UTP patch cables
Sufficient cable entries to accommodate the incoming fibre optic and UTP cables
Contain a dual 13A switched socket power outlet fed from a dedicated circuit breaker on the
domestic supply
Labelled with villa or flat number
A drawing of a typical home consolidation cabinet is provided in Appendix 4.
OFFICE CONSOLIDATION CABINETS

(Commercial predefined offices, warehouses, sheds, shops)
Dimensions 42U x 800mm x 800mm (HxWxD)

Lockable side and rear panels and a lockable front door
Provision for an air circulation of one change per hour
Vertical and horizontal cable management for UTP patching cables
Fitted with minimum 8 way power distribution unit (PDU)
Jacking feet
Labelled with floor number
When a tenant moves into a shell and core building it is expected that they will install consolidation
cabinets in each office or business area. The specifications of these consolidation cabinets are as
described in the previous section on office consolidation cabinets - commercial predefined rooms.
However these specifications may need to be increased to the meet tenants actual requirements.
The tenant may wish to provide their own telecom room space and extend the connectivity to the
cabinet in the floor telecom closet. Where UTP cables do need to terminate in the floor telecom
closet this must be on a wall mounted patch panel or termination block at a common point
accessible to du.
All installed cables must be properly routed inside the floor telecom closet to the desired destination
under a raised floor or in overhead cable trays. Additionally, an adequately sized cable tray system
must be installed to maintain connectivity between the cabinet and the wall mounted patch panel
where the UTP cables are terminated (see recommendations in Appendix 5).
In these types of cases the building tenants will need to discus the requirements with du at the time
of fit-out.
The office consolidation cabinet is a space to house dus network termination equipment. It also
serves as the distribution point for all of the local wiring. A consolidation cabinet must be provided in
each business area. This should be a telecom cabinet with the following minimum specifications:
Minimum internal dimensions 860mm x 600mm x 300 mm (HxWxD)

Located in an accessible area inside the office close to the entrance and not inside a pantry,
washroom, etc.
Installed at a height of 1200mm (measured between the finished floor level and the bottom
edge of the cabinet)
An adequate safe working space around the location
Adequate ambient lighting
Not close to sources of water or heat
Not close to any electrical distribution or bus bars
Adequate ventilation must be provided; minimum of one air change per hour
Fitted with patch panel or termination block / frame
Lockable front door
Vertical and horizontal cable management for UTP patching cables
Contain a dual 13A switched socket power outlet fed from a dedicated circuit breaker on the
domestic supply
Labelled with office/room number
A drawing of a typical business consolidation cabinet is provided in Appendix 4.
-8-
www.du.ae
-9-
www.du.ae
ELECTRO-MECHANICAL
EARTH BARS all rooms
All telecom rooms must be provided with electrical supplies. The details of the requirements for the
various rooms are included in the text below and summarised in Appendix 1.
All telecom rooms, with the exception of floor telecom closets, must be fitted with two clean earth
bars of the following specifications:
Diagrams of the telecom rooms showing the positions of the electrical systems and electrical single
line diagrams are included in Appendix 4.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS main telecom room

Sub-Main Distribution Board
One earth bar for AC

One earth bar for DC
Minimum length of 500mm
Minimum of 10 holes of 12mm diameter
Each must be connected to its own earth pit with a resistance of less than 1 ohm
Clearly labelled as AC and DC respectively
The main telecom room should be provided with a Sub-Main Distribution Board (SMDB) with a 125A
main incomer from the buildings Essential Distribution Board (EDB).
The output side of the SMDB must have a minimum of 7 ways, fitted with Moulded Case Circuit
Breakers (MCCB) as detailed below:
4 x 63A
1 x 40A
2 x Not fitted (Spare)
Distribution Sockets
Two 13A twin sockets must be installed in the main telecom room.
One twin 13A socket must also be provided located next to the entry door at a height of 2.2m above
finished floor level.
These sockets must be supplied from the normal building utility supply on a spur with a dedicated
20A circuit breaker.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS floor telecom closet

The following electrical systems must be provided in the floor telecom closet
Two 13A twin sockets, one on each side of the closet, fed from the normal building supply
on spurs with dedicated circuit breakers rated at 20 A.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS mobile-service room

The following electrical systems must be provided in the mobile-service telecom room:
63A 3 phase isolators fed from essential building power

Two 13A twin sockets fed from the normal building supply on spurs with dedicated circuit
breakers rated at 20A.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS roof-top mobile-service room

The following electrical systems must be provided in the roof-top mobile-service room:
63A 3 phase isolators fed from essential building power

Two 13A twin sockets fed from the normal building supply on spurs with dedicated circuit
breakers rated at 20A.
- 10 -
www.du.ae
- 11 -
www.du.ae
PATHWAYS
HORIZONTAL CONTAINMENT multi-story / multi-tenant buildings
General Specifications
Floor telecom closet to consolidation points
The following requirements must be applied to all containment systems:
The horizontal containment for routing cables from the floor telecom closets to consolidation points
on the served floor can use a number of systems (conduits, cable trays, etc.). The solution will
depend on the characteristics of the building type; the specifications are given in Appendix 1.
Conduits must only be used when the consolidation point locations are permanent, the cable density
is low and the flexibility to modify the routing is not required. Specification for the size of this
containment is given in Appendix 5.
The containment system must be designed so that installed cables do not exceed the
minimum specified bend radius
All metal containment parts must be free from sharp edges and earth bonded
Telecom riser openings must be sealed with a suitable fire retardant material
Cable trays must be easily accessible in common areas to facilitate any future provision of
additional cables
Any cable trays that are in publically accessible areas less than 4.8m above the floor must
be covered
Containment systems must not run through areas exposed to excessive heat, moisture,
corrosive atmospheric or environmental conditions, high voltages, radio frequency
interference (RFI) or electro-magnetic interference (EMI)
For all containment systems a minimum separation must be maintained from sources of
electromagnetic interference. Further details are provided in Appendix 6.
The building developer may want to consider redundant containment systems, particularly in
commercial or prestigious developments. du must be contacted at the design stage to
discuss any such requirements.
Generally, the following minimum dimensions must be provided:
Mobile service antennas

Cable trays must be provided to route mobile-service antenna cables from the floor telecom closets
to the antenna locations. One cable tray following minimum dimensions must be provided:
VERTICAL CONTAINMENT multi-story / multi-tenant buildings
It is recommended that the main telecom room and floor telecom closets should be designed so that
they are vertically aligned within the building.
Two cable trays, with the following minimum dimensions must be provided:
One of 500mm x 100mm (WxH) with Heavy Duty Return Flange (HDRF)
One of 300 mm x 100mm (WxH) with Heavy Duty Return Flange (HDRF)
VERTICAL CONTAINMENT - within homes

In case of multi-floor apartments / villas the UTP cables between the floors must run through
(minimum) 50mm diameter PVC conduits via a junction / pull boxes located on each floor. The
junction / pull boxes must be of minimum dimensions 300mm x 300mm x 150mm (WxHxD). The
slab opening (if required) for these conduits must be in a suitable and accessible location in every
floor. It is recommended that all vertical conduit runs be aligned to ease the installation of cables.
- 12 -
HORIZONTAL CONTAINMENT - within homes

All UTP cables inside the home must run through PVC conduit with a minimum 25mm diameter from
the home consolidation point to each dual outlet. If more than one dual outlet is fed by a conduit
then the size and quantity of the conduit may need to be up rated. Please refer to Appendix 5
Intermediate PVC junction / pull boxes must be provided on individual runs that exceed 30m. PVC
junction /pull boxes must also be provided where an individual conduit run has a sharp change in
direction.
The conduit boxes referred to above must have the following minimum internal dimensions:
If it is not possible to provide all of the cable trays runs vertically then horizontal trays of the same
size should be provided.
200mm x 50mm (WxH) with Heavy Duty Return Flange (HDRF)
Final Antenna plan / location will be provided at the design stage.
Risers must be provided in multi-story multi-tenant buildings to allow the installation of telecom
cables from the main telecom room to the floor telecom closets, mobile -services rooms and roof-top
mobile-service rooms. Hot-Dip Galvanised (HDG) slotted steel cable trays must be provided in the
risers to carry the telecom cables between all of the telecom rooms.
One 200mm x 100mm (WxH) cable tray with Heavy Duty Return Flange (HDRF) as a main
route from floor telecom closet to main corridors and then branches to each home
consolidation cabinet through cable trays of 50mm x 50mm (WxH)
www.du.ae
300mm x 300mm x 150 mm (HxWxD)
CLUSTER OF BUILDINGS groups of towers

Where a building consists of a group of towers (on a common shared podium) all of the
requirements of a single tower still apply. In addition cable trays must be provided linking the main
telecom rooms of the towers. Two cable trays following minimum dimensions must be provided:
300 mm x 100mm (WxH) with Heavy Duty Return Flange (HDRF).
These trays should be readily accessible in common areas to facilitate any future provision of
additional cables. However, if these trays are in an area accessible to the public and are less than
4.8m above the floor then the trays should be covered.
- 13 -
www.du.ae
For all scenarios except commercial shell and core 3m of spare fibre must be left neatly coiled in the
consolidation cabinet. In the commercial shell and core cases enough fibre to reach the furthest part
of the floor area must be left coiled in the consolidation cabinet in the floor telecom closet.
CABLES
General specifications
The quantity and type of cabling that must be provided by the building developer shown in Appendix
1 and described in the text below.
Building developer must submit as-built drawings of all the cabling they provide to du. This must
include test reports showing that the performance of the cabling system meets defined
requirements. Details for labeling of cables are included in Appendix 2 and the details of cable
performance standards and testing are included in Appendix 7.
The fibre should be labelled at both ends with a unique reference for the consolidation point served
and the room or area of origin. Labeling details are included in Appendix 2
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES from main telecom room to roof-top mobile-service

room
2 fibre pair cables must be provided from the main telecom room to the roof-top mobile-service
rooms. 10m of spare fibre must be left neatly coiled.
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES - specification

CAT3 COPPER CABLES from main telecom room to consolidation points
The following type of fibre must be provided:
CAT3 copper cables must be provided in commercial areas and buildings. The quantity of CAT3
cables from the main telecom room to the consolidation points depends on the characteristics of the
building. Table 6 below provides details on how to calculate the number of cables required.
Single mode
Indoor drop fibres
Individual pairs
Suitable for LC connectors
Bend insensitive
Compliant with ITU-T G.652
Jacket made from halogen free and flame retardant material
Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH)
Single
villas
Complex of
villas
15 to 50
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES from main telecom room to consolidation points
No
requirement
No
requirement
The quantity fibre optic cables that must be provided and installed from the main telecom room to
the consolidation points depends on the characteristics of the building. Table 5 below provides
details on how to calculate the quantity of fibre optic cables required.
Single
villas
Complex of
villas
15 to 50
No
requirement
No
requirement
Multi-Tenant
Multi-tenant
up to G+10
or
up to 150
apartments
or
2
up to 9,000m
G+11 to G+100
or
151 to 1000
apartments
or
2
9,001 to 90,000m
Residential:
1 pair per
apartment
Residential:
1 pair per
apartment
Commercial:
2
1 pair per 100m of
leasable area plus
20% spare (add 1
pair for any offices
less than
2
100m )
Shopping malls
and groups
shops or retail
outlets
Bulk service
applications
Warehouses
Multi-Tenant
Multi-tenant
up to G+10
or
up to 9,000m2
G+11 to G+100
or
9,001 to 90,000m2
Commercial:
2
1 pair per 100m of
leasable area plus
20% spare (add 1
less than
100m2)
Shopping malls
and groups
shops or retail
outlets
Commercial:
2
6 pairs per shop
1 pair per 100m of
or for shops over
leasable area plus
500m2 6 pairs per
20% spare (add 1
500m2
less than
2
100m )
Table 6 CAT3 cable requirements
Bulk service
applications
Defined at
design stage
Warehouses
6 pairs per
warehouse
The cable specification must be of the following specifications:
Multi-pair Category 3 as per TIA/EIA-568-B

CMR or LSZH sheath
The cables must be provided from the main telecom room to each consolidation point. The cables
must be continuous lengths free from joints or branches. The cables must pass through the floor
telecom closet.
1 pair per shop or
for shops over
500m2 , 1 pair per
500m2
Defined at
design stage
1 pair per
warehouse
Commercial:
2
1 pair per 100m of
leasable area plus
20% spare (add 1
less than
2
100m )
Table 5 Fibre optic cable requirements
In the main telecom room 10m of spare cable must be left neatly coiled.
For all scenarios except commercial shell and core 3m of spare cable must be left neatly coiled in
the consolidation cabinet. In the commercial shell and core cases enough cable to reach the furthest
part of the floor area must be left coiled in the consolidation cabinet in the floor telecom closet.
The Cat 3 cables should be labelled at both ends with a unique reference for the consolidation point
served and the room or area of origin. Labeling details are included in Appendix 2
The fibres must be provided from the main telecom room to each consolidation point. The fibres
should be continuous lengths free from joints, branches or patching. The fibres should pass through
the floor telecom closet.
At the main telecom room 10m of spare fibre length must be left neatly coiled in all scenarios.
- 14 -
www.du.ae
- 15 -
www.du.ae
CAT6 COPPER CABLES from consolidation points to building outlets
ENTRY DUCTS
To deliver services from the consolidation points the building outlets unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
copper cables must be provided. The full design is the responsibly of the building developer,
however, the following minimum requirements must be followed for the efficient and effective
provision of services:
The building developer must provide lead-in ducts from the main telecom room to the plot boundary.
The exact connection points at the plot boundary will depend on whether du network already
reaches the plot.
Option 1 du duct network already exists
The cables must conform to a minimum of CAT6 specification (Category 6, 100 Ohm, 4 pair
24 AWG as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2 Addendum 1)
The wiring must be in a star topology fanning out from the consolidation point.
Dual RJ45 outlets with spring load sliding shutters must be provided where ever service is
required (all outlets should comply with the performance specifications as detailed in
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2 Addendum 6.)
Each socket in the dual RJ45 outlet must be wired back to the consolidation point
Outlets must not be cascaded or looped and there must be no splitting of cable pairs
The maximum cable length from consolidation point to outlet must not exceed 90m
At the consolidation point the cables should be terminated on an RJ45 patch panel and
labelled with the socket and outlet served
In each outlet each cable must be terminated to maintain the twists in each pair up to within
5mm of the termination
Proper strain relief should be provided at the terminated ends of the cable
The components of the CAT6 system must be from the same supplier or at least compatible
to insure maximum performance
Design should incorporate built-in flexibility to meet the growing needs of the occupants.
The CAT6 cabling system must be tested using an appropriate field test instrument for
compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2 Category 6 (or equivalent if a higher specification
has been used).
Numbering and colouring of the pairs should be as defined in EIA/TIA 568B, ISO 11801 /
EN50173 using the T568B option.
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
The building developer will be responsible to connect to du ducting system. The operator will identify
the location and quantity of their lead-in ducts.
Option 2 du duct network is still to be built
The building developer will be responsible to extend the lead-in duct to 1m outside the plot
boundary. The building developer is responsible for locating and clearly identifying lead-in ducts.
In both cases the building developer will be responsible for the Maintenance and repair of lead-in
ducts.
The lead-in ducts will be for the exclusive use of du. The quantity and size of these ducts for
different kind of developments is detailed in Appendix 1.
The lead-in duct specifications are as follows:
Public phones, ATM machines and retail kiosks
Provision needs to be made for the connection of public phones, ATM machines and retail kiosks.
This must use the same design as that prescribed for commercial buildings; one fibre pair and a
CAT3 cable pair from the main telecom room to a business consolidation cabinet. The business
consolidation cabinet must be in a secure location. If CAT6 cable is extended to the location of the
public phone, ATM machine or retail kiosk it must not exceed 90m
It is the responsibility of the building developer / consultant to coordinate with du at the design stage
for any special or non-standard requirements.
Made from black uPVC

Upmost part of ducts must be buried to a depth of 600mm below finished ground level
Clearly marked above ground level for easy location
Sloping away from the building
Protected by concrete when running under permanent paved surfaces
Sealed at each end to prevent the ingress of any materials such as water, sub-soil, gas, and
pests
An entry/pull box must be installed for any right-angled or sharp bends in the lead-in duct
route
If required at the entry to the main telecom room, a wide-angle long radius bend (factory
made) may be provided; alternatively an entry box may also be provided
All ducts must include a draw rope made of twisted mildew and rot resistant polypropylene;
minimum outside diameter of 6mm; minimum tensile strength of 2400lbs / 1000kg
In case of combined plots, two entry locations are still required for primary and secondary network
connections. (This will be advised by du at the design stage)
LEAD-IN DUCTS - Complex of villas

In the case of a complex of villas the building developer must connect the lead-in ducts to each villa
in the complex. The lead-in duct size must not be reduced until the branching point for an individual
villa.
LEAD-IN DUCTS group of buildings

In cases where the building developer wishes to share lead-in ducts between a group of buildings
(not on a common shared podium) then the design needs must be discussed with du at the design
stage.
- 16 -
www.du.ae
- 17 -
www.du.ae
LEAD-IN DUCTS - building entry
Spaces
Infrastructure element / building category
Main Telecom Room
up to 9,000m
up to
G+10 or
or
Multi-Tenant
9,001 to 90,000m
G+11 to
G+100 or
or
Multi-tenant
Shopping malls
Groups of shops or
retails outlets
Hospitals and hotels (bulk

service)
Defined at design stage
3m x 4m x 3m
(on ground floor)
3m x 3m x 3m
(for a complex of shops)
3m x 3m x 3m
(for a complex of warehouses)
3m x 4m x 3m
(on ground floor)
4m x 3m x 3m
(every 10 floors starting
from lowest basement)
2m x 2m x 3m (WxDxH)
(all floors)
(all floors)
12U x 600mm x 300mm

(HxWxD)
(all served floors)
12U x 600mm x 300mm

(HxWxD)
12U x 600mm x 300mm

(HxWxD)
point (defined at design stage)
properly sized cable

tray system from floor
closet
to each consolidation
telecom
consolidation
room to each
point (defined at design stage)
properly sized cable tray

system from nearest telecom
Cable trays
1 x 500mm x 100mm +
1 x 300mm x 100mm
(Quantity x WxH)

system from floor telecom
closet to each consolidation
point (defined at design
stage)

system from nearest telecom
room to each consolidation
stage)
Conduit
2 x 50mm (Quantiy x
Diameter) / as required
(all floors)
(all floors)
12U x 600mm x 150mm
(HxWxD)
12U x 600mm x 300mm
(HxWxD)
42U x 800mm x 800mm
(HxWxD)
(in floor telecom closet)
main cable tray (minimum):

1 x 200mm x 100mm
(Quantity x WxH)
(HDG) from Floor telecom
closet to main corridor
and
brach cable tray to each OCP
(minimum): 1x50mmx50mm
(Quantity xWxH)
and
1 x 200mm x 100mm
(Quantity x WxH)
(HDG) from Floor
telecom closet to antenna
locations
stage)
Cable trays
1 x 500mm x 100mm +
1 x 300mm x 100mm
(Quantity x WxH)
3m x 4m x 3m
(on ground floor)
Complex of Villas
15 to 50
2
Single Villas

stage)
main cable tray (minimum):

1 x 200mm x 100mm
(Quantity x WxH) (HDG)
from Floor telecom closet
to main corridor
and
brach cable tray to each
OCP (minimum):
1x50mmx50mm (Quantity
xW xH)
12U x 600mm x 300mm

12U x 600mm x 300mm
(HxWxD)
(HxWxD)
(in each office area)
(in each office area)
Cable trays
Cable trays
1 x 500mm x 100mm +
1 x 500mm x 100mm +
1 x 300mm x 100mm
1 x 300mm x 100mm
(Quantity x WxH)
(Quantity x WxH)
main cable tray:
1 x 200mm x 100mm
main cable tray:
1 x 200mm x 100mm
to main corridor
and
to main corridor
brach cable tray to each HCP:
and
1x50mmx50mm
brach cable tray to each HCP:
(Quantity xWxH) and
1x50mmx50mm
1 x 200mm x 100mm
(Quantity xWxH)
to antenna locations
3m x 3m x 3m
(on roof-top)
2m x 1m x 3m
(WxDxH) (all
2m x 2m
x 3m
floors)
(WxDxH) (all
12U x 600mm
floors) x 150mm
(HxWxD)
12U x 600mm x 300mm
(HxWxD)
42U x 800mm x 800mm
(HxWxD)
(in floor telecom closet)
3m x 3m x 3m
(on ground floor)
3m x 3m x 3m
(on ground floor)
Mobile Service Room
Residential
-
12U x 600mm x 150mm

(HxW xD)
Commercial
12U x 600mm x 150mm

(HxWxD)
Residential
Commercial
(shell and core)
Conduit
2 x 50mm
(Quantiy x Diameter)
Conduit
2 x 50mm
(Quantiy x Diameter)
Commercial
(pre-defined offices)
Roof-top Mobile-Service Room
Floor Telecom Closet
Home Consolidation
Cabinet
A cable tray of minimum dimensions 500mm x 100mm (WxH) with Heavy Duty Return Flange
(HDRF) will be required for each pair of D54 entry duct pipes.
www.du.ae
- 19 -
Office Consolidation
Cabinet
The quantity of trays required will depend on the entry duct requirements specified in Appendix 1.
Residential
The quantity and location of the entry boxes will depend on the route from the main telecom room to
du network. Entry boxes must be included wherever the duct system has right-angle or sharp bends
or other factors to facilitate cable pulling.
Main Risers
Horizontal
The following specifications must be followed:
A more detailed set of entry box specifications and drawings are included in Appendix 8.
Entry boxes are required for du to install their cables through the lead-in duct. The type and size of
entry/pull boxes will depend on the characteristics of the building development. The details for entry
boxes are included the text below and summarised in Appendix 1.
Commercial
(pre-defined offices)
LEAD-IN DUCTS entry box

www.du.ae
- 18 Building infrastructure standards V4
Commercial
(shell and core)
Constructed of reinforced concrete

Fitted with a ductile iron frame and cover
Minimum load rating 400kN
Cover marked du - Telecom
An earth rod must be provided with a resistance of lees than 5 ohms.
Pathways
Where lead-in ducts cannot be routed directly into the main telecom room Hot-Dip Galvanised
(HDG) slotted steel cable trays must be provided as an alternative. These trays must be easily
accessible in common areas to facilitate any future provision of additional cables. However, if these
trays are in an area accessible to the public and are less that 4.8m above the floor then the trays
must be covered.
APPENDIX 1 specification of minimum quantities and dimensions
LEAD-IN DUCTS
Electrical Supply
Heat dissipation
Floor Loading
Air Conditioning
Fire fighting
Ducts
Commercial
Commercial
Residential
A high quality outdoor label should be fixed to the outside of the building or compound wall at the
point where the lead-in ducts enter the plot. The label should read Telecom duct followed by the
plot number and, if there is more that one lead-in duct location, a unique reference number.
All telecom rooms

(excluding floor
closets)
Main Telecom Room
Floor Telecom Closet
Roof-top Mobile
Service Room Mobile
Services Rooms
Mobile Service Rooms
Roof-top room
Main Telecom Room
Main Telecom Room
Copper cables (CAT6)
Copper cables (CAT3)
Fibre Optic Cables
Infrastructure element / Building category
Electrical and
environmental
Cables
All the infrastructure components described in this document must be clearly and uniquely labelled.
The label information must correspond with the descriptions on the as-built drawings.
Entry Duct
The type of label used must be suitable for the object being labelled and its environment. This is
particularly important for cables and consolidation cabinets where a high quality printed selflaminating type must be used.
Entry Box
All telecom space must be labelled with the function of the space and the floor level.
2 x D56 (50mm)
2 pairs per outlet
Installed by du
Single Villas
TELECOM SPACES
600mm x 600mm x 800mm
per villa
Installed by du
Complex of Villas
15 to 50
Main Telecom Room 1

Mobile-service Room B5
Floor Telecom Closet 12
Multi-Tenant
All consolidation points must be labelled with a meaningful reference.

Examples:
Multi-tenant
CP.02.02 - consolidation point in Villa 2 in street 2
9,001 to 90,000m2
G+11 to G+100
or
or
CP.01.01 - consolidation point in apartment 1 on the first floor
CABLES
1 x 125A plus DB
2 x 13A twin socket
1 x AC and DC earth bars
1 x 125A plus DB
2 x 13A twin socket
Shopping malls
2 pairs per outlet
6 pairs per shop or for shops

2
2
over 500m , 6 pairs per 500m
1 pair per shop or for shops

2
2
over 500m , 1 pair per 500m
Groups of shops or retails

outlets
CABLE TRAYS
2 pairs per outlet
Installed by du
DU.MTR-CP.02.02#F0002 - fibre core 2 from the du main telecom room area to the consolidation
point in Villa 2 in street 2
Dedicated air-conditioning system to maintain room temperature at 20o C 3oC
100kN/m (distributed load)
1 x 63A isolator
1 x 63A isolator
2 x 13A twin socket
2 x 13A twin socket
30KW
30KW
36kW for Roof-top room
36kW for Roof-top room
and
and
13kW for each mobile service 13kW for each mobile service
room
room
2
DU.MTR-CP.01.01#F0001 - fibre core 1 from the Du main telecom room area to the consolidation
point in apartment 1 on the first floor
1 x smoke detector connected 1 x smoke detector connected

to BMS
to BMS
JRC12
JRC12
JRC12
2 x D56 (50mm) per retail

2 x D54 (100mm) primary plot
2 x D54 (100mm) primary plot
entry
entry
and
and
2 x D54 (100mm) secondary
plot entry
plot entry
600mm x 600mm x 800mm 600mm x 600mm x 800mm
per warehouse
per shop
plus JRC12 for plot entry
2 x D56 (50mm) per

warehouse
2 x hand-held CO2 cylinder extinguishers, 1 x smoke detector and automatic fire suppression system (Inert gas type)
2 x hand-held CO2 cylinder
2 x hand-held CO2 cylinder
extinguishers
extinguishers
100kN/m (distributed load)
Examples:
1 pair per apartment

1 pair per apartment
1 pair per 100m2 of leasable 1 pair per 100m 2 of leasable
1 pair per shop or for shops
area plus 20% spare
area plus 20% spare
(add 1 pair for any offices less (add 1 pair for any offices less over 500m2 , 1 pair per 500m 2
than 100m 2 )
than 100m 2 )
2
2
1 pair per 100m of leasable 1 pair per 100m of leasable
6 pairs per shop or for shops
area plus 20% spare
area plus 20% spare
(add 1 pair for any offices less (add 1 pair for any offices less over 500m2 , 6 pairs per 500m 2
than 100m 2 )
than 100m 2 )
2 pairs per outlet
2 pairs per outlet
2 pairs per outlet
up to 9,000m2
up to G+10
or
or
CONSOLIDATION POINTS
2 x D56 (50mm) per villa 4 x D54 (100mm) primary route 4 x D54 (100mm) primary route 4 x D54 (100mm) primary route
and
and
and
4 x D54 (100mm) for plot entry 4 x D54 (100mm) secondary 4 x D54 (100mm) secondary 4 x D54 (100mm) secondary
route
route
route
30KW
2 pairs per outlet

1 x 125A plus DB
2 x 13A twin socket
Examples:
600mm x 600mm x 800mm
per villa
Telecom cables
Mobile-service cables
Cable trays and conduits must be labelled based on the services to be carried:
JRC12
2 x D54 (100mm) primary route

and
route
2 pairs per outlet
Hospitals and hotels (bulk

service)
All cable types to be labelled

Both ends to be labelled
Both ends to correspond
Meaningful references; e.g. Apartment number and floor, Villa number and street, etc.
www.du.ae

www.du.ae
APPENDIX 2 administration and labelling scheme
APPENDIX 3 building contaminants

Maximum acceptable concentration
0.01 ppm
100 g/m/24h
4 g/m/24h
0.05 ppm
0.1 ppm
0.3 ppm
Fire Alarm Panel
900mm.
2 x handheld CO2
cylinder extinguishers
13A Twin Socket fed from utility power

at 2.2 m above finish floor level
SMDB
Contaminant
Chlorine
Dust
Hydrocarbons
Hydrogen sulphide
Nitrogen oxides
Sulphur dioxide
APPENDIX 4 typical drawings / layouts
Entry ducts
4000mm.
fire suppression system (inert gas type)

150 X50 mm Power cable tray
13A Twin Socket From Utility

Power with dedicated circuit breaker
Smoke Detector connected to BMS
450X100 mm HDG cable tray under raised floor
DC Clean earth bar

AC Clean earth bar
13A Twin Socket From
Riser shaft
Utility Power with dedicated

circuit breaker
3000mm.
Fire Alarm Panel
900mm.
2 x handheld CO2
13A Twin Socket fed from utility power at
2.2 m above finish floor level
3000mm.
SMDB
150X50 mm power cable tray
fire suppression system

(inert gas type)
13A twin socket fed from utility
power with dedicated circuit breaker
13A twin socket fed from utility

power with dedicated circuit breaker
DC clean earth bar
AC clean earth bar
Smoke Detector connected to BMS
Entry ducts
Riser shaft
450X100 mm HDG cable tray under raised floor
3000mm.
- 22 -
www.du.ae
- 23 -
www.du.ae
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Home consolidation cabinet
Main telecom room layouts and electrical single line diagram
1
15
2
16
3
17
4
18
6
19
20
7
21
8
22
9
23
10
24
11
12
13
14
Office consolidation cabinet
- 24 -
www.du.ae
- 25 -
www.du.ae
Mobile service room

Floor telecom closet (2 x 2m)
900mm.
2 x handheld CO2
13 A twin socket fed

from utility power with
dedicated circuit breaker
13 A twin socket fed

from utility power with
dedicated circuit breaker
63A three phase Isolator

fed from essential
building power
3000mm.
Smoke Detector
connected to BMS
DC Clean earth bar
AC Clean earth bar

Riser Shaft
3000mm.
Roof top mobile service room
Floor telecom closet (2 x 1m)
- 26 -
www.du.ae
- 27 -
www.du.ae
APPENDIX 5 containment capacity guidelines
APPENDIX 6 separation from power sources
CABLE TRAYS AND TRUNKING CAT6

In a number of places this document gives specific sizes for containment systems. Where this is not
possible the building developer needs to calculate appropriate size for the containment system. The
following table gives maximum carrying capacities at installation for a range of containment
dimensions. Containment systems must be no more than 60% utilised when first installed. These
figures are based on a cable diameter of 5.893mm.
Cable tray dimensions

(WxH)
Trunking dimensions
(WxH)
50 x 50
50mm x 50mm
55
75 x 50
50mm x 75mm
82
100 x 50
50mm x 100mm
110
150 x 50
75mm x 100mm
165
200 x 50
100mm x 100mm
220
300 x 50
150mm x 150mm
330
450 x 50
150mm x 150mm
495
600 x 50
660
900 x 50
990
All pathways supporting telecommunications cabling must comply with the minimum separation
distances specified in TIA-568-B and TIA-569-A. A summary from these standards is shown below:
.
Minimum Separation Distance from Power Source <480V
Condition
<2kVA
2-5kVA
>5kVA
130mm
300mm
600mm
65mm
150mm
300mm
50mm
150mm
300mm
Transformers and Electric

Motors
1000mm
1000mm
1000mm
Fluorescent lighting
300mm
300mm
300mm
Unshielded power lines or

electrical equipment in
proximity to open or nonmetal pathways
Unshielded power lines or
electrical equipment in
proximity to grounded
metal conduit pathway
Power lines enclosed in a
grounded metal conduit (or
equivalent shielding (in
proximity to grounded
metal conduit pathway)
CAT6 cable capacity
CONDUIT CAPACITY CAT6

Where CAT6 cables are installed through conduit it is essential that spare capacity is left for the
removal and replacement of cables. The table below gives the recommended maximum initial
number of CAT6 cables to be installed in popular conduit sizes. This is based on a CAT6 cable
diameter of 5.893mm.
Nominal conduit
diameter (inches)
Nominal conduit
diameter (mm)
Internal diameter
(mm)
1
1
2
25
32
50
25.40
34.04
51.31
- 28 -
Maximum initial
number of CAT6
cables
5
10
22
www.du.ae
- 29 -
www.du.ae
APPENDIX 7 cabling infrastructure standards and regulations
APPENDIX 8 Entry boxes layouts
All category 6 (CAT6) and Category 3 (CAT3) infrastructure must comply with Telecommunications
Industry Association TIA-568-B
All fibre optic must be single mode and comply with International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector ITU-T G.652
All cables and components must be tested to confirm compliance with the above specification. For
copper this should be through the use of power meter trace testing and for fibre optic cables through
the use of Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) testing.
Other recommended standards and useful sources of information for designing cabling system are
listed below:
Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standards ANSI/TIA 568-B.1, General

requirements, May 2001
Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standards ANSI/TIA 568-B.2, Balanced
Twisted Pair Cabling Components, May 2001
Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standards ANSI/TIA 568-B.3, Optical
Fibre Cabling Components standards, April 2000
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair
Components - Addendum 1 - Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm
Category 6 Cabling (ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1-2002)
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements
- Addendum 4 - Recognition of Category 6 and 850 nm Laser-Optimized 50/125 m
Multimode Optical Fibre Cabling (ANSI/TIA-568-B.1-4-2003)
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: General Requirements
- Addendum 6 Category 6 related component test procedures (ANSI/TIA-568-B.2-6-2003)
EIA/TIA-569-B - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces, October 2004
International Standards Organization/International Electro technical Commission (ISO/IEC)
ISO/IEC 11801:2002
ANSI/TIA/EIA
606-A:
Administration
standard
for
Commercial
Buildings
Telecommunications Infrastructure
BICSI Telecommunication Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) 10th Edition: 2003
Telecommunications Industry Association Technical Information Notice 012 10.04.01
Cabling Installation Planning & Practices Inside Buildings Segregation of Power & Data
Circuits
Underwriters Laboratories (UL ) Cable Certification and Follow Up Program
CENELEC EN50173: 2002
CENELEC EN 50174 Part 1
CENELEC EN 50174 Part 2
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
Local Electrical Regulations
The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
JRC 12 details
JRC 14 details
- 30 -
www.du.ae
- 31 -
www.du.ae
COMMONLY USED ABBREVIATIONS

AWG
CAT3
CAT6
EIA
EITC
EMI
FTTH
HDG
IEEE
ISO
ITU
JRC
NOC
PDU
RFI
TIA
UTP
American Wire Gauge

Category 3
Category 6
Electronic Industries Association
Emirates Integrated Telecommunications Company PJSC
Electro-magnetic Interference
Fibre to the Home
Hot -Dip Galvanized
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
International Standard Organisation
International Telecommunication Union
Joint-box Reinforced Carriageway (type of manhole)
No Objection Certificate
Power Distribution Unit
Radio Frequency Interference
Telecommunications Industry Association
Unshielded Twisted Pair
- 32 -
www.du.ae

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16124.

SECTION 16124 - 2
TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV SYSTEMS
The Contractor shall supply and install a Telephone and Cable TV system as described below
and in compliance with the requirements detailed in the drawings. All works shall be carried
out in strict compliance with the current rules, regulations and recommendations of the local
DU office.
1. GENERAL
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
The works shall comprise supply and installation of DU cables Entry box,
Entry pipes, cable pull boxes and Main and Sub-main distribution frames
respectively for the Telephone and Cable TV systems.
Prior to commencing any installation works, the Contractor shall coordinate
with the local DU office for approval of internal distribution of telephone
cables.
All materials and equipment used in the installation shall be approved by the
local DU office.
The Contractor shall submit, for Engineers study and approval, equipment
schedule and comprehensive wiring and riser diagram of the system prior to
commencing any installation works.
Earth resistance at Entry box and in Telephone rooms shall not exceed 5
ohms.
2. MAIN AND SUB-MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAMES

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
All distribution frames shall be corrosion resistant, fully enclosed, dust and
vermin proof and complete with hinged doors, lock and key. These shall be
constructed from high-quality sheet steel or fibre glass and shall be approved
by the local office of DU.
Adequate and safe working space shall be provided around each distribution frame
which shall not be installed near any electrical distribution boards.
Dimensions of distribution boards, equipped with hinged aluminium doors and
installed on wall with bottom 1 m AFFL, shall be as follows :
(a) 115 mm x 165 mm x 65 mm (depth) for 10/20 pairs of cables.
(b) 160 mm x 210 mm x 90 mm (depth) for 50 pairs of cables.
(c) 210 mm x 320 mm x 120 mm (depth) for 100 pairs of cables.
(d) 600 mm 600 mm x 150 mm (depth) for over 100 pairs of cables.
3. CONDUITS AND TRUNKING

3.1.
Following conduits shall be supplied and installed in compliance with the

recommendations of DU :
Telephone and Cable TV Systems
Page 1 of 2

SPECIFICATIONS
3.2.
4.
TELEPHONE ROOMS
4.1
4.2.
4.3.
5.
ELEC/SPEC.16124.
4 No. 100 mm diameter uPVC Entry pipes from in-take position on the
premises to the Main Distribution Frame in the ground floor Telephone
room. The conduits shall be complete with 6 mm diameter nylon ropes or 2.5
mm diameter copper draw wires. The Entry pipes shall be laid at a depth of
60 cms from the finished ground level and shall be protected by concrete
under all permanent paved surfaces.
Prior to installation the Contractor shall determine from DU the precise
diameter and sizes of conduits and trays recommended by them for the
project.
The Contractor shall ensure that the earthing in the Telephone Rooms rooms
do not exceed 5 ohms.
The Telephone rooms shall be clean, dust-free, well-lit and air-conditioned.
No other services lines, conduits etc. shall pass under the telephone floor.
MANHOLES
Telephone manholes shall be 600 mm x 600 mm x 850 mm and shall be complete
with heavy duty mild steel covers engraved with markings TELEPHONE CABLES
/ CABLE TV CABLES
Telephone and Cable TV Systems
Page 2 of 2

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16141.

SECTION -16141
WIRING ACCESSORIES.
The Contractor shall supply, install, test and connect complete small power installations
inclusive of lighting switches, contactor switches, flush socket outlets, industrial type socket
outlets and other wiring accessories etc., all in strict compliance with these Specifications,
drawings and Schedules for Wiring Accessories.
1.
GENERAL.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
1.7.
1.8.
1.9.
All wiring shall be carried out in strict compliance with cable sizes and circuit
details given in respective load schedules and drawings.
All wiring of multi-point sub-circuits shall be carried out as a loop-in
system. No joints in any point in the wiring run shall be permitted.
Wiring for small power circuits shall be run in separate dedicated
conduits/trunking back to their respective final MCB distribution boards.
Circuits supplied from different phases shall not be housed in the same
conduit. Care shall be exercised to ensure both the live and the neutral
conductors of a circuit shall in all cases be contained in the same conduit.
Every single pole switch and MCB in a two-wire circuit shall be connected to
the phase conductor. Every single phase circuit shall have its own neutral and
earth connections taken from its respective final distribution board.
Wiring for each circuit run in trunking shall be taped and bound at intervals
throughout the entire length and shall be labelled at each junction and terminal
point for easy identification of circuits.
Prior to drawing wiring in conduits/trunking, the entire system inclusive of
outlet boxes, isolators, MCB distribution boards etc. shall be completed and
inspected. Any conduits/trunking not accepted by the Engineer shall be
replaced without additional charges.
The Contractor shall pay special attention to the segregation of L.V. wiring
and respective E.L.V. wiring for Fire Detection and Voice Alarm System,
CCTV and Card Access System, Telephone and Cable TV system, SMATV
System and other E.L.V systems, to ensure no adverse interaction shall occur
between the various systems. All installation works shall strictly comply with
the requirements of BS7671:2001 (I.E.E.Wiring Regulations).
Colour code and identification of cable/wiring cores shall be in compliance
with the Dubai Electricity and Water Authoritys Regulations.
All wiring accessories shall be as described and specified in the respective
schedules of equipment. Samples of each type of wiring accessory and other
related equipment shall be submitted for Engineers final approval prior to
placing orders for the same.
Wiring Accessories
Page 1 of 4

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16141.
2. WIRING ACCESSORIES.
2.1.
SWITCHES.
2.1.1. All lighting control switches complying with the requirements of BS
3676-1:2000, BS EN 60669-1:2000 shall be of quick-make slow-break
type suitable for operating AC inductive loads. These shall be of 5A,
6A, 10A, 15A or 16A ratings and shall include single-pole, doublepole, 1-way, 2-way and intermediate switches. These shall generally be
flush-mounted at a height of 1.2 m above FFL and shall be complete
with galvanized steel boxes of same manufacture. Earth terminals shall
be provided on each switch box.
2.1.2. All 20A DP switches for controlling water heaters, hand dryers and
like equipment shall conform to the requirements of BS 3676-1:2000,
BS EN 60669-1:2000.
2.1.3 All electronic variable dimmer control switches for tungsten filament
and low-voltage lamps shall conform to the requirements of BS
5518:1977.
2.1.4. All grid modular switching system complying with the requirements of
BS 5733:1995 shall be complete with 10A/20A SP/DP, 1-way/2-way
etc. switch modules, indicator units, dimmer switches, accessory
modules, front plates, mounting frames and other accessories in
compliance with details in drawings.
3.
PLUGS, SOCKET OUTLETS, CONNECTION UNITS, ADAPTORS, AND

FLEX OUTLET PLATES
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
All rewirable and non-rewirable 13A fused plugs shall comply with the
All general purpose 13A switched and unswitched socket outlets shall be of 3pin shuttered type, with or without neon indicators as called for and described
in Wiring Accessories Schedule, all complying with the requirements of BS
1363-2:1995.
These shall generally be connected either in radial or in ring circuits as
indicated in the drawings and load schedules for final respective MCB
distribution boards. Connection to the phase and neutral conductors shall be
carefully made in compliance with the manufacturers markings and the earth
pin shall be effectively earthed.
These shall generally be mounted 0.45 m above FFL in general areas, and 0.3
m above tables in working areas such as kitchens, pantry, computer rooms etc.
Domestic flush type and industrial metal clad surface type shall be specified
for different areas as shown in the drawings and as indicated in the schedule of
Wiring Accessories and materials.
All adaptors shall comply with the requirements of BS 1363-3:1995.
Wiring Accessories
Page 2 of 4

SPECIFICATIONS
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
4.
ELEC/SPEC.16141.
All 13A switched and unswitched fused connection units shall comply with
the requirements of BS 1363-4:1995.
All industrial socket-outlets, plugs and connectors shall comply with the
requirements of BS 4343:1992, BS EN 60309-2:1992.
All flex outlet plates shall be equipped with three pairs of terminals and a cord
grip and shall comply with the requirements of BS 5733:1995.
20A/32A GENERAL PURPOSE CONTROL UNITS

20A and 32A control units with or without neon indicators complying with the
requirements of BS 3676-1:2000, BS EN 60669-1:2000 shall be used to
control hand dryers, window type A/C units etc.
6.
DP FUSED CONNECTION UNITS.

All DP switched and unswitched connection units indicated in the drawings
shall comply with the requirements of BS 3676-1:2000, BS EN 60669-1:2000.
These shall generally be of flush type complete with 20A DP switches (where
applicable), 13 A fuse-links to BS 1362:1973, flex outlets to BS 5733:1995,
neon indicators and mounting boxes.
7.
CEILING ROSES
All ceiling roses shall comply with the requirements of BS 67:1987.
8.
JUNCTION BOXES.
All junction boxes shall comply with the requirements of BS 6220:1983.
These shall have either 4 or 3 terminal blocks, 10A/30A rating, accepting 4/6
6.0 sq. mm single core cables.
9.
TV/FM CO-OXIAL SOCKET OUTLETS.

Direct connection and isolated TV/FM co-axial socket-outlets shall comply
with the requirements of BS 5733:1995, BS 3041, IEC 60169.
These shall generally be suitable for use in multi-outlet aerial system,
providing necessary safety isolation rated 2000 V AC to BS EN 60065:1998.
These outlets shall be designed for UHF/VHF and VHF/FM radio signals
reception.
10.
LINE JACK TELEPHONE OUTLETS.

These shall be of the type approved by the local ETISALAT Office.
11.
TELEPHONE AND DATA SOCKET-OUTLETS
Wiring Accessories
Page 3 of 4

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16141.
These shall be of modular system design with a wide range of socket modules
for telephone and data use and shall be equipped with matching front plates
designed to accept combinations of interchangeable modules.
Telephone sockets shall comply with the requirements of BS 6312-2.1:1994,
BS EN 6312-2.2:1997 and Data socket modules shall comply with the
requirements of BS 5733:1995, or other relevant applicable Standards.
12.
PLATE FINISHES OF ACCESSORIES

In general, plate finishes of wiring accessories in various locations shall be as follows:
i) In Majlis/Reception Area
Bronze
ii) General Offices, Stores, corridors,
Regular white PVC.
Service rooms.
iii) Underfloor trunking in Main Library, Childrens Matching Accessories
Multimedia, Main Library Multimedia, Caf etc.
iv) Plant Room and other similar areas
To IP 65
13.
MOUNTING HEIGHT OF ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT

Unless instructed otherwise by Architect and Engineer, the mounting height of the
various wiring accessories and electrical equipment shall be as follows :
iii)
Lighting and other control switches

Socket outlets, telephone line jacks,
TV socket outlets etc.
Socket outlets, isolators for FCUs
iv)
Connection units, flexible outlets etc.
v)
vi)
Fire Alarm breakglass

Fire Alarm Control Panel,
MCB distribution boards
i)
ii)
1250 mm AFFL
450 mm AFFL
Adjacent to respective
unit.
Adjacent to units
being served
1250 mm AFFL
1800 mm AFFL
Wiring Accessories
Page 4 of 4

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16170.

SECTION - 16170
EARTHING SYSTEM
The Contractor shall supply, install, test and connect a complete earthing system comprising
necessary earthing electrodes, earth bars, earth electrode cables, earth electrode inspection
housing, protective conductors, connections and any other components and accessories
deemed necessary for a highly reliable, safe and satisfactory earthing system to the approval
of the Dubai Electricity and Water Authority, DEWA.
1.
GENERAL.
1.1.
1.2.
2.
The installation of the earthing system shall comply with the requirements of
BS 7671:2001 (IEE Wiring regulations) and BS 7430:1998 entitled Code of
Practice for Earthing. Should the regulations and recommendations detailed
in the aforementioned standards differ in any way with those of DEWA, the
requirements and recommendations of the latter shall be adhered to.
The main L.V earthing system shall comprise earth electrodes installed at
suitable locations near the sub-station / Main Electrical room. Appropriate sized
copper earthing conductor shall connect the earthing electrodes to main copper
earth bars, which shall be installed in the sub-station/main electrical rooms.
Frames of all items of L.V. switchgear, all earthing conductors etc. shall in turn
be connected to the main earth bar.
EARTHING ELECTRODES.
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
Tests for soil resistivity shall be carried out in areas where earth electrodes
are to be installed.
In areas of high soil resistivity it may be necessary to install more than one
earth electrode. In such cases the electrodes shall be at least 6 m apart with
the necessary couplers connecting them.
The number of earth electrodes and their types, diameter, length, setting
depth and the method of installation shall be in complete conformity with the
aforementioned standards and with the requirements of the Dubai Electricity
and Water Authority. The earth electrode/s resistance shall not exceed 1.0
ohm or the value recommended by DEWA.
In general, the earth electrodes shall be driven to a minimum depth of 3 m or
0.3 m below permanent water level. The earth electrodes shall comprise
minimum 16 mm diameter hard drawn copper rods complete with hardened
steel tip, driving cap and phosphor bronze coupling suitable for the required
size of copper earth conductor.
The copper earth conductor shall connect the earth electrodes to the main earth
bar via a test clamp to be located 0.6 m above F.F.L.
Earthing System
Page 1 of 3

SPECIFICATIONS
3.
ELEC/SPEC.16170.
MAIN EARTH BAR.

In general the main earth bar shall comprise a 65 x 10 mm high-conductivity copper
bars. 25 x 4.75 mm copper strips shall connect all items of L.V. equipment in the
sub-station/ Main Electrical room to the main earth bar.
4.
EARTH ELECTRODE CABLES

The earth electrode cable shall be PVC sheathed standard copper conductor of
appropriate cross-sectional area. The cable shall connect the earth electrode/s to the
main earth bar. One end of the cable shall be sweated into a lug and connected to the
main earth bar with 16 mm (minimum) diameter brass bolts with 3 brass washers and
two brass lock nuts. The other end shall be connected to the earthing electrode/s in
compliance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of earth electrodes.
5.
EARTH ELECTRODES INSPECTION HOUSING.

A concrete inspection housing with a heavy duty hinged cast iron cover and frame
made in a pit 300 x 300 x 300 mm shall be provided for each earth electrode
connection. A permanent label marked with the words SAFETY ELECTRICAL
EARTH - DO NOT REMOVE shall be provided at each connection.
6.
ITEMS TO BE EARTHED.
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
7.
All metal parts of every electrical equipment shall be connected to the

earthing system. Metal parts of items of electrical equipment to be earthed
shall include, but shall not be limited to, switchgear, metal armour of cables,
metal conduits, trunking, trays, accessories, outlet boxes, motor and pump
casings, metal sinks, pipework, plant accessories, lighting fixtures, switch
plates, socket outlets etc. which are wholly or partly encased in metal.
As described above, all items in the system shall be effectively earthed so that
these are continuously electrically conductive. The electrical resistance at any
point in the system to earth shall not exceed 1 ohm, or the value stipulated by
DEWA.
The neutral conductor shall not be earthed any where within the complex.
The earthing of water mains and other service lines shall be carried out in
strict compliance with the recommendations of BS 7671:2001.
PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS.
Cross-sectional areas of protective conductors in relation to the cross-sectional area
of associated phase conductors shall be in compliance with Table 54G of
BS7671:2001.
8.
CONNECTIONS.
8.1.
All joints in copper shall be carried out using a system of compression

jointing.
Earthing System
Page 2 of 3

SPECIFICATIONS
8.2.
ELEC/SPEC.16170.
Bolted connections shall be of the multiple bolt type. Bolts, washers and stop
nuts shall be of copper alloy, everdur, durium, duronze, or silicon bronze.
Ferrous hardware shall not be used. Where bare copper is jointed by bolting,
contact surfaces shall be silver plated.
Earthing System
Page 3 of 3

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16411.

SECTION - 16411
LOW VOLTAGE AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR
CORRECTION PANEL
The Contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission, in the main L.V.
Electrical room, an Automatic Power Factor Correction Panel, designated PFCP, of kVAr
rating as called for and as indicated in the single line power distribution schematic drawing
and in the load schedules for respective Main Distribution Board, MDB.
Unless stated otherwise, the PFCP shall not form an integral part of the Main
Distribution Board.
The PFCP shall comprise a robust enclosure equipped with and complete with main
incoming isolating switch, an electronic power factor regulator/controller, power factor
improvement capacitors, contactors, fuses and any other components and accessories
deemed necessary for a high quality, high-performance, reliable and safe power factor
correction equipment.
The components of PFCP shall be selected and designed to ensure that the power factor
of the system is maintained at a minimum value of 0.9 lag, or a value stipulated by
DEWA, for all loads up to full load of the system. In addition, each PFCP shall be
equipped with harmonic suppression reactors.
1.
GENERAL
In general the PFCP shall conform to the following specifications and requirements:
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
The PFCP shall be factory built and shall be of modular cubicle pattern, floor
mounted, free standing, air-insulated, totally enclosed type, and shall, in
addition, be corrosion, dust and damp proof to comply with the requirements
of BS 60439 - 1:1999. Minimum degree of protection shall be IP 54.
The PFCP shall be constructed of highest-quality corrosion-resistant sheet
steel of adequate thickness, coated with an approved compound to provide
excellent resistance against scratches and corrosion.
The PFCP shall be designed for total front access, and provision shall be made
for bottom/top entry for the main incoming cable and shall be complete with
cable box, cable gland, lug, clamps etc. The PFCP shall be of suitable design
to facilitate ease of cabling, maintenance, inspection and testing, and shall
ensure maximum safety to operators, and to maintenance and testing
personnel.
ON/OFF/AUTO switches shall be provided mounted flush on the panel.
Low Voltage Automatic Power Factor Correction Panel
Page 1 of 3

SPECIFICATIONS
2.
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS.

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
2.8.
2.9.
3.
ELEC/SPEC.16411.
Highly reliable low-loss (0.5 watts per kVAr) capacitors with self-healing
properties shall be used in the system.
The capacitors shall be environmentally acceptable using non-toxic
impregnants.
Each step shall be designed for 25/50 kVAr rating or as specified in the
distribution schematic drawing and load schedule/s for main distribution
board/s.
All capacitors shall be derated to give design capacitance at 50 deg. C.
Each capacitor unit shall comprise requisite number of individual capacitor
elements. These elements shall be manufactured from impregnated metallized
polypropylene or metallized paper and plastic film and have self-healing
property. Each unit shall be fitted with a thermal protection device.
The safety protection system shall incorporate a fail-safe device for each
capacitor element.
Suitable discharge resistors shall be provided to ensure capacitor terminal
voltage shall be reduced to 50 volts in one minute after switching off.
All capacitors used in the system shall be of 600/1000 V insulation grade and
shall comply with the requirements, including latest amendments, of BS
1650:1971, IEC 831.
All capacitors shall be designed to withstand the following overloads:
Overload tolerance
: 6-7 % permanently.
: 15 % 8 hours per day.
POWER FACTOR REGULATOR/CONTROL GEAR.

3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
The function of the Regulator/Control gear shall be to monitor the network

reactive power and to achieve the required power factor by switching ON and
OFF capacitor steps.
The Regulator/Control gear shall be microprocessor controlled, of compact
design and insensitive to harmonics.
The equipment shall incorporate a special fast acting soft switching contactor
arrangement to minimize the adverse affects of high inrush currents and
system disturbances caused by capacitor switching. Each kVAr step shall be
controlled by two contactors switching in cascade. These contactors shall
incorporate a pre-connection resistor system which reduces to a minimum the
effect of current inrush. 100 A circuit fuses shall be installed to protect each
50 kVAr capacitor step and its associated control gear.
The Regulator/Control gear shall be designed and equipped with components
to provide the following features and facilities :
-Adjustment of power factor setting from 0.7 lag to 0.9 lead.
-Switching time between steps from 1 to 100 seconds.
--
No-volt release which instantly disconnects the automatic capacitor banks in the event
of mains supply failure. With the return of mains voltage the capacitor banks shall be
switched ON after 90 seconds. This feature shall be available for both AUTO and
MANUAL operations.
---
Facility for Automatic and Manual operation.

Programming of different switching sequences.
Page 2 of 3

SPECIFICATIONS
-----
4.
MAIN INCOMING ISOLATOR/LOAD BREAK-SWITCH.

4.1.
4.2.
5.
ELEC/SPEC.16411.
LED indication of capacitive and inductive load and the number of

steps energized.
Automatic adjustment to changes in network frequency.
ON/OFF/AUTO switches with multistage switching facility
The Regulator/ Control gear shall be equipped with the following:
(i)
1 No. digital power factor meter covering a scale 0.7 lead-1-0.7
lagging.
(ii) Fault indicator to give alarm when the selected power factor
value is not reached within a period of 5 minutes, and in the
event of mains supply failure.
These shall be complete with effective arc splitting plates and self-cleaning
contacts and shall be designed for positive opening and manual operation, all
in compliance with the requirements of BS EN 60947 - 3 : 1999.
The main incoming isolator/load break switch shall be of 600/1000 V
insulation grade designed and rated for the required capacitive switching duty
and rated impulse withstand voltage of 12 kV.
CONTACTORS.
5.1. The Contactors shall be designed to withstand large transient current peaks at
high frequency of several kHz, which could occur during switching of capacitor
banks. The manufacturer shall submit calculations for the largest peak current the
proposed contactor will be able to make.
5.2. The Contactors shall have an electrical life time of 100,000 operations, and shall
be rated at 1.5 times normal rated current of capacitor banks.
5.3. The Contactors shall be designed and constructed to comply with the
requirements, including latest amendments, of BS EN 60947 - 4 - 1:2001.
6.
HBC FUSES.
All low voltage fuses shall be current-limiting types of modern industrial design having
high breaking capacity to comply with the requirements of BS 88, BS EN 60269.
Page 3 of 3

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16426.

SECTION - 16426
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR. MAIN,
SUB-MAIN AND FINAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS.
ISOLATORS AND LOAD-BREAK SWITCHES
The Contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission all items of electrical
switchgear in approximate locations indicated in the drawings, all in compliance with these
Specifications and details in single line power distribution schematic drawing and in load
schedule for respective distribution boards. All busbars, active components and accessories
shall be designed for satisfactory operation in ambient temperature of 50 degrees C.
1.
MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD ( MDB )

1.1.
GENERAL
1.1.1. The main L.V. Distribution Board, designated MDB, shall be of
600/1000V insulation grade and shall be designed and constructed to
comply with the requirements of BS EN 60439- 1:1999. The board
shall be factory built and all busbar sections shall be designed and
certified to withstand short-circuit of 50 kA for 1 second.
1.1.2. The board shall be of modular cubicle pattern, floor mounted, air
insulated, totally enclosed, fully interlocked, and, unless specified
otherwise, shall be segregated to comply with the requirements of
Form 4, Type 6 as specified in the aforementioned Standards. The
board/s shall be vermin, corrosion, dust and damp proof to comply
with the degree of protection IP 43 as defined in BS EN 60439-2 2000.
1.1.3. The board shall be constructed of minimum 2 mm thick highest quality
corrosion resistant hot dipped electro-galvanized steel sheets,
pretreated and coated with an approved compound of minimum
thickness 90 microns to provide excellent resistance against corrosion
and scratches. The board/s shall be designed to facilitate extension at
either end, and shall allow for interchangeability of switchgear.
Provision shall be made for top or bottom entries for cables as
appropriate. All necessary cable boxes, lugs, glands, clamps etc.
appropriate to cable sizes shall be provided. The board/s shall be of
suitable design to facilitate ease of cabling, maintenance, inspection
and testing, and shall ensure maximum safety to operators, and to
maintenance and testing personnel. All panel doors shall be
mechanically interlocked to prevent opening before the gear is
isolated.
1.1.4. The general arrangement of the board shall be indicated in the
appropriate drawing. However, it shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to submit with his working drawings, for the Engineers
Low Voltage Electrical Swichgear Main, Sub-Main and Final

Distribution Board, Isolators and Load Break Switches
Page 1 of 9

SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.5.
1.1.6.
1.1.7.
1.1.8.
1.2.
ELEC/SPEC.16426.
study and approval, the arrangement and physical layout of the board/s
together with the manufacturers Specifications and full technical
details of the switchgear and all ancillary equipment he proposes to
use. The Contractor shall ensure that his offer shall include all items,
whether or not explicitly specified, but which are deemed necessary for
a complete, safe and satisfactory switchgear installation. The
Contractor shall also ensure that the board offered shall be of suitable
dimensions for the location specified. A complete set of plans
indicating details and fixing dimensions together with necessary
number of foundation bolts for the board shall be submitted.
If necessary, the board shall be arranged for delivery to site in sections
which can be easily placed into positions and then bolted together.
Lifting lugs shall be provided for each section. The board/s shall be
installed complete in all respects and shall be tested and commissioned
to the satisfaction and approval of the Engineer.
The manufacturer of the proposed board shall submit, through the
Contractor, copies of Type Test Report from an independent, reputable
and recognized testing authority like ASTA, KEMA or other members
of LOVAG confirming that the short-circuit and temperature-rise tests
on the boards shall be satisfactory and
in compliance with the
requirements of BS EN 60439.
Test Reports shall also be submitted to confirm that the dielectric
properties, effectiveness and short-circuit strength of protective
circuits, clearances and creepage distances and degree of protection of
the board are satisfactory.
The manufacturer shall provide a mimic single line distribution
schematic of the distribution system applicable to the MDB, to the
approval of the Engineer.
Each board shall be equipped with anti-condensation heater allowing
relative humidity settings between 50% to 100%.
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS (A.C.B)

1.2.1. All A.C.B.s shall be designed to have a rated service short-circuit
breaking capacity of not less than 50 kA rms and shall conform to the
requirements, including latest amendments, of BS EN 60947-1:2004
and BS EN 60947-2:2003. Fault tests shall be carried out on all the
breakers appropriate to service rating of utilization category of the
aforementioned Standard. The thermal and short-circuit ratings of the
circuit-breakers shall be the enclosed ratings relating to the ambient
temperature of 50 degrees C and environment in which the circuitbreaker shall operate in service, and not the rating in free air.
Performance tests and certificates together with applicable de-rating
curves of the breakers shall be submitted.
1.2.2. All A.C.B.s shall be of the withdrawable type, and the operating
mechanism shall be hand operated spring assisted type to enable the
closing speed to be independent of the operator.
1.2.3. All A.C.B.s shall have main contacts of the multifinger type with
individual self-aligning springs for high contact pressure. Isolating

Page 2 of 9

SPECIFICATIONS
1.2.4.
1.2.5.
1.2.6.
1.2.7.
1.2.8.
ELEC/SPEC.16426.
contacts shall be of the removable, silver-plated, multifinger, springloaded cluster type to ensure perfect alignments at all times.
All A.C.B.s shall be equipped with effective and adequately designed
arc chutes and arc shields which shall enclose all current breaking
contacts and shall be designed for effective and fast arc chopping. The
complete chute assembly shall be capable of being easily removed for
routine inspection of the chutes and contacts. The moving portion of
each circuit-breaker shall comprise a three-pole circuit-breaker with
operating mechanism, primary and secondary disconnection devices,
auxiliary switches, position indicators and necessary control wiring,
all mounted on a robust steel framework. This framework and all
metal parts of the moving portion, apart from current carrying parts,
shall, when inserting the circuit-breaker into the cubicle, be solidly
earthed before the circuit-breaker reaches test position. The circuitbreaker shall then be effectively earthed when it is in the cubicle.
All A.C.B.s shall have provision for earthing the outgoing terminals
after withdrawals. A complete set of earthing units for earthing
purposes shall be provided. Provision shall be made for padlocking the
breakers in OFF and EARTH positions. To prevent access to live
connections, all orifices shall be covered by lockable type safety
shutters of insulated material when the breaker is completely
withdrawn or when it is in the inspection position. Shutters shall be
operated mechanically in the closed and open positions when the
breaker is racked in and out.
All A.C.B.s shall have three distinct positions as follows :
i) Fully inserted position.
ii) Test position.
iii) Isolated position.
All A.C.B.s shall be equipped with high accuracy solid state
microprocessor based protection devices to provide the following
protection functions :
i) Protection against overload.
ii) Selective protection against short-circuit.
iii) Instantaneous protection against short-circuit.
iv) Protection against earth fault.
All A.C.B.s shall be equipped with highly reliable mechanical and
electrical interlocking devices to prevent any maloperation.
All A.C.B.s shall be equipped with the following devices and
indicators :
i) Charging lever for the closing spring.
ii) Spring charged/ spring released indicators.
iii) A.C.B. ON/OFF indicators.
iv) Padlocks for A.C.B. in the CONNECTED, TEST or
ISOLATED positions.
v) Push button for releasing the moving part of drawout circuit
breaker.

Page 3 of 9

SPECIFICATIONS
1.3.
ELEC/SPEC.16426.
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (M.C.C.B.)

1.3.1. All M.C.C.B.s protecting outgoing feeder circuits shall be of the
instantaneous type and shall be designed and constructed to have shortcircuit breaking capacity of not less than 30 kA for MDB fed from a
1000 kVA transformer, and not less than 35 kA for MDB fed from a
1500 transformer. All M.C.C.B.s shall be fixed type and shall conform
to the requirements, including latest amendments, of BS EN 609472:2003.
1.3.2. All M.C.C.B.s shall be of thermal-magnetic, manually and
automatically operated type, and shall be designed to provide positive
trip-free operation on abnormal overloads with quick-break contacts
for both manual and automatic operation. Adequate protection for the
stationary and movable contacts shall be provided with rapid and
effective arc interrupting devices. An inverse time-delay thermal
overcurrent trip element and a magnetic instantaneous overcurrent trip
element shall be provided on each pole of the breaker for common
tripping of all poles.
1.3.3. All MCCBs shall be designed for operating at ambient temperature of
50 degrees C.
1.4.
BUSBARS
1.4.1.
1.4.2.
1.4.3.
1.4.4.
1.4.5.
1.4.6.
1.4.7.
Busbars of adequate current-carrying capacity of highest conductivity

hard drawn electrolytic copper complying with the requirements of
BS EN 60439-1:1999 shall be rigidly fixed on insulating supports to
withstand short-circuit mechanical and thermal stresses. Reduced
section neutral busbars shall not be allowed. All busbars shall be
designed for operation in 50 deg. C.
The busbars shall be air-insulated, air-spaced, fully shielded with
barriers and seals between adjacent cubicle compartments. All joints
shall be carefully prepared, cleaned and treated to prevent
oxide
formation. In addition, all connections and joints shall be fully
shrouded and insulated.
The busbars system may comprise horizontal and vertical sections
together with the earth bar. Safe distances, based on air insulation,
shall be maintained between adjacent phase busbars.
The horizontal busbars shall be located in a separate screened
compartment at the top of the board to offer optimum ventilation
requirements. The
busbars shall be supported, connected and
protected to ensure they are able to withstand the severe dynamic
forces generated in the event of a short-circuit.
The vertical busbars shall be anchored to the horizontal busbars a
manner to allow them to expand and contract freely without
generating machanical stresses in the structure.
Cross-sectional area of the neutral bar shall be the same as that for the
phase busbars.
The earth bar shall be electrically and mechanically connected to the
frame by clamps.

Page 4 of 9

SPECIFICATIONS
1.5.
ELEC/SPEC.16426.
INSTRUMENTS AND METERS

1.5.1. Three numbers suitably scaled moving iron type ammeters conforming
to the requirements of BS 89-2:1990, BS EN 60051-2:1989 shall be
flush mounted on the panel. (Digital Type)
1.5.2. One number suitably scaled moving iron type voltmeter conforming to
the requirements of BS 89-2:1990, BS EN 60051-2:1989, together with
an integral phase shift switch, shall be mounted flush on the panel. The
voltmeter shall be fused protected. (Digital Type)
1.5.3. One number suitably scaled moving iron type power factor meter
conforming to the requirements of BS 89-5:1990, BS EN 60051-5:
1989 shall be flush mounted on the panel. (Digital Type)
1.5.4. One number kilo-watt-hour meter suitable for three phase integrated
unbalanced load, conforming to the requirements of BS 5685-1:1979,
BS EN 60687:1993 shall be flush mounted on the panel. (Digital
recommended)
1.5.5. The Contractor shall ascertain from DEWA whether additional
instruments, other than those described above, would be required. The
Contractor shall fulfil all their requirements and place orders
accordingly. (Digital Type)
1.6.
METERING AND PROTECTIVE TRANSFORMERS

1.6.1. All current transformers shall be insulated with the best available
materials and shall be capable of continuous and prolonged service
without deterioration. The windings shall be designed and constructed
to withstand the severe effects of thermal and mechanical stresses of
short-circuit currents.
1.6.2. Each C.T.s secondary wiring shall be earthed on one side through a
removable link. In the event C.T.s are connected in a star
configuration, the star [point shall be earthed via a removable link.
1.6.3. Each Current Transformer shall be equipped with a shorting link.
Shorting links shall be provided for each Current transformer.
1.6.4. Metering and protective current transformers shall conform to the
requirements of BS 7626:1993 and shall be adequately rated to meet
their respective burdens.
1.7.
INTERNAL AND AUXILIARY WIRING

Internal and auxiliary fire-proof pvc-insulated cables complying with the
requirements of BS 6231:1998 shall be used for all switchgear and controlgear
wiring. All wiring shall be protected against mechanical damage.
1.8.
TOOLS AND SAFETY ACCESSORIES

1.8.1.
To facilitate satisfactory and proper maintenance of board/s, the

Contractor shall supply a complete set of tools recommended by the
manufacturer.

Page 5 of 9

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16426.
1.8.2. For safety, the Contractor shall provide full length rubber mattress in
front of each board.
1.8.3. The Contractor shall provide Warning Signs on L.V room doors and
Access Panels.
1.9.
LABELLING.
The incoming and every outgoing feeder cubicle shall be labelled both in
Arabic and in English languages, by means of approved name plates, screw
fixed to the cubicle doors.
2. SUB-MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD/S (SMDBs)

2.1.
GENERAL.
2.1.1. The sub-main distribution boards, designated SMDB, shall be of
600/1000 V insulation grade and shall be designed and constructed to
comply with the requirements of BS EN 60439-1:1999 .The boards
shall be factory built and the required busbar short-circuit level for
each SMDB shall be indicated in the distribution schematic drawing.
2.1.2. SMDBs shall generally be of the wall-mounted, air-insulated, totally
enclosed and fully interlocked type with internal separation and
segregation to comply with the requirements of Form 2 as specified in
the aforementioned Standards. The boards shall be ASTA certified and
shall be vermin, corrosion, dust and damp proof to comply with the
degree of protection IP 43.
2.1.3. All SMDBs shall be constructed of highest quality corrosion-resistant
sheet steel of minimum thickness 1.5 mm, with constructional details
identical to those of MDB in item 1.1.3 above, and shall provide
excellent resistance against corrosion and scratches. All necessary
cable boxes, lugs, glands, clamps, etc. appropriate to the cable sizes
shall be provided. The panel doors shall be mechanically interlocked to
prevent opening before the gear is isolated.
2.1.4. All SMDBs shall be furnished with digital kwh meters for monitoring
purpose.
2.2.
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (M.C.C.B.)

2.2.1. All M.C.C.B.s protecting outgoing feeders on all SMDBs shall
generally be of fixed type and shall comply with the requirements with
respect to type, construction and operating characteristics detailed in
Item 1.3. above.
2.2.2. All M.C.C.B.s shall conform to the requirements, including latest
amendments, of BS EN 60947-2:2003
2.2.3. The short-circuit breaking capacity of each breaker shall be the busbar
short-circuit withstand level in kA for respective SMDBs as indicated
in the distribution schematic drawing.

Page 6 of 9

SPECIFICATIONS
2.3.
ELEC/SPEC.16426.
BUSBARS.
Requirements of busbars shall generally comply with the details described
under items 1.4.1, 1.4.2, 1.4.6 and 1.4.7.
3.
FINAL MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB) DISTRIBUTION

BOARDS
3.1.
GENERAL.
3.1.1. The design of final MCB distribution boards shall strictly conform to
the requirements of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority with respect
to busbar sectionalization, number and respective sensitivities of
RCCBs. Other details relating to MCB ratings, phase and CPC wiring
sizes, load phase distribution etc. for various circuits shall be indicated
in load schedules for respective distribution boards.
3.1.2. All boards shall be factory fabricated and shall be constructed of
corrosion-resistant sheet steel of minimum thickness 1.2 mm, coated
with an approved compound, to provide excellent resistance against
corrosion and scratches.
All boards shall comply with the
requirements of BS EN 60439-1:1999. All busbars shall be tinned
copper.
3.1.3. All boards shall be of totally enclosed, dust, damp and corrosion proof
type. These boards shall generally be flush mounted type
unless
otherwise indicated in the drawings or instructed by the Engineer. Each
board shall be equipped with a robust cover, lock and key. The boards
shall be labelled as previously described and a neatly typed schedule,
placed inside the board, shall indicate all the outgoing final subcircuits, their ratings and the areas and points served.
3.2.
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs)

3.2.1. All MCBs shall be of high performance, rapid interrupting, current
limiting type designed and type-tested to BS EN 60898:2001,
including latest amendments.
3.2.2. All MCBs shall be thermal-magnetic, manually and automatically
operated type to provide positive trip-free operation on abnormal
overloads with quick-break contacts, the thermal element providing
inverse time-delay tripping on abnormal overloads, and the magnetic
element providing instantaneous tripping on short-circuits.
3.2.3. All MCCBs shall be suitable for mounting on rails inside the
enclosure to facilitate removal of one without disturbing the others.
3.2.4. MCBs shall be of type 2 characteristics for general lighting and small
power circuits, and of type 3 characteristics for circuit supplying
pumps, AC units or other equipment using induction motors. Category
of duty shall be M6 or M9 depending on the fault level at the point of
installation.

Page 7 of 9

3.3.
3.3.2.
3.3.3.
3.3.4.
3.3.5.
3.3.6.
In addition to the overcurrent and short-circuit protection provided by

MCBs, protection against electric shocks and earth leakages shall be
provided by residual current operated circuit-breakers of appropriate
sensitivities as indicated in load schedules of respective distribution
boards.
Residual current circuit breakers for household and similar uses shall
be designed and constructed to comply with the requirements BS EN
61008-1:1995, BS EN 61008-2:1995, including latest amendment.
RCCBs with integral overcurrent (RCBOs) for household and similar
uses shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 61009-1:1995, BS
EN 61009-2:1995, including latest amendments.
Sections of the sectionalized busbars providing supply to general purpose
13A socket outlet circuits and water heater circuits shall be protected by
4-pole 30 mA sensitivity RCCBs.
Sectionalized busbars providing supply to washing machines, dish
washing machines, hand dryers and similar equipment circuits shall be
protected by 4-pole 30 mA or 100 mA sensitivity RCCBs as directed by
DEWA.
Appropriate sensitivity 2-pole/4-pole RCCBs shall be provided to protect
circuits supplying power to water pumps, fire fighting pumps, lift
machines and other similar motoring circuits all in compliance with the
current rules, regulations and requirements of DEWA.
ISOLATORS, SWITCHES, DISCONNECTORS, SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS

AND FUSE COMBINATION UNITS
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
5.
ELEC/SPEC.16426.
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS ( RCCBs)

3.3.1.
4.
SPECIFICATIONS
All isolators and similar units mentioned above shall be of totally enclosed
pattern, corrosion-proof, cast aluminium metal clad type, complete with
ON/OFF indicators, complying with the requirements of BS EN 60947-3:1999
and designed for AC 23 duty.
Unless otherwise indicated in drawings or load schedules, all isolators shall be
heavyduty type designed and constructed to provide minimum protection
grade IP 65 as defined in BS EN 604391:1999.
All isolators shall have interlocking features to prevent opening with the
supply in the ON position.
The current rating and the number of poles for each isolator shall be indicated
in the drawings and load schedules.
CONTACTORS
5.1.
All contactors shall be of 4-pole design for AC application and shall be type
tested for AC23 duty complying with the requirements of BS EN 609474:2001.
5.2.
The contacts shall be of double-break butt-type with with each moving contact
individually spring-loaded.

Page 8 of 9

SPECIFICATIONS
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
6.
ELEC/SPEC.16426.
All contactors shall be continuously rated and their coils shall be wound on
moulded formers.
All contactors shall be ambient temperature compensated, factory calibrated
and sealed.
Each contactor shall be provided with rerquired number of normally-open and
normally closed auxiliary switches.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES

6.1.
The Contractor shall submit characteristics of upstream and downstream
circuit breakers to establish satisfactory discrimination between them.
6.2.
Prior to despatching from the factory, all MDBs and SMDBs shall be
subjected to the following routine tests in the presence of the Engineer:
i) Primary injection test for all circuit breakers and meters.
ii) Secondary injection tests for all protective relays.
iii) Insulation tests.
iv) Functional tests.
All tests certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
7.
To avoid setting up of eddy currents all single core cables shall enter or leave
any item of metal clad switchgear through the same aperture in the enclosure.
Special termination arrangements shall be provided for cables whose crosssectional area exceeds the circuit breaker terminal size.
Each electrical room shall be provided with suitable size carbon-free
insulating rubber mat certified to withstand a voltage of 2 kV for one minute.
WARRANTIES
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a written guarantee covering the satisfactory
operation of the Low Voltage Electrical Switchgear, Main, Sub-main and Final Distribution
Boards, Isolators and load-break switches for a period of one (1) year after date of acceptance.
During this period, the Contractor shall repair or replace any defective work and pay for any
repair or replacement costs.

Page 9 of 9

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16510.

SECTION - 16510
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES
The Contractor shall supply, install, test and connect complete lighting installations, inclusive
of luminaries, conduits, trunking, sub-circuit wiring, installation accessories etc., all in strict
compliance with these Specifications, drawings, Load Schedules and Schedules for
Luminaires.
1.
GENERAL
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
1.7.
1.8.
2.
All wiring shall be carried out in strict compliance with cable sizes and circuit
details given in respective load schedules and drawings.
All wiring of multi-point sub-circuits shall be carried out as a loop-in
system. No joints in any point in the wiring run shall be permitted.
Circuits supplied from different phases shall not be housed in the same
conduit. Care shall be exercised to ensure both the live and the neutral
conductors of a circuit shall in all cases be contained in the same conduit.
Every single pole switch and MCB in a two-wire circuit shall be connected to
the phase conductor. Every single phase circuit shall have its own neutral and
earth connections taken from its respective final distribution board.
Wiring for each circuit run in trunking shall be taped and bound at intervals
throughout the entire length and shall be labelled at each junction and terminal
point for easy identification of circuits.
Prior to drawing wiring in conduits/trunking, the entire system inclusive of
outlet boxes, MCB distribution boards etc. shall be completed and inspected.
Any conduits/trunking not accepted by the Engineer shall be replaced without
additional charges.
Colour code and identification of cable/wiring cores shall be in compliance
with Federal Electricity and Water Authoritys Regulations.
Particulars of each luminaire, together with respective number, type and rating
of lamps, shall be as described and specified in Schedule of Luminaires.
Samples of each type of lighting fixture and other related equipment together
with photometric data for each luminaire shall be submitted for Engineers
final approval prior to placing orders for the same.
LIGHTING LUMINAIRES AND CONTROL ACCESSORIES.

All luminaires shall be designed, manufactured and tested to comply with the relevant
and respective requirements of BS EN 60598-1:1993.
All luminaires shall be of high quality as specified in the Schedules. The type, size,
number of lamps, IP rating etc. for each luminaire shall generally be specified in the
Schedule of Luminaires.
Lighting Fixtures and Accessories
Page 1 of 5

SPECIFICATIONS
2.1.
ELEC/SPEC.16510.
TUBULAR FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES.

2.1.1. Conventional tubular fluorescent luminaires complying with the
requirements of BS EN 60598 shall be equipped with spring-loaded bipin lamp holders and instant-start control-gear to give trouble free
operation at an ambient temperature of 45 deg.C. The control gear shall
be of polyester resin filled type, noiseless in operation and shall be
contained within the body of the luminaire. All internal wiring shall be
silicon rubber flexible type of adequate cross-sectional area neatly
clipped in position.
2.1.2 The body of the luminaires shall be constructed of high quality
corrosion-resistant sheet steel treated with a zinc based primer and then
stove-enamelled.
2.1.3. All tubular fluorescent lamps shall conform to the requirements of BS
EN 60081:1998, BS 1853: PART 1:1990, IEC81:1984. Unless specified
otherwise, all lamps shall have daylight colour appearance and
minimum color rendering index of 65.
2.1.4. Wherever specified, triphosphorus lamps shall be used to achieve high
colouring rendering index of minimum 80.
2.1.5. All conventional ballasts shall conform to the requirements of BS EN
60920 :1991 and BS EN 60921:1991, and all electronic ballasts shall
conform to the requirements of BS EN 60928:1995, BS EN
60929:2004. All ballasts shall be suitable for instant start operation.
2.1.6. All starters for fluorescent lamps shall conform to the requirements of
BS EN 60155:1995, BS 3772:1990, IEC 155, 155a.
2.1.7. All lamp-holders shall comply with the requirements of BS 60400:
2000.
2.1.7. All luminaires shall be equipped with capacitors complying with the
requirements of BS EN 61048:1993, BS EN 61049:1993BS
4017:1979, IEC 566:1972, to give a power factor in access of 0.9
lagging.
2.1.8 Radio interference suppression capacitors shall be provided in each
luminaire.
2.2.
ENERGY SAVING COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES

2.2.1. Compact fluorescent lamp fixtures shall comply with the requirements
of BS EN 60598 shall be used wherever specified in compliance with
descriptions detailed in Schedule of Luminaires.
2.2.2. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be complete with integral control gear
and other components deemed essential for a high quality lamp.
2.2.3. Wherever specified, triphosphorus lamps shall be used to achieve high
colouring rendering index.
2.3.
LOW VOLTAGE HALOGEN LAMP LUMINAIRES.

2.3.1. All low voltage halogen lamp luminaires shall comply with the
requirements of BS 4533: PART 102: section 102.6:1990, BS EN 605982 23: 1997.
Page 2 of 5

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16510.
These shall generally be used as recessed downlighters and shall be

complete with separate or integral transformers and 50 W halogen
lamps.
2.3.2. The body of the fixture shall be made of high quality diecast aluminium
with steel hook springs and shall be complete with a 50 mm diameter
dichroic reflector. A terminal block mounting rod and the lamps steel
hook fixing system shall facilitate easy installation.
2.3.3. Tungsten halogen lamps shall generally comply with the requirements of
BS 1075 : 1989, IEC 357 : 1977.
2.4.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES.

2.4.1.
Emergency lighting fixtures shall be installed in approximate locations

indicated in the drawings. These shall be of the self-contained nonmaintained type complete with integral rechargeable battery, batterycharger, automatic mains failure change-over switch etc., rated for three
hours operating period.
2.4.2. Emergency lighting fixtures shall comply with the requirements of BS EN
60598-2-22:1999, BS 5266, BS 4533: PART 102: SECTION 102.22 :
1990.
2.4.3. Automatic change-cover switches/contactors shall comply with the
2.5.
FLOOD LIGHT FIXTURES

2.5.1
Floodlight fixtures shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 605982-5:1998 and shall be designed for narrow beam or wide beam application
suitable for metal halide, high pressure sodium vapour or high pressure
mercury vapour lamps, as specified in the Schedule of Luminaires.
2.5.2 The main frame and casing of the fixtures shall be constructed of die-cast
aluminium.
2.5.3 Fixtures shall be complete with components and accessories deemed
essential for high quality high performance floodlight fixtures and shall be
inclusive of, but not limited to, mounting brackets, thermal fatigue
resistant safety glasses, high class mirror reflectors, integral ignitors,
control gear etc.
2.5.4. Unless stated otherwise in Schedule of Luminaires, all fixtures shall be
fitted with silicon gaskets to give minimum degree of protection IP65.
2.5.5. Mounting bracket shall be constructed of hot-dipped galvanized steel and
shall be equipped with tilt scale with a range of 150 degrees.
2.6.
POLE MOUNTED LIGHTING FIXTURES

The contractor will supply, install, and make the testing and commissioning of
solar energy pole lights 30 No. in all parking areas to be fully controlled by
solar energy, as per the following specifications:
2.6.1. Pole Light height 6m, Pole shape to be Conical, Step or Decorative type
as per DM Architect Approval.
2.6.2. Hot Dip Galvanized or Die-cast Aluminum poles with high corrosion
resistance and powder coating painting layer (Hot Dip Galvanized with
Page 3 of 5

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16510.
not less than 100 Micron and Powder Coating with not less than 80
Micron), RAL color as per DM Architect Approval.
2.6.3. Stainless Steel Allen Key Countersunk Socket Screws should be
provided.
2.6.4. Integral control gear and Durable silicon rubber gasket for batteries
housing IP-65.
2.6.5. Batteries should be installed according to the following methods:
Installation to be made within the pole construction, internal insulation
should be provided to batteries enclosure to reduce the effect of the
transferred heat on batteries.
2.6.6.
2.6.7.
2.6.8.
2.6.9.
2.6.10
2.6.11.
2.6.12
2.6.13.
2.6.14.
3.
Separate WI P PVC Enclosure and complete arrangement should be kept

inside a manhole adjacent to pole foundation. Provided manhole cover
should be marked with electrical.
It is recommended to provide batteries with minimum capacity of 150Ah.
Batteries calculations should be provided against system requirements
(Batteries calculation subject to Engineer Approval).
Provided batteries should be suitable for illumination period (8-10) hrs
from sunrise daily according to project requirements. It should have
backup capacity (Sun Autonomy) of two days.
8-Free of maintenance sealed batteries (Gel Type, AGM Type, Lead Acid
Type, Lithium ... , etc) with operating ambient temperature (OC -55C)
and subject to Engineer Approval. (Working Temperature -20C -70C)
Photovoltaic system consists of high efficiency potovaltaic cells
(Monocrystalline, Polycrystalline, etc) with 150W power or as per system
requirements.
Photovoltaic panels shall be capable of receiving indirect light (during
winter cloudy time) with recommended size (1500mm X 700mm). Solar
panel shall be covered with tempered glass for protection.
Solar charger controller with DC load 12V 10A and inverter 150W. The
controller shall be controlled through microprocessor control with high
efficiency. The controller shall be controlled through microprocessor
control with high efficiency. IP-65 W/P with overcharge and discharge
protection.
Photo sensor, timer, automatic on-off switch, consumption control,
automatic season adjustment, low battery level indicator and high battery
level indicator should be provided to assure accurate operational
conditions.
Proposed Solar lighting System should be designed properly (standalone
solar system) as per the application which should be suitable to work
through the conventional power in case of the failure of the solar power
(Automatic switch to be provided for changing the operation modes).
Light Fixture should be LED Technology, with 4500 Lumen (White Color
Temp. Output), IP-65, Diffuser UV Stabilized and the Reflector with Pure
Mirror Aluminum. Proposed fixtures subject to Engineer Approval.
ACCESSORIES FOR LUMINAIRES

3.1.
Lighting fixtures such as mirror light fixtures equipped with integral safety shaver
socket outlets shall incorporate safety isolating transformers used as integral parts
Page 4 of 5

SPECIFICATIONS
3.2.
3.3.
ELEC/SPEC.16510.
of lighting fixtures shall comply with the requirements of BS 3535: PART 1:

1990 and BS EN 60742: 1996.
Electrical track systems for luminaires shall comply with the requirements
of BS EN 60570: 1994.
All luminaire supporting couplers for domestic, light industrial and
commercial use shall comply with the requirements of BS 6972: 1988.
Page 5 of 5

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16511.

SECTION - 16511
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS
The Contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission fully programmable
microprocessor based architectural and intelligent Lighting Control System for control of
lighting circuits in the Main Entrance, Lobbies, Foyers, Periodicals, Hotel Reception
Multipurpose Hall and other public areas. The system shall be complete with, but not limited
to, all necessary Lighting Distribution Panel Boards, Modular Switching Assemblies,
Centralized Preset Lighting Controls, Software, PC, cabling, containment system etc. and
any other components and accessories deemed essential for high quality high performance
state-of-the art Lighting Control System, all in strict compliance with these Specifications
and relevant details in drawings. Some spaces, as shown in the drawings are controlled by
using occupancy sensor, stair cases are controlled by motion sensors.
1.
GENERAL.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
1.7.
1.8.
Detailed load schedules for dedicated lighting distribution boards for each
specific area shall be provided by the sub-contractor in compliance with
design lighting layout. The load schedule shall be complete with particulars of
each outgoing circuit with respect to type and number of lighting luminaries
and control zones.
Three No. dedicated Intelligent Lighting Control Panels, designated ILCP1,
ILCP2 and ILCP3 have been specified for control of lighting circuits in
specific areas as indicated in the drawings
The switching schedule shall be designed to offer switching ON/OFF of
lighting points in a pattern to be advised by the Engineer/Client at site. If
necessary, circuits and number of lighting points in respective circuits may be
altered to suit switching requirements.
All installation works shall be carried out by experienced personnel in strict
compliance with the instructions and guidelines provided by the manufacturer.
The Contractor shall be required to provide full two year warranty and limited
five year warranty on all equipment supplied and installed in the system.
Prior to placing the order for the Lighting Control System, the Contractor shall
submit revised circuits, load schedules complete with full technical details of
the system and components offered, for Engineers study, comments and
approval.
Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely tested and
commissioned by manufacturers Engineer. All lighting load and control
circuits shall be tested live to check for continuity and freedom from defects.
Prior to handing over the installation, the Contractor shall be required to make
arrangements with the Manufacturer to train Clients designated personnel in
the understanding of the system capabilities, its correct operation and
maintenance schedules and requirements.
Lighting Control Systems
Page 1 of 3

SPECIFICATIONS
2.
ELEC/SPEC.16511.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
How does an occupancy sensor work?
The general answer is that occupancy sensors work by detecting human presence or
activity. The specific answer is that occupancy sensors use one or more of three
different technologies to detect or "sense" human presence and/or activity.
The most common technology is passive infrared (PIR). A PIR sensor works by
sending out invisible infrared beams that read or respond to temperature differences.
If there is no one in the range of the sensor the sensor does not respond. When a
warmer object, such as a human body, crosses two or more beams the sensor responds
to the difference in temperature between the person and the background. This is the
technology used in basic security sensors. In the case of a basic security sensor, there
will be typically 4 - 10 beams which mean each beam is fairly wide. This is why you
can sometimes walk directly towards a security sensor and nothing happens. It is
because you are moving within one beam and not crossing two beams. Only when
you cross at least two beams will the sensor activate.
In modern PIR occupancy sensors there can be over 1400 individual beams which
make them much more responsive to small movements such as sitting at a desk and
typing on a keyboard. PIR works very well in most commercial environments and can
detect at a long range, up to 40 meters, in warehouses and underground car parks. PIR
has several limitations, however; it requires line of sight and will not read through any
material including glass. In addition, PIR does not work well in extremely warm
environments as it cannot distinguish between the temperature of the human body and
the background.
The second common technology is microphonics. As the name implies, occupancy
sensors that incorporate microphonics work by picking up noise that is typical of
human occupancy or activity. Advanced microphonics sensors incorporate Automatic
Gain Control (AGC) and can "learn" background noises such as the steady hum of a
central air conditioner or the sound of a circulating fan. They are also sensitive
enough to pick up sounds typical of human activity such as typing on a keyboard,
talking on the phone, a phone ringing, tapping on a desk, a chair squeaking, walking
on a wood floor and numerous other sounds that are typically generated by human
presence or activity. Microphonics type sensors do not require line of sight and can
hear around corners. This type of sensor works very well in large open plan office and
commercial areas as they can cover a large area without having to "see" all of it. The
limitation of microphonics sensors is that they do not work in very noisy
envorinments such as a factory or where a recurring noise not necessarily related to
human activity such as a TV that stays on in the background or an individual, window
type air conditioner that comes on and off whether there is a person in the room or
not.
The third common tecnnology is high frequency (HF) ultrasound or ultrasonics
sensors. HF works exactly the same as a bat's "radar" or a submarine's "sonar." The
sensor sends out a high frequency sound wave that bounces around the space and
returns to the sensor. Any movement that disturbs the wave activates the sensor. HF
sensors can be very sensitive and can read through many materials including the
most commonly used interior construction materials and glass. From a human
occupancy standpoint, HF's big limitation is that it responds to any motion, not just
Page 2 of 3

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16511.
human presence. For example, an open window and rustling curtains or a moving
window shade or, in an office environment a piece of paper coming out of a printer,
can activate an HF sensor even if no one is there.
To enhance the strengths and minimize the limitations of each of the three
technologies, sensor manufacturers sometimes combine technologies in "dual
technology" sensors that typically include a combination of PIR and either
microphonics or HF.
The most important issue for a successful occupancy sensor installation is to
understand the strengths and limitations of each type of sensor and to choose the
appropriate sensor for the application. Occupancy sensors can save significant
amounts of energy and take the human factor out of remembering to turn off the
lights, the air conditioner and any other equipment that only needs to be on when
there is human presence.
RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
1.
2.
3.
LUTRON, USA.
CLIPSAL, Australia.
ABB, EU.
Page 3 of 3

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16721/16770.

SECTION 16721 / 16770
ANOLOGUE ADDRESSABLE VOICE INTEGRATED
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
1
SCOPE
The Contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission a high-quality fastacting Voice integrated electronic Analogue Addressable Fire Detection and Alarm
system comprising, but not limited to, Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (MFACP),
Repeat Fire Alarm Control Panels (RFACP), combined Optical Smoke and Heat
Sensors, Heat Sensors, combined Optical Smoke/Heat Sensors and sounder units,
Manual Break Glass Call points, Electronic Sounders, Interface Units, Loud Speakers,
Loop powered Distributed Amplifier Units (DAU), Audio Control Units (ACU), all
loop cabling and necessary components and accessories deemed necessary for a safe,
reliable and satisfactory system, conforming to the relevant and applicable
requirements and recommendations of BS 5839-1:2002,BS EN 5839-8:1998, BS
5445, BS 5446, and in strict compliance with the latest rules, regulations and
recommendations of the Local Civil Defense Authority (UAE Fire Code).
2.
GENERAL CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS

2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
The various components of the proposed fire detection and alarm system
indicated in the respective drawings are notional and their number and
locations may be altered on site to comply with the requirements and
recommendations of the Local Civil Defense Authority. Prior to submitting his
proposal and offer, the Contractor shall be required to coordinate with the
aforementioned authority and also with the selected/approved manufacturer of
the proposed equipment to ensure all necessary components, accessories,
cabling etc., are included in the offer as no claims for variations shall be
allowed for lack of knowledge in this respect.
Prior to placing order for any equipment, the Contractor shall submit
comprehensive documents comprising working drawings, catalogues and
descriptive literature of components, maintenance manual etc., for Engineers
study and approval.
All installation works shall conform to the best principles of modern practice
and shall be carried out by fully competent tradesmen of appropriate grades.
All equipment and material shall be brand new and manufactured by reputable
companies.
All system components shall be manufactured by one manufacturer who shall
be on the local Civil Defense Authoritys list of approved manufacturers.
The Contractor shall be required to train and instruct clients personnel in the
correct use, operation and supervision of the system, preferably prior to the
official completion and handing over of the project.
File: ELECSPEC16721/16770.doc
Analogue Addressable Voice Integrated

Fire Detection and Alarm System
Page 1 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
2.7.
3.
ELEC/SPEC.16721/16770.
The Main Fire Alarm panel MFACP shall be located in the ground floor Foyer
and the Repeat Control panel RFACP shall be located in the ground floor
Security Room.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.
3.9.
In the event of a fire condition, the ongoing voice system, comprising back
ground music system and P.A. system, shall be terminated promptly and prerecorded voice alert and evacuation messages, in Arabic and in English
languages, stored in the Distributed Amplifier Units as well as in the Audio
Control Units shall be transmitted via loudspeakers to selected zones in a
programmed sequence. The Manufacturer of the proposed System shall
submit, through the Contractor, full particulars of safety steps in the operation
of the system to ensure very orderly evacuation procedure without developing
any panic situation.
The fire detection and alarm system shall be designed to facilitate accurate
identification of the source of heat/smoke/fire in their early stages to minimize
occurrences of false alarm due to faulty equipment, electrical transients, system
faults, presence of insects etc.
All system components and devices shall be connected to a two-wire loop circuit/s
with each device having its own built-in isolator. Removal or disconnection of
any device or component from the loop shall not affect the functioning and
performance of other components and devices connected in the system.
All station devices inclusive of MFACP, RFACP, smoke and heat sensors,
sounders, manual call points, Interface Units, Distributed Amplifier Units etc.,
shall be installed on the same loop.
Each device shall be assigned up to 32 character alphanumeric label. In case of
fire, fault or warning, the label of device sensing threshold shall appear on
visual display unit of the panel. Any modification in the label shall only be
carried out from the built-in keyboard of the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
The system shall be designed to provide all the benefits of a Soft Addressable
System and overcome any disadvantages of a Hard Addressable System.
The system shall be designed for operation on 24-50 V DC supply.
In the event a fire condition is reported either from a sensor or from a manual
call point, an alarm shall be sounded at the Main Fire Alarm panel. If the
alarm is not acknowledged within three minutes, all loud speakers shall be
activated throughout the building for occupants to vacate the building.
Provisions and facilities shall be made at the Fire Alarm Control panel for
carrying out the following functions:
3.9.1.
Prior to sounding an alarm, to distinguish between a fire and fault

condition by comparing the plotted patterns from a sensor against
known fire and fault patterns held in its memory.
3.9.2. To record the time, date and place of occurrence of every fire and fault
condition in its memory. To silence the alarm loud speakers but the
visual indication to remain until the system is reset.
3.9.3. To operate any particular loud speaker or a group of loud speakers in
evacuate or alert mode.
3.9.4. To change the sensitivity of any sensor in the system automatically.

Page 2 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16721/16770.
3.9.5. In the event of fire, fault or warning situation, the label of the
concerned sensing device shall appear on its visual display panel.
3.9.6. To assign, change or modify label of any device without the use of any
external hardware element.
3.9.7. To enable/disable any device during maintenance periods.
3.9.8. To programme or change sequence of loud speakers.
3.9.9. To constantly monitor and check the following circuits and fault
conditions :
i)
Power supply to the loops.
ii)
Open circuit, short circuit, earth and any other fault
condition in the loops.
iii)
Fault in keyboard and printer circuits.
iv)
Communication failure.
iv)
Errors in cards and loops.
3.9.7. In the event of a Fire Alarm situation, the proposed System shall be
designed to initiate the following :
i)
Transmit signal of fire condition to lift controls.
ii)
Release doors normally locked by magnetic devices.
iii)
Shutdown mechanical ventilation equipment.
iv)
Start up smoke extract fans.
v)
Initiate Alert Signals to all panels.
4.
SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND DEVICES

All components and devices described below shall be designed to be suitable for use in a
Voice Integrated Analogue Addressable Fire Detection and Alarm System.
4.1.
INTEGRATED
(MFACP)
MAIN
FIRE VOICE
ALARM
CONTROL
PANEL
The Main Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be constructed of robust material and
shall be aesthetically designed with a lockable front cover.
The main features and functions of the control panel have been described in
section 3 above. The Contractor shall include any other functions deemed
necessary for the satisfactory operation of the system.
The control panel shall be computer controlled using analogue technique to
detect smoke/heat/fire conditions. The panel shall have the following features,
and shall comply with the requirements of BS 5839: Part 4: 1988, EN 54: Part
4.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
Shall be an Integrated Fire Detection, Voice Alarm and Public Address

System.
Shall support Distributed Amplifier Units.
Shall support 3 fire detection loop circuits.
Shall cover minimum 16 No. fire detection zones.
Shall provide Fire and Voice Alarm fault and disablement events
display.
Shall have minimum 5 voice evacuation zones per loop.
Shall provide messages from standard Audio pack.
Shall have built-in Emergency microphone.

Page 3 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16721/16770.
In addition, the Panel shall be complete with, but not limited to, the following
elements :
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Built-in full qwerty keyboard.

Visual display unit capable of displaying 4 lines of 40 characters each.
Built-in 40 characters printer.
Internal lead acid battery complete with charger and 24 hours backup
supply in the event of mains supply failure.
Indication lamps for fire, power, warning and for all fault conditions.
Push button switch for cancelling fault buzzer.
Controls for silencing sounders and resetting the system.
In addition to the functions described in Item 3 above, the menu function
keys on the keyboard shall provide the following features :
1.
2.
3.
4.
4.2.
Indicating previous fire events.

Indicate previous system events.
Loop map connections.
Check cleanliness of sensors.
REPEAT FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (RFACP)

Repeat Fire Control Panel shall be located in areas indicated in item 2.7 above.
The Panel shall repeat and display all messages and common indications
provided in the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel and shall have all essential
alarm controls, menu facilities and optional printer. The panels shall be
complete with in-built batteries and battery chargers.
4.3.
INTERFACE UNITS
Interface Units shall be provided to interface fire/fault signals emanating from
Voice Integrated Fire Alarm Panels, with magnetic doors, AC equipment, Lift,
Building Management System, Pressurization Fans etc. All inputs, outputs and
power supply units shall be monitored for any faults.
4.4.
OPTICAL SMOKE SENSORS

These shall be of optical type in a single head designed to detect visible smoke
from slow smouldering fires, and shall comply with the requirements of BS
5839: Part 5:1988, BS 5445 : Part 7 : 1984, EN 54 : Part 7.
To facilitate ease in maintenance and replacement of sensing element, the
device shall be composed of three chambers. The outermost chamber housing
the optical sensing element shall be plugged to the central chamber housing
the electronic micro-processor circuitry. The latter shall be plugged on to the
inner chamber housing wiring and terminals.

Page 4 of 8

4.5.
SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16721/16770.
HEAT SENSORS
These shall comply with the requirements of BS 5445: Parts 5 & 8, EN 54 :
Parts 5 and 8, and shall comprise three chambers as described for smoke
sensors in item 4.4 above
4.6.
OPTICAL/ELECTRONIC HEAT SENSOR

These devices combine the optical smoke sensor and heat sensor in one head
and offer exceptional detection spectrum. The optical element monitors large
particle visible smoke from slow smouldering fires, and the electronic heat
element monitors high energy fires with little or no smoke. These shall comply
with the requirements of BS 5445: Parts 5 & 7.
4.7.
MANUAL CALL POINTS

These shall comply with the requirements of BS 5839: Part 2: 1983, EN 54 :
Part 2, and shall be of the colour specified by the local Civil Defence
Authority.
4.8.
SOUNDERS
These shall comply with the requirements of BS 5839: Part 3: 1983, EN 54 :
Part 3, and shall have an output of 100 dB at a distance of 1 meter.
4.9.
LOUDSPEAKERS
Aesthetically designed surface mounted and/or recessed loudspeakers of
suitable wattage shall be installed in approximate locations indicated in the
drawings. The speakers shall offer a high sound pressure level and a wide
frequency range and shall be suitable for both speech and music reproduction.
The number of loud speakers may be altered to suit site acoustic conditions.
The voice system, as an alternative to conventional sounders, shall be
designed and installed complete with all necessary equipment, accessories,
wiring, conduits etc. and shall be fully integrated/interfaced with the fire
detection and alarm system.
Each loudspeaker assembly shall consist of a single piece 6W RMS dual core
loudspeaker and a frame with a 100V matching transformer mounted on the
back. The transformer shall be a multiple-tapping type to facilitate control of
sound volume and shall be complete with fire dome and thermal fusible link.
In addition, supporting brackets shall be provided for fixing to ceilings.
The loudspeakers shall have the following technical specifications:
i) on-axis frequency response not to vary more than +/- 10 dB over the
frequency range 70 Hz to 18 kHz.
ii) Minimum sensitivity: 90 dB/W.

Page 5 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16721/16770.
iii) Minimum input power: 6W.
4.10.
LOOP POWERED DISTRIBUTED AMPLIFIER UNITS

Suitable number and adequately rated Amplifiers shall be provided to match
the final number and ratings of the loud speakers installed for the system. The
Amplifiers shall be fed from a suitably rated Uninterrupted Power Supply
Unit. They shall amplify audio signals for broadcast to loudspeakers in various
zones. The audio signals are either live speech from microphones or
prerecorded messages from digital stores.
The output voltage of amplifiers may be selected between 100V, 70V or 50V.
All amplifiers shall be provided with a 2 x 16 character display for fault
monitoring and status display.
All amplifier units shall comply with the relevant requirements of BS 58398:1998 and BS 5839-9: 2003 and shall be assigned a distinctive label in Fire
Alarm Control Panel to identify its location.
4.11.
AUDIO CONTROL UNITS (ACU)

Audio Control Units shall be installed adjacent to the Fire Alarm Control
Panel and shall be powered by suitably rated Uninterrupted Power Supply
Unit.
ACUs shall be connected to both fire alarm loops and voice system audio
loops.
The audio loops shall carry live messages from a microphone or
prerecorded stored messages from master ACU to the DAUs in the system for
broadcast to selected areas and zones.
The ACUs shall be designed to store up to four messages, each of 45 seconds
duration.
4.12.
BACKGROUIND MUSIC AND P.A. SYSTEM

The background music system shall comprise of 1 No. CD player, 1 No. triple
cassette deck, 1 No. AM/FM tuner, 1 No. goose neck type table mounted
microphone and all necessary accessories and components deemed essential
for a high-quality high-performance music and P.A. system. Particulars of the
main components of the system shall be as follows :
4.12.1. CD PLAYER
The CD player shall be designed to load up to six discs in the magazine
to be played sequentially or randomly by use of a remote signal, and
shall be designed to conform to the following technical specifications :
AC supply
Frequency response
Signal to noise ratio
Distortion

220V, 50 Hz.
20 Hz to 20,000 Hz.
90 dB.
0.008% THD at 1 kHz.
Page 6 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
Channel separation
Quantization
ELEC/SPEC.16721/16770.
82 dB.
16 bit twin DAC.
4.12.2. TRIPLE SEQUENCER CASSETTE DECK

The cassette deck shall be designed to house up to three standard C60
and C90 M-track music cassettes. The design shall provide operational
features to include auto-music search, audio sensing, auto reverse, auto
eject, power off/on etc. Technical specifications of the unit shall be as
follows :
AC supply
Output level
Frequency range
Distortion
Tape speed
Fast forward/rewind
220V, 50 Hz.
0 dBm (775 mV) 600 ohms
Mono output.
50 Hz to 12500 Hz +/- 3 dB.
less than 3% THD at 1 kHz.
4.75 cm/s
less than 140s to rewind C60
Cassette.
4.12.3. FM/AM TUNER

Technical specifications of the tuner shall be as follows :
AC supply
Sensitivity
IF rejection
Nominal output
Antenna impedance
Tuning meth
220V, 50 Hz.
3uV for FM channels
20 uV for AM channels
70 dB
100 mV
75 ohms.
Electronic.
Onsite
adjustable
with LED on station indicator.
4.12.4. EQUIPMENT RACK

The equipment rack shall be of aesthetic design and full particulars
related to material, dimensions, finish etc. shall be submitted to the
Architect for approval prior to manufacture.
5.
FIRE ALARM AUTO-DIALLER

Fire alarm auto-dialler and a telephone line jack outlet shall be inter-faced with the
Main Fire Alarm panel for transmitting fire alarm status to the Local Civil Defence
Authority for monitoring purposes.
6.
WIRING
All wiring and cabling shall be carried out using fire resistant 2 core 1.5 sq. mm.
cables complying with the requirements of BS 7629-2:1997, BS 6387:1994, BS 62073:2001

Page 7 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16721/16770.
RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS.
1.
GENT, U.K.
2.
BOSCH, GERMANY.
3.
SIEMENS, GERMANY.
OR OTHER APPROVED EQUIVALENT.
END OF SECTIONS 16721 and 16770

Page 8 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16780.
SECTION 16780
CENTRALLY MONITORED SELF CONTAINED EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM
1.
General
The Emergency lighting system and all its components shall be designed & installed to meet the local civil
defense requirements & the respective EN & BS standards and regulations applicable on the project. The
product should be from ISO certified Manufacturer and the vendor shall have at least 5 years proven ex
perience in successful installation commissioning of emergency lighting systems in UAE
Emergency lighting shall fulfill the following functions,
Illuminate the escape routes.
Indicate the escape route direction clearly
Provide EXIT signs on escape doors and routes to such doors.
Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment and other life saving equipment on the premises are
illuminated.
Permit operations concerned with safety measures & to shut down all hazardous process
Monitoring units shall be used for automatic testing & monitoring of Escape route, EXIT & Safety and shall
be distributed on the building based on Security Zone or Typical Areas etc., to minimize wiring. The prod
uct shall have local civil defense authority approvals.
Input Voltage: 220V AC
Light fitting Battery Type: 3.6V, 4AH Ni Cd
Light output in Emergency operation: 30% Minimum
Battery back up required for Duration of Three Hours under emergency operation.
2.
Code of Practice for Emergency Lighting

Ministry of InteriorDepartment of Civil Defense
2.1.
Code of Practice for Emergency Lighting

This is prepared in conjunction with standards BS52661:1999, and EN1838 for best practice of design and
installation for Emergency Lighting in most type of premises, other than domestic premises consisting of
individual houses. This section is also not applicable on Airports & Defense Installations.
2.2.
Definitions in Emergency Lighting:

Emergency Lighting:
Lighting provided for use when the supply to the normal
Emergency EXIT:
An EXIT light which is intended to be used during an emergency.
Escape Lighting:
That part of the emergency lighting which is provided to ensure that the escape
route is illuminated at all material times.
Escape Route:
A route forming part of the means of escape from a point of building to a final
EXIT.
Centrally Monitored Self Contained
Emergency Lighting System
lighting fails.
Page 1 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16780.
Central Battery Emergency Lighting System : A complete emergency lighting installation from the standby
battery power source to the emergency lighting lamps.
E.g. A circuit from Central battery connected through wiring to several escape
luminaries.
Self Contained Emergency lighting: A luminaire providing maintained or non maintained emergency light
ing in which all the elements, such as the battery, the lamp, the control unit are
provided within the unit.
Maintained emergency lighting : A lighting system in which all emergency lighting lamps are in operation
at all material times.
Non maintained Emergency lighting : A lighting system in which all emergency lighting lamps are in op
eration only in the event of power failure.
Combined (sustained) emergency luminaries: An emergency light containing at least two lamps, one of
which is energized from normal lighting supply and the other from an emergency
lighting supply. Such a luminaire is intended to sustain illumination at all material
times.
2.3.
Need for Emergency Lighting:

When the supply to the emergency lighting fails, emergency lighting is required for the following func
tions,
Illuminate the escape routes.
Indicate the escape route direction clearly
Provide EXIT signs on escape doors and routes to such doors.
Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment and other life saving equipment on the premises are
illuminated.
Permit operations concerned with safety measures & to shut down all hazardous process
2.4.
Defined Escape routes and response times:

For routes that are permanently unobstructed and up to 2m wide the horizontal luminance at floor level
on the center line of escape route should not be less than 1 lux. The emergency lighting detailed in this
clause should be provided within 5 sec of the failure of the normal lighting supply.
2.5.
Uniformity of luminance:
Care should be taken to avoid abrupt changes between dark and light areas on the floor to the escape
routes. It is therefore necessary to illuminate the route reasonably uniformly.
2.6.
Mounting Heights of Luminaries:

The mounting height of the individual lights will be governed by the physical characteristics of the area
under consideration and the best compromise should be chosen. The possibility of smoke accumulation
rendering the emergency lighting ineffective should be considered with regards to mounting heights.
2.7.
Duration:
Page 2 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16780.
The period of time that the luminaire can continuously provide the minimum luminance required in the
emergency condition. The time specified for standard premises is 3 Hours, with exceptions under special
permission where other parallel backup supply is provided.
2.8.
Records:
On completion of work, approved drawings of the emergency lighting installation should be provided and
retained on the premises. In addition a log book should be provided for recording the routine examina
tions, tests, defects and alterations. A manual for operation and maintenance should be handed to the
occupier.
2.9.
Emergency & EXIT lighting design.
2.9.1
Common requirements on Emergency Lights

1
Emergency lighting should be uniformly provided along the escape route to ensure a minimum lev
el of 1lux illumination on the floor level. Non maintained or sustained type of lighting can be used
for this purpose.
All service rooms, plant rooms and areas where hazardous activity is carried out the minimum illu
mination must be at least 5 Lux.
Emergency lights should be provided in basement floors with access to public to have a minimum
illumination of 2 Lux, to avoid panic.
All Fire Fighting and Alarm devices like Call points, Extinguishers, Hosereel
Cabinets, First aid boxes and spare / tool boxes must be well illuminated by emergency lighting.
2.9.2
One Emergency light should be provided in each of the landing of the Escape stair.
At least one Emergency light fitting should be provided in public toilets / janitors / ablutions, and
more units should be provided depending on the area.
An emergency light should be provided outside the point of EXIT of the building.
A time delay on mains operation should be set for 1 min before the emergency light is switched off
on power supply restoration.
Extra care should be taken to provide uniform illumination in places where Handicapped / Women
/ Children / Seniors can be subjected to panic conditions.
Common requirements on EXIT lights

1
Maintained EXIT lights with specified viewing distances and with legends conforming to BS & EN
standards must be used to indicate the escape routes.
Maintained EXIT lights with specified viewing distances and with English & Arabic script and direc
tional arrows can be used to indicate the escape routes.
A maintained EXIT light with direction pointing to the escape route should be visible from any point
of the Escape corridor.
A maintained EXIT light should be fixed above all EXIT doors.
A maintained EXIT light should be provided inside the stair where it leads to the point of EXIT of
the premises.
Directional maintained EXIT lights leading to Escape route / stair should be provided in basements
and driveways.
Page 3 of 8

2.10.
SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16780.
Special Applications:
Apart from the standard requirements listed above, the following should be provided in such premises,
2.10.1 Hotels / Short Term Leased Apartments

1
Each guest room should be provided with an emergency light.
All Conference facilities / Entertainment rooms / Restaurants / Ball rooms mustbe provided with
average illumination of 1 lux covering the complete floor area.
EXIT lights should be provided on all doors leading to escape route in all such areas.
2.10.2 Office Complex:

1
Emergency lights should be provided to give 1 lux uniform illumination on the escape route for all
open offices.
Atleast one emergency light should be provided inside each office if it is accessible to the public at
any stage, and more units are required depending on the area.
All conference rooms should be provided with average illumination of 1 lux covering the complete
floor area. EXIT light should be provided above doors in such rooms.
2.10.5 Residential Complex:

1
Emergency lights should be provided to give 1 lux uniform illumination on the escape route for all
public areas.
All public toilets / health clubs / pool areas / childrens play area must be provided with emergency
lights.
2.10.6 Covered Car park including Basements:

1
Emergency lights should be provided to give 1 lux uniform illumination on the driveways and
walkways.
Escape routes leading to stairs must be illuminated uniformly.
Directional EXIT lights should be provided leading to EXIT doors or Escape routes and not along the
driveway leading to vehicular EXIT.
2.10.9 Industry/Plants
2.11.
Emergency lights should be provided to give 1 lux uniform illumination on theescape route for all
public areas.
All areas where machinery is involved and hazardous activity is carried out, the minimum illumina
tion must be at least 5 Lux.
Testing and Monitoring the Emergency Lighting System:

As per the clause 8 and section 12.4 of BS5266, the complete emergency lighting installation including
individual light fixtures should be tested and records should be maintained.
2.11.1 Daily Tests:

1
Any fault recorded in the log book has been given urgent attention and action noted.
Every lamp in a maintained system is lit.
Page 4 of 8

3
2.11.2
2.11.3
2.12.
SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16780.
The main control in Central system indicates healthy operation of system or indicating LED on the
self contained light is lit.
Monthly Tests:
1
Each luminaire is tested by stimulating a mains failure and switching the system or the light into
battery operation.
All light fittings should be visually inspected, unless the system is addressable in nature.
Each Central battery system / self contained light fitting should be tested on stimulated mains fail
ure for one quarter to its rated duration.
All charger / Control devices / battery should be visually inspected in Central battery system.
All faulty lamps / charger / control devices / battery etc should be replaced and the system put into
complete normal operation.
Records should be maintained.
Yearly Tests:
1
In addition to the above tests, all central battery systems and self contained lights must be tested
on stimulated mains failure for the rated duration of the battery.
Rated life of the battery must be verified and all battery units must be replaced with new units if
required.
A measurement of emergency illumination is carried out randomly on the premises.
Records should be maintained.
Central Battery Emergency Lighting System

Both in section 11 and clause 12.4 of BS5266, as testing and monitoring of Emergency Lighting system is
mandatory, and because of the short expected life of battery in self contained light fixtures an Electroni
cally monitored Central battery based Emergency Lighting system is preferred on installations where
higher no. of light fittings or large area is involved. The following are the premises where such an installa
tion is preferred,
a) Multistoried Residential & Office Buildings.
b) Shopping Centers or covered / enclosed malls.
c) Hotels & Short term leased apartments.
d) Entertainment Centers.
e) Industrial Complexes.
f) Hospitals.
2.13.
Requirements on Central Battery System

1
Electronic Control module should be provided on all control panels with possibility of testing and
monitor ing of the system and the connected light fittings.
Each unit should be provided with a logbook facility to log at least 100 events occurred.
Page 5 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16780.
Battery should be designed for stationary use and automotive battery is not acceptable. Provision
should be provided to maintain an ambient temperature of max. 30 degrees C for the battery. Min
imum expected life of such battery at such temperatures should be at least 10 years.
Charger provided must be temperature compensated and should be able to recharge the battery
from min to max in 20 hours duration.
A maximum of 20 light fittings can be connected on each circuit originating from these units. Ade
quate protection devices must be provided for each of these circuits.
Inverter / Converter / Switching over modules inside the Central battery unit and the distribution
panel must be provided in such a way that failure of one unit does not affect the operation of the
other. At least two such units must be provided in each equipment.
Except in maintained system, adequate relays or monitoring devices should be provided to ensure
that emergency lights are turned on in the event of power failure in specific parts of the premises,
covered by different normal distribution panels and also only during complete power failure.
All cabling supplying battery power to distribution panels and light fittings should be Fire proof to
maintain the integrity of the system.
Wiring should be carried out in such a way that failure of one light fitting does not hinder the oper
ation of other units.
10
The voltage drop in cables connecting a central battery to slave luminaire is not to exceed 4% of
the nominal system voltage.
11
The raceways or conduits used for such cabling should not be used for other systems. All cables
within such containment must be of the same operating nominal voltage.
Page 6 of 8

3.0
SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16780.
Monitoring Unit:
The panel should comply with BS5266 and EN50172 standards which are accepted
dards for emergency lighting.
international stan
Programmable Control panel for max. 250 Nos. self contained fittings with data lines. It should also have
programmable input, stabilized 24Volts voltage independent of battery voltage during mains failure and
with 2 line X40 character LCD displays.
The monitoring panel should have the following features,
Display PCB Should be with LCD, Key pad, Micro. Eprom and battery backed memory for storing location
text.
Power supply PCB With 5V & 24V PSU battery charger and loop drive circuitry.
Loop Card . Should is with Micro & Eprom for communicate/Control addressable loop interfaces.
The panel should perform the following functions
Monitor & control all test cycles & functions.
Automatic luminaire search function.
Select timing for automatic function and duration test.
Manual Function and Duration Test function.
Faults like Check wiring, Check lamp, Charger fault, check battery should be displayed with text location.
BMS compatibility option.
4.0
Addressable interface
The addressable interface must be a compact module fitted inside all emergency/exit lights to be moni
tored .Allocation of unique address has to be achieved through a hand held programmer, prior to being
connected to the data cable.
The address must be able to read back or change if required using the programmer.
5.0
Central Monitoring Facility
The central monitoring shall be via a central group monitoring hardware & software, monitoring
& programming unit. The unit shall be in the form of an IBM compatible PC with monitor, Pen
tium generation processor, keyboard, mouse and a printer. The unit shall operate with software
to give detailed address & information of all luminaires connected to system. The program shall
be user friendly with clear fault indication screens on the monitor. Max.63 Nos. monitoring units
shall be networked to the Central computer
6.0
Addressable Non Maintained Emergency Light

Non maintained 8W self contained emergency light complete, integral addressable unit and. LED indica
tions Failure & Battery operation. The luminaire will have a 3.6V/4AH battery capable of giving minimum
30% light output for a rated duration of 3 hours.
7.0
Addressable Maintained EXIT Light

Maintained 8W self contained emergency light complete, integral addressable unit and. LED indications
Failure & Battery operation. The luminaire will have a 3.6V/4AH battery capable of giving minimum 30%%
Page 7 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16780.
light output for a rated duration of 3 hours and shall have EXIT legend with viewing distance of minimum
20 meters.
Address 1
Address 2
LOCAL MAINS
SUPPLY
24v LOOP
WIRING
( 250 ADDRESSABLE DEVICES MAX )
SCAEL
INTERFACE
SCAEL
INTERFACE
SCAEL
INTERFACE
SCAEL
INTERFACE
Address 3
Address 4
EASICHECK PANEL
MONITORING
PANEL
SELF-CONTAINED FITTING
Page 8 of 8

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16781.

SECTION - 16781
MASTER DIGITAL SATELLITE AND TERRRESTRIAL
ANTENNAE SYSTEM.
The Contractor shall supply, erect, connect, test and commission a Satellite/Terrestrial Master TV
(SMATV) reception system based on latest digital technology and comprising, but not limited to, an
array of Terrestrial Antennae and Satellite Dish Antennae on roof, together with all essential
equipment, components, accessories etc., all in compliance with these Specifications and related
drawings. The SMATV system shall form an integral part of the structured voice, data and video
cabling system and shall provide high quality, high performance digital reception of the following
terrestrial and satellite RF signals from channels transmitted by:
a)
ARABSAT, comprising approximately 60 channels.
b) NILESAT, comprising approximately 150 channels.

c) HOTBIRD, approximately 650 channels.
d) PAS 7/10.
The channels to be provided shall be selected by the Client and intimated to the Contractor
prior to placing order and installation of the system.
e)
1.
The Terrestrial TV Antennae system shall be designed to receive the channels:

Available on the following satellite:
Arab Sat
Asia
Hot Bird
Nile Sat
FM Radio
GENERAL.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4
1.5.
The installations for the above antennae systems shall be complete with terrestrial
antennae, satellite dish antennae, Multi-band Amplifier, Distribution Modules,
Distribution Amplifiers, IF to IF Convertors, F-Connectors, Multi-way Splitters,
quadrangular Digital LNBFs, RG6/RG11 co-axial cables, isolated co-axial TV
socket outlets, power supply unit and all necessary components and accessories
deemed essential for a reliable, high-quality high-performance system for digital
reception and distribution of VHF/UHF signals in compliance with BS 6513.
The system shall be designed to transmit specified channels from the above
Satellite Dishes.
Adequate number of IF to IF Converters shall be provided at the headend and
each Converter shall be equipped with required number of transponder inputs
from the LNBs.
The output from the IF to IF Converters shall be combined to give a single
output to be distribute free TV air channels from the above dishes.
To view pay TV channels the users will be required to purchase digital
decoders.
Master Digital Satellite and Terrestrial Antenna System
Page 1 of 4

SPECIFICATIONS
1.6.
1.7.
1.8.
1.9.
2.
TERRESTRIAL ANTENNAE
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
3.
ELEC/SPEC.16781.
The system shall incorporate suitable convertor units to ensure there are no
cross-channel interferences
The Contractor shall be required to demonstrate that the signal strength at
each outlet is satisfactory for all channels and wave bands.
Prior to placing orders and commencement of any installation works, the
contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for his study and approval, full technical
details of all components of the systems proposed for installation.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the specialist Contractor/installer of
structured cabling system and provide all necessary information and assistance.
Separate antenna shall be provided for each specified channel. For clear
reception, each antenna shall be equipped with appropriate number of
elements for respective channel.
The antennae shall be mounted on metallic mast with the antennae coaxial
cables passing through its central core. The mast shall be installed and braced
in a manner to ensure it shall withstand the strongest anticipated wind
pressures on roof.
Channelized aerials shall be used for VHF channels and grouped aerials for
UHF channels.
SATELLITE DISH ANTENNAE

3.1. High-quality robustly constructed dish antennae shall be mounted on concrete
bases and installed at locations indicated in the drawings. All dish antennae shall
carry a warrantee of at least five years.
3.2.
The dishes shall generally be of solid or perforated aluminium construction with
thermostatic powder coating to provide maximum protection from UV exposure
and from severe climatic conditions.
3.3.
For C Band reception, the feed horns and LNBs shall be of robust construction to
withstand local atmospheric conditions. The noise temperature of LNBs shall not
exceed 25 deg. C.
3.4.
For Ku Band reception, non-switching Quattro LNBFs with a maximum of 0.9
dB noise figure shall be used.
3.5.
The antennae shall have the following minimum Specifications:
C BAND :
Band
Diameter
Gain
Operating temperature
Mounting
Wind load capability
F/D ratio
3.7 4.2 GHz

10 feet
Linear or circular
Up to 60 deg. C
Polar
145 kmph
Less than 0.3
Ku BAND :
Band
Diameter
10.7 12.75 GHz

1.35 meters
Page 2 of 4

SPECIFICATIONS
Gain
Operating temperature
Type
Wind load capability
Efficiency
3.6.
4.
The signals from each selected satellite channel shall be amplified to obtain an
output signal level of not less than 115 dBuv at the head end, and the system
shall be designed to deliver a signal level not less than 70 dBuv at any TV socket
outlet in the system.
RF HEAD-END EQUIPMENT
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.
4.8.
4.9.
5.
ELEC/SPEC.16781.
Linear or circular
Up to 60 deg. C
Offset
145 kmph
70%
Head-end shall be of modular construction and shall be designed to accept

additional channels in the future.
To Terrestrial processors shall be designed to process signals in frequency range
47 862 MHz.
The FM radio processor shall be designed to process signals in frequency range
88 108 MHz.
The satellite processor and digital receiver modules shall be designed to process
IF signals in frequency range 950 2150 MHz.
Each satellite processor module shall be designed to have audio and sub-carrier
tuning range of 5.5 to 9 Mz or better, and each module shall be capable of
transmitting audio and sub-carriers in mono, stereo or dual tone.
The modulators of all processing modules shall be PAL B/G and the LF audio
level of modulator module shall be adjustable to allow all channels in the system
to have the same balanced audio level. Tuning in the output frequency range of
the modules shall be PLL-synthesized to achieve maximum stability.
The modulators shall have a saw filter, dual conversion and a tracking filter for
good CNR at the head-end and to avoid forbidden channels in the spectrum.
CNR shall be better than 54 dB inside the channel and better than 65 dB outside
the channel on each module.
The output levels of individual head-end modules shall be controlled so that the
signal level can be balanced and an equalized output is guaranteed.
A robust, corrosion, dust, damp and vermin proof cabinet constructed of highquality galvanized sheet steel complete with lock and key shall be installed at a
suitable location to house head-end stations and other components required for
the system
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
The SMATV system receive all satellite and terrestrial channels from the RF
head-end and distribute these to all guest rooms via the structured cabling
system.
Appropriate Line and distribution amplifiers shall be used to distribute signals to
the TV outlets.
The signal level on RF at the wall outlet shall be 60 and 80 dBuV with CNR of
more than 43 dB with the following parameters :
i)
ii)
iii)
Difference of level between adjacent channels

3 dB
Difference of level between 60 MHz band
8 dB
Difference of level between any channels in the spectrum 15dB
Page 3 of 4

6.
SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.167811
6781 .
TV SOCKET OUTLETS.
These shall be installed at locations indicated in the drawings. All end sockets shall
be terminated with 75 ohm resistors. Total losses at socket outlets shall not exceed
4dBuv. The socket outlets shall be compatible with and of same manufacture as other
wiring accessories.
7.
CO-OXIAL CABLES.
High-quality low-loss double-screened co-oxial cables shall be used throughout the
installation. The maximum loss of the main cable connecting the antennae to the submain splitters boxes shall not exceed 17 dBuv/100 meters, and the maximum loss of
the distribution cable shall not exceed 24 dBuv/100 meters, both at 800 Mhz.
8.
POWER SUPPLY.
Stabilized power supply of adequate capacity protected by fuses shall be provided.
RECOMMENDED EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
PHILIPS, France.
KATHREIN, Germany.
WISI, Germany.
KTI, U.S.A.
GRUNDIG, Germany
Page 16781
of 4

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782.

SECTION - 16782
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION AND VIDEO
SECURITY SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
The Contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission a high quality high
performance Closed Circuit Television and Video (CCTV) Security Surveillance System
Interfaced and Integrated with the Card Access Control System, covering selected areas of
the building, all in compliance with these Specifications and latest Dubai Police and
Authority of Tourism requirements with details indicated in drawings.
1.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
1.6.
1.7.
1.8.
The CCTV system shall be complete with, but not limited to, environmentally
compatible compact digital wide/narrow angle indoor fixed Indoor
wall/ceiling mounted cameras, Indoor PTZ dome colour cameras complete
with high quality lenses; Video Colour Monitors; Digital Video Recorders;
Matrix Switchers; keyboards; Consoles; all video co-axial interconnecting
cables and conduits/containment network and any other components and
accessories deemed necessary for a reliable, efficient and satisfactory
observation and surveillance system for the selected areas indicated in the
drawings.
The locations of the CCTV cameras indicated in the drawings are notional and
these may be altered to suit site conditions.
Prior to submitting his offer, the Contractor shall coordinate with the
manufacturer of
proposed equipment to ensure all necessary components,
accessories, cables etc., other than those described above, shall be included in the
offer, as no claims for variations shall be allowed for lack of knowledge in this
respect.
Prior to placing order for any equipment, the Contractor shall submit, for
Engineers study, comments and final approval, relevant Specifications;
catalogues/descriptive technical literature; complete installation, operation and
maintenance manuals relating to the various components and accessories
proposed for the system.
Prior to commencing any installation works, the Contractor shall submit
comprehensive workshop drawings for Engineers study and approval.
The Contractor shall ensure all components of the system, particularly the
cameras, monitors, VCR etc. shall be manufactured to Internationally accepted
Standards by one manufacturer of international repute.
The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment, accessories and components
supplied shall be manufactured to stringent standards based on the latest
technology available in the market.
The Contractor shall ensure power supplies via 13A switch socket outlets will
be provided adjacent to each camera and all other CCTV system components.
Closed Circuit Television and Video Security Surveillance System
Page 1 of 6

SPECIFICATIONS
1.9.
2.
SYSTEM CONCEPT
2.1.
2.2.
3.
ELEC/SPEC.16782.
All equipment, component, accessories and materials shall be guaranteed by

the Contractor/ Manufacturer for a minimum period of two years after handing
over. The guarantee shall cover repair and replacement of defective materials.
The Security Console comprising controllers/CPUs, TV monitors, VCR etc.

shall be located in each Security Room on the ground floor. Pictures on
dedicated monitors for each camera shall be observed for surveillance of all
areas simultaneously. In addition, manual/automatic Switcher on the Master
Monitor shall facilitate sequential viewing of pictures from all cameras in both
the floors.
The system shall be designed to operate on 12V d.c.
SYSTEM COMPONENTS, DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES

3.1.
DIGITAL VIDEO SERVER (DVS) AND NETWORKED SERVER

SYSTEM
The various components of the DVS and Networked Server System shall
conform to the following Specifications:
3.1.1. DIGITAL VIDEO AND EVENT RECORDER
The System shall be run on the latest available Windows operating system. The
system shall provide recording capacity for 7 days and shall be complete with stateof-the-art video motion detection software, powerful connectivity TCP/IP
connectivity via PSTN, ISDN and Ethernet with network management tool, and PTZ
software. The system shall be designed for recording, playback and live display,
enabling playback and live display while recording is in progress.
3.1.2. BUILT-IN MATRIX SWITCHER

3.1.2.1.The Video Matrix Switcher shall be digital microprocessor
based cross-point
system comprising
colour Video
Multiplexers, external controller/CPU, matrix input/output
bays, control keyboards, alarm interface unit, interface relay
unit, ASCII translator unit, receiver/driver units, Graphic User
Interface Software and complete with all necessary accessories
and components deemed necessary for a high quality high
performance video switching and control system.
3.1.2.2.The Video Matrix Switcher shall have the capacity for up to 16
cameras with 4 monitor outputs. The system shall be modular
in construction and shall be designed to be programmed for up
to 16 sequences, which can be run independently from each
other in either a forward or reverse direction. The matrix bays
shall provide for vertical interval switching of properly phased
inputs to all video outputs. The system shall be designed to
Page 2 of 6

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782.
accept video input levels in the range 0.5 to 2.0 volts peak to
peak.
3.1.2.3.The Video Multiplexer shall be configured for desk top use and
shall be designed to record up to sixteen colour video inputs on
a single VCR with the following operational and performance
Specifications:
a)
Duplex operation to facilitate video recording while
viewing live or playback video on full or multi-screen.
b)
Automatic speed tracking that will facilitate VCR
recording speed to automatically adjust and control the
multiplexer record speed via the VCRs head switching
pulse.
c)
Provision of three monitor outputs, first for full screen
and/or multi-screen multi-camera viewing in live or
playback modes, second for full screen viewing of live
cameras and the third for automatic sequencing of full
screen viewing of live cameras.
d)
Provision of time, date and camera title displays.
3.1.2.4.The control keyboards shall be equipped with a joystick and
shall provide complete control of all system functions inclusive
of the following :
a)
Control of camera to monitor selection.
b)
Control of Panning, Tilting and Zooming functions
of cameras.
c)
Alarm monitoring.
d)
Macro-programming and operation.
3.1.2.5.The alarm interface unit shall be connected directly to the
controller/CPU and shall provide for the monitoring of up to 64
contact closure alarm inputs.
3.1.2.6.The interface relay unit shall be designed to accept TTL inputs
from the controller/CPU and provide up to 64 single-pole
single-throw NO/NC selectable outputs for the operation of
external devices.
3.1.3.
STORAGE AND ARCHIVAL

Records of up to 30 days shall be kept on the hard disk for immediate
accessibility. Outdated video shall be archived or overwritten or further
compressed and stored.
3.1.4. VIDEO MOTION DETECTION (VMD)
A motion detector module with three levels of sensitivities shall be
provided to monitor up to 16 camera inputs in real time. Any number
of areas may be selected for motion trigger in any one view.
3.1.5. TIME ZONES
Page 3 of 6

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782.
A day shall be divided into 96 x 15 minute time zone slots. In each

slot, settings like date of recording, quality, actions to be initiated by
an ordinary alarm and/or VMD may be defined individually. Once
defined and named, a time zone may be used for any number of
cameras on any number of units.
3.2.
CAMERAS
3.2.1. All cameras shall be aesthetically designed and shall be of small,
compact, lightweight and robust construction, housed in
tamper/impact resistant enclosures.
3.2.2. All indoor Dome cameras shall be of approximately 5 diameter and
of solid state compact construction design complete with variable
speed/high speed pan and tilt drive units, high quality 5-50 mm 10X
zoom lenses with 1/4 CCD interline transfer image format for
satisfactory surveillance with minimum illumination of 0.02 lux at
signal level of 50 IRE, high gain. The cameras shall be of high
horizontal resolution colour capable of 480 TV lines. The signal to
noise ratio shall be greater than 48 dB. The cameras shall be complete
with clear dome cover and built-in digital motion detector. The
cameras shall be capable of 360 degrees endless panning with
minimum preset panning speed of 240 degrees/second and manual
panning speed of 120 degrees/second. Remote control functions shall
be carried out with single co-axial cable. The pan and tilt drive shall
provide programmable limit stops for manual panning, auto/random
scanning and frame scanning.
3.2.3. All fixed cameras with or without pan/tilt heads shall be of 1/3 super
dynamic solid state CCD type complete with appropriate high quality
lenses for satisfactory surveillance with minimum illumination of
0.008 lux, with F1.2 lens. The cameras shall provide remote control
function with single co-axial cable and shall be complete with built-in
digital motion detectors, electronic sensitivity enhancers etc. All
cameras shall generally comply with the Specifications of dome
cameras described in item 3.2.2. above.
3.2.4. Cameras shall provide excellent picture quality under all levels of
illuminance, and shall adjust automatically to all light conditions.
3.2.5. Cameras shall provide instant pictures with no warming-up time and
burn-in effects.
3.2.6. All cameras shall be designed to be immune to the ill-effects of
vibrations, shock, magnetic fields, transients etc.
3.2.7. Externally installed cameras shall be housed and protected by robust
weather-proof enclosures to comply with minimum degree of
protection IP 65.
3.3.
VIDEO COLOUR MONITORING SYSTEM

3.3.1. The Master Monitor shall be capable of switching and connecting
the number of cameras indicated in the drawings.
3.3.2. When switching from one camera to another, the blanking time shall
be negligible.
Page 4 of 6

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782.
3.3.3. In addition to the ON/OFF/VOLUME, BRIGHTNESS and

CONTRAST controls, the following features shall be provided:
a)
Manual Camera Selection.
b)
Automatic Camera Sequencing
c)
Sequencing Programming.
d)
VCR Replay with audio/video input and output sockets for
connection to VCR and/or Slave monitor.
e)
Alarm with Manual and Remote triggering and signalling.
f)
Built-in audio-amplifier and loudspeaker for sound
productions from the active camera.
3.3.4. The monitors shall be high quality high resolution CRT and of solid
state electronic design. Colour video monitors with 21 inch colour
tube shall be for the multiplexed output monitor and 15 inch colour
tube for the sequential output monitor. The monitors shall be designed
for a minimum resolution of 450 lines (center) for 21 inch camera and
650 lines for the 15 inch camera with the geometrical distortion less
than 3%.
3.3.5. Each monitor shall be housed in a sturdy metal enclosure to reduce
radio frequency interference, and shall be equipped with an internally
regulated power supply.
3.4.
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDERS

3.4.1. Sufficient numbers of VCRs shall be provided to facilitate recording
of all cameras using multiplexers.
3.4.2. The operational and performance characteristics of the VCRs shall
comply with the following Specifications :
a) 6/18/30/54/78/96/102 hour time-lapse recording facility.
b) One-button recording check.
c) Super resolution option.
d) Search using alarm index, time and date, skip, counter
memory stop.
e) On-screen programming.
f) Interfacing and synchronizing with multiplexers.
g) Automatic head cleaning.
h) Elapsed time display.
i) Tape use counter.
j) 460 TVL recording/playback in super recolution mode with
standard VHS tape.
3.5.
PANNING AND PAN/TILT MECHANISM HEADS

Panning and Pan/Tilt heads shall be of robust construction and shall be
suitable for the size and weight of respective cameras, and shall be complete
with all cabling and accessories up to the respective controllers in the Master
Monitor Room.
3.6.
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
The System Controller shall provide the following controls :
Page 5 of 6

SPECIFICATIONS
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
ELEC/SPEC.16782.
Minimum 64 positions focus, zoom ratio and rotating modes

Lens zoom ratio, focus and iris controls.
Auto and manual Pan/Tilt controls.
Camera position and setting controls.
RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
VISIOPRIME, U.K.
PANASONIC, JAPAN
PELCO, U.S.A.
SAMSUNG, KOREA
BOSCH, EU
Page 6 of 6

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782-1
SECTION 16782-1
INTERCOM SYSTEM
DIGITAL AUDIO INTERCOM
DIGITAL AUDIO INTERCOM SYSTEM

1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
1.3
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special

Conditions (General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B.
General Provisions for Electrical Work applies to work of this Section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and

tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation, an Intercom system
in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
B.
System shall be designed for communication between the main panel and the
audio unit inside the service rooms.
The entrance panel should be Stainless steel anti-vandal, digital with
alphanumeric information display and laser engraved matrix pad with infrared
area illumination.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate cable routing and connections.
B. Submit product data for each item of equipment.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.4
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation Data: Include instructions for routine operation of
and remote stations.
master
B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for minor troubleshooting, preventive

maintenance, and cleaning.
1.5
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
File: ELECSPEC16782-1.doc
Intercom System Digital Audio Intercom
Page 1 of 4

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782-1
Furnish service and maintenance of intercom system for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
PRODUCTS
2.1
INTERCOM SYSTEM - (Audio System)

A.
Provide install connect and test intercom system including all equipments,
wiring and all necessary ancillary accessories for complete system.
B.
The system shall have the following specifications.
2.1.1
Laser engraved Matrix keypad

Alphanumeric information display
LED system status indicators
Total call secrecy
Incorporates coded access function .
System valid for one or more panel.
Output for programming via PC
Main Panel
Modular designed main Panel should be compact, easy to be installed and
maintained. Dimensions should be adequate to permit installation where space is
limited. Electrical connections inside the panel should be easy and convenient to
make any maintenance or changing the service room name. It should be equipped
with:
Power Supply Unit
DIN rail or surface mounting, with terminal protection hoods.
Supplied with 240 Vac / 240Vac power module providing 12 /24 Vdc output.
2.1.2 Audio unit

Surface wall mounted unit supporting two keys for calling and receiving the main
unit.
The intercom unit shall be of professional quality with electronic call and optional
caretakers lodge call. The unit shall be White / Blue or Grey and shall have
extendible cord.
2.1.3
Wiring
Installation of the system is done with only 2 common wires.
2.2
RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURER
Page 2 of 4

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782-1
Refer To The Attached List of Recommended Manufacturers.
3
3.1
3.2
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
C.
Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and

ready for use.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
3.4
3.5
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Field inspection and testing will be performed.
B.
Perform operational test on completed installation to verify proper

operation.
C.
Replace equipment, components, and wiring to eliminate audible noise,

clicks, pops, or hum when system is in standby or operation.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A.
Make final connections to units.
B.
Perform field inspection and testing.
C.
Demonstrate system operation.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Provide systems demonstration and instructions.
B.
Employ manufacturer's field representative to demonstrate system

operation to designated Owner personnel.
Page 3 of 4

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782-1
C.
Conduct walking tour of Project and briefly describe function,

operation, and maintenance of each component.
D.
Use submitted operation and maintenance manual as reference during

demonstration and training.
END OF SECTION 11130 - 3
Page 4 of 4

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16783

SECTION - 16783
SOLAR WATER HEATER SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIRCONDITIONING ENGINEERS, INC. (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90003
Active Solar Heating Design Manual
ASHRAE 90336
Guidance for Preparing Active Solar Heating Systems

Operation and Maintenance Manuals
ASHRAE 90342
Active Solar Heating Systems Installation Manual
ASHRAE 93
Methods of Testing to Determine the Thermal

Performance of Solar Collectors
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C651
Solar Water Heater System
Disinfecting Water Mains
Page 1 of 12

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16783
FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH CORPORATION

(FM)
FM P7825 Approval Guide
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 70
National Electrical Codes
SOLAR RATING AND CERTIFICATION CORPORATION (SRCC)
SRCC OG-300-91
Operating Guidelines and Minimum Standards For

Certifying Solar Water Heating Systems
1.2 DEFINITIONS
The term "solar" for the purposes of this specification, covers systems that intercept solar
radiation and convert it to thermal energy. The thermal energy is collected by a heat transfer
fluid and sent to a thermal energy storage tank for use.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.3.1 Design Requirements
Design, furnish and install new solar water heating (SHW) systems for the heating of
domestic water. The solar water heating system offsets the use of natural gas, propane or
electricity by preheating water before the conventional domestic hot water system. System
types incorporating both freeze-protection and overheat protection are required.
Freeze
protection is not required if climate is non-freezing, but overheat protection required in all
systems. Supplied equipment must be rated and warranted to withstand and operate under
lowest-record-low and highest-record-high temperature for the location. It is often the intent
to use the system for educational purposes related to the benefits and use of renewable
energy, so appearance and quality are considerations in design decisions.
Solar collectors are to be mounted on the roof or on the ground as suitable for the type of
SHW system and needs and limitation of the building and site. System must be of a type
suitable to the climate of the site. For systems proposed not under passive control, control
each system by a simple differential temperature controller. Provide a separate solar water
heating system for each building unit designated. Each of the solar systems is to incorporate
the existing electric water heating system as its auxiliary subsystem. In the event that the
existing electric water heater is in need of repair or replacement, the contractor may propose
to repair or replace the electric water heater under the scope of this project.
Page 2 of 12

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16783
Include with each system, components that consist of a solar collector array, array support
structure, storage tank, interconnecting piping and fittings, tempering mixing valve, flushand-fill valves, pressure relief valves, and as required by the system type, any necessary
pumps, controls or heat exchangers, as well as all other accessories and equipment required
for the proper operation of the solar system.
Include with system all labor, supervision, equipment inside and outside the building, tools,
materials and incidentals necessary to design, procure, install checkout and place into
operation a complete solar water heating system ready for use for the building.
1.3.2 Performance Requirements

Solar water heating systems must be safe, reliable, require no operator intervention for
normal operation, be visually unobtrusive, and be designed and installed in accordance
with all applicable codes. Design and size the system so that solar energy supplies
approximately the percent of the annualized hot water demand (Required Solar
Fraction) specified in Table 1, below.
Table 1: Percent of annualized hot water demand to be met by solar hot water heating
system in each location covered in this solicitation:
Building
Avg. Main
Require Gallons per Hot Water
Water
Location d Solar
Day
Delivery
Temperature
Fraction Demand Temperature
(F)
Any additional information provided regarding daily demand calculations, patterns of

weekly or monthly variations in the load or descriptions of end uses of the hot water can
be found in Appendix A.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following.
1.4.1 Approval drawings and Data

1.4.1.1 Commercial Products Data with Performance Charts and Curves
Annotate descriptive data to show the specific model, type, and size of each item.
Page 3 of 12

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16783
1.4.1.2 Solar System Design

Submit calculations of solar system performance leading to the proposed design. Submit
reports resulting from the use of any design or performance simulation software used in the
design.
1.4.1.3 Statements
Prior to installation, submit data showing that the Contractor has successfully designed and
installed systems of the same type and design as specified herein and proposed by the
contractor.
1.4.1.4 Drawings
Provide drawings for each system type and size containing a system schematic diagram; a
collector layout and roof plan (or ground lay-out) noting reverse-return piping for the collector
array; a system elevation; a schedule of operation and installation instructions; and a schedule
of design information including collector length and width, recommended collector flow rate
and pressure drop at that flow rate, number of collectors, number of collectors to be grouped
per bank, gross area and net aperture area of collectors, collector fluid volume, collector filled
weight, weight of support structure, and tilt angle of collectors from horizontal. Include in the
drawings, complete wiring and schematic diagrams, proposed pipe pitch and any other details
required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a
unit. Show proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment
relationship to other parts of the work, including clearances for maintenance and operation.
Provide a detail of the joint connection between the solar collector mounting brackets and the
roof membrane.
1.4.2 Final Drawings and Data

1.4.2.1 Instructions
Submit proposed diagrams, instructions, and other sheets, including a system schematic,
wiring and control diagrams, and a complete layout of the entire system for each system type
to be installed. Include with the instructions, in typed form, condensed operating instructions
explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal
safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system, methods of
balancing and testing flow in the system, and methods of testing for control failure and proper
system operation.
Submit collector array structural design information sealed by a
professional engineer.
1.4.2.2 Operating and Maintenance Manuals

Page 4 of 12

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16783
Submit manuals that detail the step-by-step procedures required for system filling, start-up,
operation, and shutdown. Include in the manuals the manufacturer's name, model number,
service manual, parts list, and brief descriptions of all equipment and their basic operating
features. List routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, recommended
spare parts, troubleshooting guide, piping and equipment layout, balanced fluid flow rates, and
simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed.
1.4.2.3 Field Test Reports

Submit reports of piping hydraulic pressure test.
Submit reports of water portability test.
Submit results of system performance testing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 Standard or Pre-approved Products
Furnish materials and equipment that are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the manufacture of such products and which essentially duplicate items that have
been in satisfactory use for at least 6 months prior to bid opening.
2.1.2 Nameplates
Secure to each major item of equipment the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model
or serial number, and catalogue number on a plate.
2.2 PIPING SYSTEM

Provide a piping system complete with pipe, pipe fittings, valves, strainers, expansion loops,
pipe hangers, inserts, supports, anchors, guides, sleeves, and accessories with this specification
and the drawings. Pipe shall be designed to observe limits on flow velocity, pressure drop, and
gauge pressure associated with the pipe type and characteristics.
Provide, install and test the piping. Provide piping flow rates below 5 feet per second. Piping
shall be Type L or Type M copper tubing, ASTM B-88, with 95-5 tin-antimony soldered joints.
If cold water piping supplying the SWH system is of another type, such as PVC, it shall be
Page 5 of 12

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16783
replaced within 10 feet of the SWH system with copper to avoid bulging and rupture due to
proximity to the higher temperatures of the solar system.
2.2.1 Pipe Insulation
Page 6 of 12

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782.
Furnish interior pipe insulation and coverings such as Armaflex, Insul-Tube, Rubatex, or
approved equivalent.
Provide outside array piping insulation with a capability of
withstanding 250 degrees F, except that piping insulation within 1.5 feet of collector
connections shall be capable of withstanding 400 degrees F. Protect outside piping insulation
from water damage and ultraviolet degradation with a suitable outer coating manufactured
for this purpose (aluminum, sunlight resistant PVC or approved equal).
2.2.2 Calibrating Balancing Valves (for multiple collector banks)

If systems are proposed with multiple collector banks, provide calibrated balancing valves
suitable for 125 psig and 250 degrees F service. Furnish calibrated balancing valves with
bronze body/brass ball construction with seat rings compatible with system fluid and
differential readout ports across valve seat area. Provide readout ports fitted with internal
insert of compatible material and check valve. Provide calibrated balancing valves with a
memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service and reopened to set point without
disturbing balance position, and with a calibrated nameplate to assure specific valve settings.
Provide calibrated balancing valves and ball valves at the outlet of each collector bank. The
balancing valves are specified to allow the array to be flow balanced. The ball valves are
required to enable the array to be disconnected for maintenance or repair. This requirement
for balancing valves is not applicable to systems of only one collector bank, where balance of
flow is not an issue.
2.2.3 Pressure Gauges

Provide pressure gauges with throttling type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and
shutoff valve. Furnish a 3-1/2 inch minimum dial size.
2.2.4 Thermometers
Supply thermometers with wells and separable bronze sockets.
2.2.5 Pipe Hangers and Supports

Support and hang piping so that the weight of the piping is not supported by drywall, siding,
or other building members not designed to bear load. Support piping so that thermal
expansion and contraction of pipe lengths is accommodated.
2.2.6 Valves
Provide valves compatible with the piping. Ball valves shall be used for shutoff, with full
port, bronze body, bronze ball and teflon seat. Bronze hose-end gate valves shall be used for
draining low points of piping.
2.3 COLLECTOR SUBSYSTEM

2.3.1 Solar Collector Construction
The type of solar collector proposed shall be compatible with the proposed system type.
Collectors shall be selected based on optimal cost and performance.
Depending on the
temperature requirements of the system, collector may be unglazed (low temperature), single
or double glazed (mid temperature), or evacuated tube (high temperature) with selective or
painted absorber surfaces.
Furnish collectors of weather-tight construction and with an
aluminium casing. Provide aluminium or stainless steel mounting brackets and hinges.
Furnish stainless steel assembly hardware including all bolts, washers, and nuts. Install
collectors such that tubes on the absorber plate drain by gravity. Provide cover glazing
Page 7 of 12

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782.
completely replaceable from the front of the collector without disturbing the piping or
adjacent collectors.
2.3.2 Collector Warranty

Provide a minimum 10-year warranty against the following: failure of manifold or riser
tubing, joints or fittings; degradation of absorber plate selective surface; rusting or
discoloration of collector hardware; and embitterment of header manifold seals. Include with
the warranty full repair or replacement of defective materials or equipment.
2.3.3 Solar Collector Performance

Plot thermal performance on the thermal efficiency curve in accordance with ASHRAE 93
showing the product of glazing tranmittance and plate aborptivity and also the thermal loss
coefficient (btu/hr/F) of the solar collector. Show manufacturer's recommended volumetric
flow rate and the design pressure drop at the recommended flow rate. Indicate the
manufacturer's recommendations for the number of collectors to be joined per bank while
providing for balanced flow and for thermal expansion considerations.
2.4 SOLAR COLLECTOR ARRAY

2.4.1 Net Absorber Area and Array Layout
Collector array shall be oriented so that all collectors face the same direction. Space
collectors arranged in multiple rows so that no shading from other collectors is evident
between 1000 hours and 1400 hours solar time on December 21. Collectors should be southfacing and a tilt equal to the local latitude, but other orientations may be considered for
approval. Indicate minimum spacing between rows.
2.4.2 Piping
Connect interconnecting array piping between solar collectors, in a reverse-return
configuration with approximately equal pipe length for any possible flow path. Indicate flow
rate through the collector array. Provide each collector bank isolated by valves, with a
pressure relief valve and with the capability of being drained. Locate manually operated air
vents at system high points, and pitch array piping a minimum of 0.25 inch per foot so that
piping can be drained by gravity. Supply calibrated balancing valves at the outlet of each
collector bank as indicated.
2.4.3 Supports for Solar Collector Array

Provide support structure for the collector array of aluminium, stainless steel, or other
corrosion-resistant approved material. Furnish a support structure which secures the
collector array at the proper tilt angle with respect to horizontal and orientation with respect
to true south. Consideration should be made to mounting collectors parallel to the pitched
roofs. The collector tilt angle may vary by +/- 25 degrees, and the azimuthal angle may vary
by +/-45% from the optimal tilt and azimuth. Provide a support structure that will withstand
the static weight of filled collectors and piping, wind, seismic, and other anticipated loads
without damage. For heavy systems, such as integral storage collectors, provide structural
Page 8 of 12

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782.
reinforcement for the roof across at least four rafters and provide verification that the
structural modifications proposed are satisfactory. Provide a support structure which allows
access to all equipment for maintenance, repair, and replacement. Neoprene or EPDM
washers shall separate all dissimilar metals. Depending on system type, supports for solar
array could terminate in ballast blocks to avoid roof penetrations.
2.5 SOLAR PREHEAT STORAGE TANK

Provide cylindrical thermal energy storage solar preheat tank with a storage capacity of at
least 1.5 gallons per square foot of collector area. Insulate each tank with fibreglass or foam
with a loss coefficient of not more than 0.5 W/m2C. Protect the insulation by a PVC or steel
jacket. Provide a tank rated at 100 lb/in2 at 190 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide the interior of
each tank with glass lining for potable service.
2.6 TRANSPORT SUBSYSTEM

2.6.1 Heat Exchanger (if required by system design)
For system designs requiring a heat exchanger, provide a minimum design pressure rating of
100 psi. Construct heat exchanger of 316 stainless steel, titanium, copper-nickel, or brass.
Furnish heat exchanger with a capability of withstanding temperatures of at least 240 degrees
F. Tube-in-tube copper side-arm heat exchangers are acceptable for appropriate system
types.
2.6.2 Pumps (for active systems)

For active solar system designs requiring a pump, provide electrically-driven, single-stage,
centrifugal type circulating pumps such as those manufactured by Grundfos, Hartel, March,
Taco or approved equivalent. Support pumps on a concrete foundation or mounting intended
for the purpose, or by the piping on which installed if appropriate to the size. Construct the
pump shaft of corrosion resistant alloy steel with a mechanical seal. Provide stainless steel
impellers and casings of bronze. Control motors with switches that can be activated by either
the differential temperature controller or by manual override (Hand-Off-Automatic). Pumps
shall be installed with isolation valves so the pump can be serviced without draining the
system.
2.6.3 Heat Transfer Fluid

Heat transfer fluid shall be compatible with all materials in the system. The nature and
amount of heat transfer fluid will depend on the type of system proposed and the freeze
conditions encountered at the site. Any anti-freeze, conditioners or corrosion inhibitors
added to the heat transfer fluid must be non-toxic and intended for use in potable water
systems.
2.7 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SUBSYSTEM

2.7.1 Differential Temperature Control Equipment (if required)
If the system design includes controls, furnish the differential temperature control equipment
as a system from a single manufacturer. Furnish a solid-state electronic type controller
complete with an integral transformer to supply low voltage. Controller accuracy shall be
plus or minus 1 degree F. Supply controllers that are compatible with the thermistor
temperature sensors. Provide differential controls with direct digital temperature readings of
all temperatures sensed. Supply controls with a visual indicator when pumps are energized.
Page 9 of 12

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782.
Provide a controller that will identify open and short circuits on both the solar collector
temperature sensor circuit and the storage tank sensor circuit.
2.7.2 Thermistor Temperature Sensors (if required)

Provide temperature sensors that are compatible with the differential temperature controller,
with an accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent at 77 degrees F. Supply sensors that have passed
an accelerated life test conducted by subjecting thermistor assemblies to a constant
temperature of 400 degrees F or greater for a period of 1000 hours minimum with an
accuracy of within plus or minus 1 percent as stated above. Furnish hermetically sealed type
thermistors. Provide immersion wells or watertight threaded fittings for temperature sensors.
Temperature sensors shall be mechanically attached to the surface they are measuring and
wire to the sensor must be mechanically attached and protected along its length.
2.7.3 Tempering Valve (VERY IMPORTANT)

All systems installed under this procurement action MUST have a tempering or mixing valve
to limit the temperature of the hot water supplied to the plumbing fixtures. The tempering
valve is to be located downstream of the electric water heater and is to be set to a temperature
suitable for the application.
2.8 ELECTRICAL WORK

If pumps are required in the system design, provide electric motor-driven equipment
complete with motor, motor starters, and controls. Provide electrical equipment and wiring
in accordance with NFPA 70. Furnish motor starters complete with thermal overload
protection and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified. Provide each
motor of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified capacity without exceeding
the nameplate rating of the motor.
2.9 PAINTING AND FINISHING

Furnish equipment and component items, with the factory applied manufacturer's standard
finish.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Do not hang piping
from sheet rocked or suspended ceilings. Keep interior and ends of new piping thoroughly
cleaned of foreign matter. Keep piping systems clean during installation by means of plugs
or other approved methods. Discharge storage tank pressure and temperature relief valves
into floor drains. Horizontal runs should be flat and vertical runs should be plumb. Install
any multiple pipes in an order which does not require them to cross or interfere with each
other or other building systems. Provide air vents with threaded plugs or caps. Install
control and sensor wiring in conduit.
3.1.1 System Flushing and Disinfection

Flush and disinfect the piping system.
Page 10 of 12

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782.
3.1.2 Collector Subsystem

3.1.2.1 Collector Array
Install solar collector array at the proper tilt angle, orientation, and elevation above roof.
Install the solar collectors with the ability to be removed for maintenance, repair, or
replacement.
3.1.2.2 Array Piping

Install collector array piping in a reverse-return configuration so that path lengths of collector
supply and return are of approximately equal length. Install air vents in the high points of the
collector array piping. Provide proper pitch for draining of collector array.
3.1.2.3 Array Support

Install array support in accordance with the recommendations of the collector manufacturer.
3.1.2.4 Pipe Expansion

Provide for the expansion and contraction of supply and return piping with changes in the
direction of the run of pipe or by expansion loops. Do not use expansion joints in the system
piping.
3.1.2.5 Valves
Install ball valves at the inlet and outlet of each bank of manifold collectors. Install
calibrated balancing valves at the outlet of each collector bank and mark final settings on
each valve. Install a union adjacent to each ball valve. Balance flow through the collector
piping with at least one balancing valve left in the open position. Locate tempering mixing
valve downstream of auxiliary water heater to control hot water delivery temperature.
3.1.2.6 Roof Penetrations

All roof penetrations shall be made permanently waterproof. Copper or other approved
flashing shall be used. Contractor shall provide a five year warranty on materials and labor,
including consequential damages, for any roof leaks due to or arising out of the solar water
heating system installation.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING

3.2.1 Instructions
Provide instructions for each system type. Include in these instructions a system schematic,
and wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the solar system. Prepare
condensed operating instructions explaining preventative maintenance procedures, balanced
flow rates, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures for
safely starting and stopping the system, in typed form, framed as specified above, and posted
beside the diagrams. Post the framed instructions before acceptance testing of each system.
3.2.2 Acceptance Testing and Final Inspection

Maintain a written record of the results of all acceptance tests, to be submitted in booklet
form. Provide the following tests:
Page 11 of 12

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/SPEC.16782.
3.2.3 Hydrostatic Test

Hydrostatically test each system. Isolate valving and instrumentation not suitable for the
intended test pressure.
3.2.4 Operational Test

Operationally test each system over a period of 48 consecutive hours with sufficient solar
insulations to cause activation of the solar energy system during daylight hours.
3.2.5 Overall System Operations

Demonstrate each solar energy system will operate properly while unattended for a period of
at least 72 hours. As required by system design, demonstrate the system controller will start
the pumps after being warmed by the sun, and that it will properly shut down during cloudy
weather or in the evening over a minimum of three complete cycles. It is permissible to
manipulate the temperature of the storage tank by the introduction of cold water.
3.2.6 Temperature Sensor Diagnostics

As required by system design, demonstrate the controller will correctly identify open and
short circuits on both the solar collector temperature sensor circuit and the storage tank
sensor circuit.
3.3 FIELD TRAINING

Provide a field training course for operating and maintenance staff members after the system
are functionally complete. Include in the training a discussion of the system design and
layout and demonstrate routine operation, maintenance and troubleshooting procedures.
End of Section
Page 12 of 12

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/VEDOR LISTS
LIST OF ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS
File: ELEC/VENDOR LIST.doc
Page 1 of 6

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/VEDOR LISTS
Page 2 of 6

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/VEDOR LISTS
Page 3 of 6

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/VEDOR LISTS
Page 4 of 6

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/VEDOR LISTS
Page 5 of 6

SPECIFICATIONS
ELEC/VEDOR LISTS
Page 6 of 6
CHC
PROJECT

PROPOSED BUILDING (G+4+R )
JVC11BBMRA005 681-1358
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared by
April, 2014

ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
PROPOSEDBUILDING(G+4+R)
JVC11BBMRA0056811358
Section
Description
No.
DIVISION 15MECHANICAL
15050 BASICMECHANICAL MATERIALS ANDMETHODS

150501 PACKAGE AIRUNIT
150502 FRESHAIRHANDLING UNITS&HEATREC0VERY
15060 HANGERS ANDSUPPORTS
15070 VENTILATING FANS
15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15081 DUCTINSULATION
15083 PIPEINSULATION
15100 VALVES
15122 METERSANDGAGES
15170 MOTORS
15241 MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS
15420 DRAINAGE ANDVENTPIPING
15530 REFRIGERANT PIPING
15738 SPLITSYSTEM AIRCONDITIONINGUNITS
15815 METALDUCTS
15820 DUCTACCESSORIES
15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, ANDGRILLES
15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, ANDBALANCING
Mechanical Specifications
Page|1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15050BASICMECHANICAL MATERIALS ANDMETHODS
PART1GENERAL
1.1RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditionsof Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, applytothisSection.
1.2SUMMARY
A.ThisSection includes thefollowing basic mechanical materials andmethods tocomplement other

Division 15Sections.
1. Pipingmaterials andinstallation instructions common tomostpipingsystems.

2. Concrete baseconstruction requirements.
3. Escutcheons.
4. Dielectric fittings.
5. Flexibleconnectors.
6. Mechanical sleeveseals.
7. Equipment nameplate datarequirements.
8. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems andequipment isspecified inDivision 15
Section"Mechanical Identification."
9. Nonshrinkgroutforequipment installations.
10.Fieldfabricated metalequipment supports.
11.Installation requirements common toequipment specification sections.
12.Cutting andpatching.
13.Touchup painting andfinishing.
B. Pipeandpipefittingmaterials arespecified inDivision 15pipingsystemSections.
1.3DEFINITIONS
A.
FinishedSpaces: Spaces other than mechanicaland electricalequipmentrooms, furred spaces,

pipeandductshafts,unheated spacesimmediately belowroof,spacesaboveceilings,
unexcavated spaces,crawlspaces, andtunnels.
B.
Exposed,InteriorInstallations: Exposedtoviewindoors.Examples includefinishedoccupied

spacesandmechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures andweather conditions. Examples includerooftop locations.
D.
Concealed,InteriorInstallations:Concealedfrom view and protectedfrom physicalcontactby

building occupants. Examples include aboveceilings andinductshafts.
Pa g e | 1
Section 15050BasicMechanical Materials andMethods
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
E.
Concealed,ExteriorInstallations: Concealedfrom view and protectedfrom weatherconditions

and physical contact by building occupants,but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations withinunheated shelters.
F. Thefollowing areindustry abbreviations forplasticmaterials:
1. ABS:Acrylonitrilebutadienestyreneplastic.
2. CPVC:Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. UPVC: Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride plastic.
4. PVC:Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G.Thefollowing areindustry abbreviations forrubbermaterials:
1. CR:Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

2. EPDM:Ethylene propylene dieneterpolymer rubber.
1.4STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
In additionto therequirements shownor specified,complywiththelatestcurrentapplicable

standards, specifications orcodespublished bythefollowing organizations:
AMCAAirMoving andConditioning Association

ANSI American National Standards Institute
ARIAirConditioning andRefrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American SocietyofHeating, Refrigeration andAirConditioning Engineers
ASME American SocietyofMechanical Engineers
ASPEAmerican SocietyofPlumbing Engineers
ASTM American SocietyforTesting andMaterials
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American WaterWorksAssociation
BSBritishStandards
DIN Deutsches Institut furNormalisierung
FM Factory Mutual
IBR Institute ofBoilerandRadiator Manufacturers
ISO International Standardization Organization
MSS
Manufacturers StandardizationSocietyoftheValveandFittings Industry, Inc.
NBS
National Bureau ofStandards
NEMANational Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NFPA National FireProtection Association
OSHAOccupational SafetyandHealthAdministration
SMACNASheetMetalandAirConditioning Contractor's
UBC Uniform Building Code.
UL Underwriters' Laboratories Inc.
1.5DESIGNCONDITIONS
A.Climatic Conditions: Theoutdoor designconditions tobeadopted fortheprojectareasfollows: .
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1. Climatic Conditions:
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
a.
b.
c.
2.
B.
Latitude: 25,25N
Longitude: 55,33E.
Altitude: 5m.
Outside Temperatures:
a.
DryBulb:46deg.C.
b.
WetBulb:29deg.C.
Indoor Design Conditions:Indoor comfort conditionsare based on recommendationsof ASHRAE

Standard 55.
1. Thefollowing tablerepresents theindoordesignconditions, whichshallbefollowed:
Area Summer Winter
DBDeg.C%RH
DBDeg.C%RH
+/
5%
Offices
23
50
22
Receptions
23
50
22
Lounges
23
50
22
UPSrooms, Telephone, IT
23
50
23
Circulation Areas
23
50
24
Computer Room/PABX
22
50
22
Mechanical rooms
26
Rooms
1.6SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and
identification materials anddevices.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail fabricationand installationfor metal supportsand anchoragefor

mechanical materials andequipment.
C. Coordination Drawings: Foraccesspanelanddoorlocations.
D.
Coordination Drawings:Detailmajorelements,components, andsystemsof mechanical

equipment andmaterials inrelationship withothersystems, installations, andbuilding
components. Showspacerequirements forinstallation andaccess.Indicateif sequenceand
coordination ofinstallations areimportant toefficient flowoftheWork.Includethefollowing:
1. Planned pipinglayout,including valveandspecialty locations andvalvestem movement.

2. Clearances forinstalling andmaintaining insulation.
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories,and specialties, including

spacefordisassembly required forperiodic maintenance.
4. Equipment andaccessory serviceconnections andsupport details.
5. Exterior wallandfoundation penetrations.
6. Firerated wallandfloorpenetrations.
7. Sizesandlocation ofrequired concrete padsandbases.
8.
Scheduling, sequencing, movement, andpositioning oflarge equipment into building during
construction.
9.
Floor plans, elevations, anddetails toindicate penetrations infloors, walls, and ceilings and
theirrelationship tootherpenetrations andinstallations.
10.Reflected ceiling planstocoordinate andintegrate installation ofairoutlets andinlets, light
fixtures,communication systemcomponents, sprinklers, ceilingaccesspanelsandother
ceilingmounted items.
11.Mechanical equipment rooms.
12.Hangers, inserts, supports, andbracing.
13.Pipesleeves.
3.
E.
Samples: Ofcolor, lettering style,andothergraphic representation required foreach

identification material anddevice.
F.
Maintenance DataandOperating Instructions: Providea listingof recommended replacement

parts forkeeping instock supply, including sources ofsupply, for equipment. Include inthelisting
belts for equipment: Belt manufacturer, model number, size and style, and distinguished whether
ofmultiple beltsets.
G.Welding Certificates: Copiesofcertificates forweldingprocedures andoperators.
H.
Where US material or reference standards are specified or indicated, compliancewith the

equivalent BritishStandard (BS)isacceptable.
1.7QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ComplywithASMEA13.1for letteringsize,lengthof colorfield,colors,andviewinganglesof

identification devices.
B.
Equipment Selection:Equipment ofhigherelectricalcharacteristics, physicaldimensions,

capacities, andratingsmaybefurnishedat noadditionalcostto theContract,providedsuch
proposedequipmentis approvedin writingand connectingmechanicaland electricalservices,
circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, equipment spaces, andthelikeareincreased accordingly.
Ifminimum energyratingsorefficiencies ofequipment arespecified, equipment mustmeet
designandcommissioning requirements.
C. Equipment Vibration Tolerance:
1.
The allowable vibration tolerance is specified in Division 15, Mechanical Vibration Controls
and Seismic Restraints. Equipment specifications require factory balancing ofequipment to
thistolerance.
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
2.
Afterair balanceworkis completedand permanentdrivesheavesare in place,perform

field mechanicalbalancingand adjustmentsrequired to meet the specified vibration
tolerance.
D.Products Criteria:
1.
Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organizationthat maintains a

complete inventory ofrepairpartsandislocatedreasonably closetothesite.
2.
Multiple Units: When 2 or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class
arerequired, theseunitsshallbeproducts ofonemanufacturer.
3.
Assembled Units: Manufacturers ofequipment assemblies, which usecomponents made by
others,assumecomplete responsibility forthefinalassembled product.
4. Nameplates: Nameplatebearingmanufacturer's nameor identifiable trademarkshallbe
securely affixed inaconspicuous place onequipment, orname ortrademark castintegrally
withequipment, stamped orotherwise permanently marked oneachitemofequipment.
5. Asbestos products orequipment ormaterials containing asbestos shallnotbeused.
E.
Manufacturer's Recommendations: Whereinstallation procedures oranypartthereofare

requiredto bein accordance withtherecommendations of themanufacturer of thematerial
beinginstalled, printed copiesoftheserecommendationsshallbefurnished totheResident
Engineerpriorto installation. Installationof the itemwill not be allowedto proceeduntil the
recommendationsarereceived. Failure tofurnish these recommendationscanbecause for
rejection ofthematerial.
F. Providecopies of approvedequipmentsubmittalsto the Testing,Adjustingand Balancing

Subcontractor.
1.8WELDING
A.TheContractor isentirely responsible forthequalityofthewelding andshall:
1.
Conduct tests ofthe welding procedures used byhis organization, determine the suitability
of the proceduresused, determine that the welds made will meet the required tests, and
alsodeterminethatthe weldingoperatorshavetheabilityto makesoundweldsunder
standard conditions.
2. ComplywithASMEB31.1andAWSB2.1.
3.
Perform allwelding operations required forconstruction andinstallation ofthepiping
systems.
B.
Qualification of Welders:Rulesof procedurefor qualification of all weldersandgeneral

requirements forfusion welding shallconform withtheapplicable portions ofASMEB31.1,
Welding: Qualify processesand operatorsaccordingto ASME Boiler and PressureVessel Code:
SectionIX,"WeldingandBrazingQualifications, andAWSB2.1,and/ or,asapprovedbythe
Qualifications."
C.
Examining Welder: Examine each welder at job site, in the presence of the Resident Engineer, to
determine theability ofthewelder tomeet thequalifications required. Testwelders forpiping for
all positions, including welds with the axis horizontal (not rolled) and with the axis vertical. Each
Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
weldershallbeallowed toweldonlyintheposition inwhichhehasqualified andshallberequired

toidentify hisweldswithhisspecific codemarking signifying hisnameandnumber assigned.
D.
ExaminationResults: Provide the Resident Engineer with a list of names and correspondingcode
markings. Retest welders who fail to meet the prescribed welding qualifications.Disqualify
welders, whofailthesecondtest,forworkontheproject.
E. Beveling:Field bevels and shop bevels shall be done by mechanicalmeans or by flame cutting.
Where beveling isdonebyflamecutting, surfaces shallbethoroughly cleaned ofscaleand
oxidation justpriortowelding. Conform tospecified standards.
F. Alignment:Utilize split welding rings or approved alternate method for joints on all pipes above
50 mm to assure proper alignment,complete weld penetration,and preventionof weld spatter
reaching theinteriorofthepipe.
G.
Erection: Piping shall not besplit, bent, flattened, orotherwise damaged either before, during, or
afterinstallation.
H.
Defective Welds:Replaceandreinspect defective welds.Repairing defective weldsbyadding

weldmaterialoverthedefectorbypeening willnotbepermitted. Welders responsible for
defective weldsmustberequalified.
I.
Electrodes:Electrodesshallbe storedin a dry heatedarea,andbe keptfree of moistureand

dampness during thefabrication operations. Discard electrodes thathavelostpartoftheir
coating.
1.9DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANDHANDLING
A.
Theequipment supplied shallbepacked forprotection against damage during handling, transport,

warehousing and installation. The efficiency of the packing shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.The Contractorshall repair or replace any damageditems, at no additionalcost, as
instructed by the Engineer even after delivery of the equipment,if it is proven that the damage
wascausedbypacking, storage, orhandling deficiencies.
B.
Deliverpipesandtubeswithfactoryapplied endcaps.Maintain endcapsthrough shipping,

storage, andhandlingtopreventpipeenddamageandprevententrance of dirt,debris,and
moisture.
C.
Protectstoredpipesand tubesfrommoistureanddirt. Elevateabovegrade. Do not exceed

structural capacity offloor,ifstoredinside.
D.Protectflanges, fittings, andpipingspecialties frommoisture anddirt.
E. Storeplasticpipesprotected fromdirectsunlight. Support toprevent saggingandbending.
1.10EQUENCING ANDSCHEDULING
F. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation withothertradesandbuilding components.

Pa g e | 7
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
G.
Arrange forpipespaces, chases, slots,andopenings inbuilding structure duringprogress of

construction toallowformechanical installations.
H.
Coordinate installation ofrequired supporting devices and setsleeves inpouredinplace concrete

andotherstructural components, astheyareconstructed.
I.
Sequence, coordinate, andintegrate installations ofmechanical materials andequipment for

efficient flowoftheWork. Coordinate installation oflargeequipment requiring positioning before
closinginbuilding.
J.
Coordinateconnectionof mechanicalsystemswith exteriorundergroundand overheadutilities

and services.Comply with requirementsof governing regulations, franchised service companies,
andcontrolling agencies.
K.
Coordinate requirements for accesspanelsand doorsif mechanical itemsrequiringaccessare

concealedbehind finishedsurfaces. Access panels and doors are specifiedin Division 8 Section
"Access DoorsandFrames."
L.
Coordinate installation ofidentifying devices after completing covering andpainting, ifdevices are
applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1PIPEANDPIPEFITTINGS
A.Refertoindividual Division 15pipingSections forpipeandfittingmaterials andjoiningmethods.

B. PipeThreads: ASMEB1.20.1orBritishStandard forfactorythreaded pipeandpipefittings.
2.2JOINING MATERIALS
A.Refertoindividual Division 15pipingSections forspecialjoiningmaterials notlistedbelow.
B.
PipeFlange GasketMaterials: Suitable forchemical andthermalconditions ofpipingsystem

contents.
1.
ASMEB16.21,nonmetallic, flat,asbestosfree, 3.2mmmaximum thickness, unless

thickness orspecific material isindicated.
a. FullFace Type:Forflatface, Class125,castiron andcastbronze flanges.

b. NarrowFace Type:Forraisedface, Class250,castiron andsteelflanges.
2.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mmthick, unless otherwiseindicated;and fullface or
ringtype,unlessotherwise indicated.
C.
Flange: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated; Bolts, Nuts and washers, stainless
steelforpotable/domesticwaterpiping,galvanized forotherpipingsystems.
Pa g e | 8
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
D.
Plastic, PipeFlangeGasket, Bolts, and Nuts:Type and material recommendedby piping system
manufacturer, unlessotherwise indicated.
E.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWSD10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness andchemical analysisofsteelpipebeingwelded.
F. SolventCements: Manufacturer's standard solventcements forthefollowing:
1. CPVCPiping: ASTMF493.
2. PVCPiping: ASTMD2564.Includeprimeraccording toASTMF656
G.
Flanged, DuctileIron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, andNuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbonsteel bolts
andnuts.
2.3DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent
galvanic actionandstopcorrosion.
B.
Description:Combination ofcopper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weldneck end
typesandmatching pipingsystemmaterials.
C. Insulating Material: Suitable forsystem fluid,pressure, andtemperature.
D.Dielectric Unions: Factoryfabricated,unionassembly, for1725kPaminimum working pressure at

82deg.C.
E.
DielectricFlanges:Factoryfabricated, companionflange assembly,for1035or 2070kPa

minimum working pressure asrequired tosuitsystempressures.
F.
DielectricFlange InsulationKits: Fieldassembled, companionflange assembly,fullfaceor ring

type.Componentsinclude neopreneor phenolicgasket, phenolicor polyethylenebolt sleeves,
phenolic washers, andsteelbacking washers.
1.
Provide separate companionflanges and steel bolts and nuts for 1035 or 2070 kPa
minimum working pressure asrequired tosuitsystempressures.
G.Dielectric Couplings:Galvanizedsteelcoupling with inert and noncorrosive,thermoplasticlining;

threaded ends;and2070kPaminimum working pressure at107deg.C.
H.DielectricNipples: Electroplatedsteel nipplewith inert and noncorrosive,thermoplasticlining;

plain,threaded, orgrooved ends;and2070kPaminimum working pressure at107deg.C.
Pa g e | 9
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
2.4FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
General: Fabricatedfrom materialssuitablefor systemfluid and that will provideflexible pipe

connections.Include 860 kPa minimum workingpressurerating, unless higher working pressure
isindicated, andendsaccording tothefollowing:
1. DN50andSmaller: Threaded.
2. DN65andLarger: Flanged
B.
StainlessSteelHose/SteelPipe, Flexible Connectors:Corrugated, stainlesssteel, inner tubing

covered withstainlesssteel wirebraid.Include steelnipplesorflanges, weldedtohose.
C.
StainlessSteelHose/StainlessSteel Pipe, FlexibleConnectors:Corrugated, stainlesssteel, inner

tubing covered withstainlesssteel wirebraid. Include stainlesssteel nipples orflanges, welded to
hose.
D.
Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomerrubber construction,with multiple plies of

NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulicpresses. Include 860 kPaminimumworkingpressure
ratingat104deg.C.Unitsmaybestraight orelbowtype,unlessotherwise indicated.
2.5MECHANICAL SLEEVESEALS
A.
Description:Modulardesign,with interlockingrubberlinks shapedto continuously fill annular

spacebetween pipeandsleeve. Includeconnecting boltsandpressure plates.
2.6PIPINGSPECIALTIES
A.Sleeves: Thefollowing materials areforwall,floor,slab,androofpenetrations:
1.
SteelSheetMetal: 0.6mmminimum thickness, galvanized, roundtubeclosed withwelded

longitudinal joint.
2. SteelPipe:ASTMA53,TypeE,GradeA,Schedule 40,galvanized, plainends.
3.
StackSleeveFittings: Manufactured, castiron sleeve withintegral clamping flange. Include
clamping ringandboltsandnutsformembrane flashing.
a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ringwithsetscrews.
B.
Escutcheons:Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deeppattern type ifrequired to

concealprotruding fittingsandsleeves.
1. ID:Closely fitaroundpipe,tube,andinsulation ofinsulated piping.

2. OD:Completely coveropening.
3. CastBrass:Onepiece,withsetscrewandpolished chromeplated finish.
4.
CastBrass: Splitcasting, withconcealed hinge,setscrewandpolished chromeplated
finish.
5. Stamped Steel:Onepiece,withsetscrewandchromeplated finish.
6. Stamped Steel:Onepiece,withspringclipsandchromeplated finish.
7. Stamped Steel:Splitplate,withconcealed hinge,setscrew,andchromeplated finish.
8. Stamped Steel:Splitplate,withconcealed hinge,springclips,andchromeplated finish.
Pa g e | 10
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
9. CastIron FloorPlate:Onepiece casting.
C. Screws:ProvideStainless Steelscrews foroutdoor andwetapplications
2.7GROUT
A.Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout:ASTMC1107,GradeB.
1.
Characteristics: Posthardening, volumeadjusting, dry, hydrauliccement grout,

nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2. DesignMix:34.5MPa,28daycompressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed andfactorypackaged.
PART3EXECUTION
3.1PIPINGSYSTEMS COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.General: Install piping as describedbelow, unless piping Sectionsspecify otherwise. Individual

Division 15pipingSections specify uniquepipinginstallation requirements.
B.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics,and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement ofpiping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to
sizepipeandcalculate frictionloss,expansion, pumpsizing,andotherdesignconsiderations.
Installpipingasindicated, unlessdeviations tolayoutareapproved onCoordination Drawings.
C. Installpipingatindicated slope.
D.Installcomponents withpressure ratingequaltoorgreaterthansystemoperating pressure.
E.
Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service
areas.
F. Installpipingfreeofsagsandbends.
G.
Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls.Diagonal
runsareprohibited, unlessotherwise indicated.
H.
Installpipingtightto slabs,beams,joists,columns,walls,and otherbuildingelements.Allow

sufficient spaceaboveremovable ceilingpanelstoallowforceilingpanelremoval.
I.
Installpipingtoallowapplication ofinsulation plus25mmclearance around insulation.
J.
Locategroupsofpipesparalleltoeachother,spacedtopermitvalveservicing.
K. Installfittingsforchanges indirection andbranchconnections.
L.Installcouplings according tomanufacturer's writteninstructions.

Pa g e | 11
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
M.
Install pipe escutcheonsfor pipe penetrationsof concreteand masonrywalls, wall board

partitions, andsuspended ceilings according tothefollowing:
1.
ChromePlatedPiping:Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chromeplated
finish.Usesplitcasting escutcheons ifrequired, forexisting piping.
2. Uninsulated PipingWallEscutcheons: Castbrassorstamped steel,withsetscrew.
3. Uninsulated PipingFloorPlatesinUtilityAreas:Castiron floorplates.
4.
Insulated Piping: Castbrassorstamped steel;withconcealed hinge, spring clips,and
chromeplated finish.
5. PipinginUtilityAreas:Castbrassorstamped steel,withsetscrew orspringclips.
N.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and roof
slabs.
O.
Installsleevesfor pipes passingthroughconcreteand masonrywalls, gypsumboard partitions,

andconcrete floorandroofslabs.
1. Cutsleevestolengthformounting flushwithbothsurfaces.
a.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed infloors ofmechanical equipment areas orother

wetareas50mmabove finished floorlevel. Extend sleeve fittings below floorslabas
required tosecureclamping ringifringisspecified.
2. Buildsleeves intonewwallsandslabsasworkprogresses.
3.
Install sleeves large enough to provide 6mm annular clear space between sleeve and pipe
orpipeinsulation. Usethefollowing sleevematerials:
a. SteelPipeSleeves: Forpipessmaller thanDN150.

b.
Steel, SheetMetal Sleeves:For pipes DN150 and larger, penetrating gypsumboard
partitions.
c. Stack SleeveFittings: For pipespenetratingfloorswith membranewaterproofing.
Secureflashing between clamping flanges. Installsectionofsoilpipetoextend
sleeve to 50mm above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing andTrim"forflashing.
1)Sealspaceoutsideofsleevefittingswithnonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
4.
Except for undergroundwall penetrations,seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Refer toDivision 7Section "Joint Sealants"
formaterials.
5. UseTypeS,GradeNS,Class25,UseO,neutralcuring silicone sealant, unlessotherwise
indicated.
P.
Aboveground,ExteriorWall,Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrationsusing sleeves and mechanical

sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25 mm annularclear space betweenpipe and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeveseals.
1. InstallSteelPipeforsleevessmaller than150mmindiameter.
2. InstallSteelSheetPipeforsleeves 150mmindiameter andlarger.
Pa g e | 12
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
3.
Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according tomanufacturer'swritten

instructions.Tighten boltsthatcause rubber sealing elements toexpand andmake
watertight seal.
Q.
Underground, ExteriorWall, PipePenetrations:InstallSteelPipefor sleeves.Sealpipe

penetrationsusing mechanicalsleeve seals.Size sleeve for 25 mm annular clear space between
pipeandsleeveforinstalling mechanical sleeveseals.
1.
Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according tomanufacturer'swritten

instructions.Tighten boltsthatcause rubber sealing elements toexpand andmake
watertight seal.
R.
FireBarrier Penetrations:Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations.Sealpipe penetrations with firestopping materials. Refer toDivision 7Section
"ThroughPenetrationFirestopSystems" formaterials.
S. Verifyfinalequipment locations forroughingin.
T.
Refer to equipmentspecificationsin other Sections of these Specificationsfor roughingin

requirements.
U.
Piping Joint Construction: Joinpipe andfittings asfollows andasspecifically required inindividual

pipingSpecification Sections:
1. Reamendsofpipesandtubesandremove burrs.Bevelplainendsofsteelpipe.
2.
Removescale,slag,dirt,anddebrisfrominsideandoutsideof pipeandfittingsbefore
assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct jointsaccording toAWS'"Soldering Manual," Chapter "The
Soldering ofPipeandTube";orCDA's"Copper TubeHandbook."
4. Brazed Joints:Construct joints according to AWS' "Brazing Handbook,"Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
5.
ThreadedJoints:Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads accordingto ASMEB1.20.1. Cut
threadsfull and clean usingsharpdies. Ream threadedpipe ends to removeburrsand
restorefullID.Joinpipefittingsandvalvesasfollows:
a.
Noteinternal lengthofthreads infittingsorvalveends,andproximity ofinternal seat

orwall,todetermine howfarpipeshouldbethreaded intojoint.
b.
Apply appropriate tapeorthread compound toexternal pipethreads, unless dryseal
threading isspecified.
c. Alignthreads atpointofassembly.
d.
Tightenjointwithwrench. Applywrenchtovalveendintowhichpipeisbeing
threaded.
e.
Damaged Threads: Donotusepipeorpipefittings withthreads thatarecorroded or
damaged. Donotusepipesections thathavecracked oropenwelds.
6.
WeldedJoints: Constructjoints accordingto AWSD10.12,"Recommended Practicesand

Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and welding
operators according to"Quality Assurance" Article.
7.
Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size,type,
and thicknessfor serviceapplication.Installgasketconcentrically positioned.Assemble
Pa g e | 13
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
joints by sequencingbolt tighteningto make initial contactof flanges and gasketsas flat
and parallel as possible. Use suitablelubricantson bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually
anduniformly usingtorquewrench.
V.PipingConnections: Makeconnections according tothefollowing, unlessotherwise indicated:
1.
Install unions, inpiping DN50 and smaller, adjacent toeach valve andatfinal connection to
eachpieceofequipment withDN50orsmallerthreaded pipeconnection.
2. Install flanges, inpiping DN65 andlarger, adjacent toflanged valves andatfinalconnection
toeachpieceofequipment withflangedpipeconnection.
3.
DryPipingSystems:Installdielectric unionsandflangestoconnectpipingmaterialsof
dissimilar metals.
4.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials ofdissimilar metals.
3.2EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A.Installequipment toprovide maximum possible headroom, ifmounting heights arenotindicated.
B. Install equipment according toapproved submittal data. Portions ofthe Work are shown only in
diagrammatic form.Referconflicts totheEngineer.
C.
Install equipment levelandplumb, parallel andperpendicular tootherbuilding systems and

components inexposed interior spaces, unlessotherwise indicated.
D.
Installmechanical equipment tofacilitate service,maintenance, andrepairorreplacement of

components.Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,with minimum interference to other
installations. Extendgreasefittingstoaccessible locations.
E. Installequipment givingrightofwaytopipinginstalled atrequired slope.
F.
Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontallyand parallel to

equipment shaftsifpossible.
3.3LABELING ANDIDENTIFYING
A.
Piping Systems: Install pipe markers oneach system. Include arrows showing normal direction of
flow.
1.
Plastic markers, with application systems.Install on insulation segment ifrequired for hot,
uninsulated piping.
2.
Locate pipe markers as follows if piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, and
accessible maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, and exterior
nonconcealed locations:
a. Neareachvalveandcontroldevice.
b.
Neareachbranch,excluding shorttakeoffs forfixtures andterminal units. Markeach
pipeatbranch, ifflowpattern isnotobvious.
c.
Nearlocationsif pipespassthroughwalls,floors,ceilings,orenternonaccessible
enclosures.
Pa g e | 14
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
At access doors, manholes,and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
e. Nearmajorequipment itemsandotherpointsoforigination andtermination.
f.
Spaced at maximum of 15 m intervals along each run.Reduce intervals to 7.5m in
congested areasofpipingandequipment.
g.
On pipingaboveremovableacousticalceilings,exceptomitintermediately spaced
markers.
d.
B.
Equipment: Install engravedplasticlaminate sign or equipmentmarker on or near each major

itemofmechanical equipment.
1.
2.
LetteringSize: Minimum6 mm high letteringfor name of unit if viewingdistanceis less

than600mm,13mmhighlettering fordistances upto1800mm,andproportionately
largerlettering forgreaterdistances. Providesecondary lettering twothirds tothree
fourthsofsizeofprincipal lettering.
Text ofSigns: Provide name ofidentified unit. Include text todistinguish between multiple
units, inform user ofoperational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions,
andwarnofhazards andimproper operations.
C.
Duct Systems:Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct markers; or
provide stenciled signsandarrows, showing ductsystemserviceanddirection offlow.
1.
Location: In each space, if ducts are exposedor concealedby removableceiling system,

locatesignsnearpointswhereductsenterintospaceandatmaximum intervals of15m.
D.
Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices asnecessary forunobstructed view infinished

construction.
3.4PAINTING ANDFINISHING
A.
Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation,and applicationof
paint.
B.Applypainttoexposed pipingaccording tothefollowing, unlessotherwise indicated:
1.
Interior, Ferrous Piping: Usesemigloss, acrylicenamel finish. Include finishcoatover

enamel undercoat andprimer.
2.
Interior, GalvanizedSteel Piping:Usesemigloss, acrylicenamel finish.Include 2finish
coatsovergalvanized metalprimer.
3.
Interior,Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss,acrylicenamel finish. Includefinish coat over
enamel undercoat andprimer.
4.
Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss,acrylicenamelfinish. Include 2 finish coats over
rustinhibitive metalprimer.
5. Exterior,GalvanizedSteel Piping:Usesemigloss, acrylicenamel finish.Include2finish
coatsovergalvanized metalprimer.
6.
Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylicenamel finish. Include 2finish coats over
rustinhibitive metalprimer.
C. Donotpaintpipingspecialties withfactoryapplied finish.

Pa g e | 15
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
D.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factorypaintedfinishes with materials and
procedures tomatchoriginal factoryfinish.
3.5CONCRETE BASES
A.Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated orotherwise required, but not less than
100mm larger in both directions than supportedunit.Follow supportedequipment
manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 21 MPa, 28day
compressivestrength concrete and reinforcementasspecified in Division 3Section "CastinPlace
Concrete."
3.6ERECTION OFMETALSUPPORTS ANDANCHORAGE
A.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneousmetal supports accuratelyin location, alignment,and elevation
tosupport andanchormechanical materials andequipment.
B.FieldWelding: Comply withAWSD1.1,"Structural Welding CodeSteel."
C.
FloorMountedSupport:Providebaseplateandconcreteplinthsbeneatheachfloormounted
metallic supports.
3.7DEMOLITION
A.Disconnect, demolish, andremoveWorkspecified inDivision 15Sections.
B.
Ifpipe, ductwork, insulation, orequipment toremain isdamaged ordisturbed, remove damaged

portions andinstallnewproducts ofequalcapacity andquality.
C. Accessible Work:Remove indicated exposed pipeandductwork initsentirety.
D.
Work Abandoned inPlace: Cutandremove underground pipe aminimum of50mm beyond face
ofadjacent construction. Capandpatchsurface tomatchexisting finish.
E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment fromProjectsite.
F.
Temporary Disconnection:Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational

equipment indicated forrelocation.
3.8CUTTING ANDPATCHING
A.
Cut, channel,chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions,ceilings,and other surfacesnecessaryfor

mechanical installations. Perform cuttingbyskilledmechanics oftradesinvolved.
B.Repaircutsurfaces tomatchadjacent surfaces.
3.9GROUTING
Pa g e | 16
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.
Install nonmetallic,nonshrink, grout for mechanical equipmentbase bearing surfaces, pump and
other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Cleansurfacesthatwillcomeintocontactwithgrout.
C.
Provide formsasrequired forplacement ofgrout.
D.Avoidairentrapment duringplacingofgrout.
E. Placegrout,completely fillingequipment bases.
F. Placegroutonconcrete basestoprovide smoothbearing surface forequipment.

G.Placegroutaround anchors.
H.Cureplacedgroutaccording tomanufacturer's written instructions.
ENDOFSECTION 15050
Pa g e | 17
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 150501PACKAGE AIRCONDITIONING &ROOFTOPUNITSANDACCESSORIES
CABINET:
Unit shall be complete with coil, fan, motor, drain pan, and all required wiring, piping, controls
and special features.
Unit manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certification.
Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation.
Unit shall be provided with 2 inch thick synthetic media cleanable filters selected on ASRA
1996 chapter 25 table 2.
Unit shall be selected at medium speed.
1.
FAN AND MOTORS:

Fan shall direct drive; double width fan wheels shall have forward curved blades, and be
statically and dynamically balanced
Fan motor shall be 3 speed permanent split capacitor type with sleeve type bearings and over
sized oil reservoirs.
2.
ROOM THERMOSTAT:
To provide 2-wire, modulating space temperature control in electronic systems
through thermostat-resistor element in which resistance decreases as temperature
increases.
Having the following features:
- Wall mounted.
- Temperature scale with set point adjusting lever.
- 3 speed of fan with "OFF ".
- Cover thermometer.
- Range 15-32 deg. C, thermometer scale 13-35 deg. C, sensor
resistance 1715 ohms with sensitivity of 15 ohms for each 0.5
deg. C temperature change
- Accessories including outlet box and mounting screws.
- Thermostat shall control air conditioning unit's compressors in steps
during summer season.
- Thermostat shall control electric heating coil in steps during winter.
3.
CONDENSER AND EVAPORATOR COILS:

The direct expansion coils are constructed from seamless copper tube expanded into aluminum
fins.
All coils shall be tested at a pressure of 30 kg/cm2
Centrifugal Fans
Section 150501 Package AirCondtn andRoofTopUnitsandAccessories
Pag e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
Forward curved, directly connected to fan motor, statically and dynamically balanced and
designed for whisper quit operation. Materials to be high strength and corrosion resistant.
MOTOR
3-speed type, with built-in thermal overload protection and bronze sleeve type bearings with oil
reservoirs. Motor to be resiliently mounted.
Condensate Drain Pan
18 gauge galvanized steel, projecting under entire length and width of coil, drain pan shall be
epoxy resin coated insulated with fire retardant foam coating, Pan to be treated against
corrosion, insulated and pitched for positive drainage with unit installed level.
COMPRESSOR
Hermetic, R-22 reciprocating compressors shall be specially designed for heavy duty Middle
East conditions with built in oil pump.
Each compressor has internal spring mounting, external anti-vibration mounts.
The electric motor has F class insulation, 100% suction gas cooled and incorporates protective
sheet metal steel shield connected to the crankcase.
Each compressor motor is protected with:
-
A low pressure safety switch.

A high pressure safety switch.
An internal over load protestor (against high motor temperature
5 years warranty for hermetic sealed compressor.
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT:
This comprises followings elements:
- Evaporator and condenser air coils each constructed of copper tubing mechanically
expanded in aluminum fins.
- Refrigerant lines of copper tubing, de-oxidized, drier leak test.
- Expansion valves and check valves for refrigerant control.
- Filter driers in liquid lines.
- All units leave factory with R-22 operating charge.
CONTROL PANEL
All self contained units are supplied completely pre-wired in accordance with VDE code
requiring only the connection to the 3 phase supply and the installation of a suitable general
disconnect switch and fuses and connecting remote control thermostat.
When unit is delivered as split it required field interconnecting wiring and piping between the
evaporator and condenser sections.
The control panel is located in separate compartment and can be inspected without distributing
operation; the control panel contains the followings:
-
Starting contactor and overload for each compressor.

Starting contactors and overloads for evaporator and condenser fan motor.
24 volt control relays.
220/24 volt control circuit transformer.
Solid state timer for each compressor.
Voltage protector.
Pag e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
- Control fuse.
- All appropriate wiring, terminals, and mains connections.
PROTECTION AND SAFETY

4.
High/low pressure control to protect the compressor against high discharge and low
suction pressures.
Fan motors 3 phase external and internal protection located in their contactors and
windings respectively.
Compressor 3 phase external and internal protection located in their contactors and
windings respectively.
Crankcase heater to guard the compressor against floodback conditions and to eliminate
oil fluffing on start up.
Timer to protect the compressor against short cycling by not allowing immediate restart
after a momentary power failure or when thermostat opens.
Simultaneous starting of both compressor is prevented for dual compressor units
Voltage protector against low voltage, phase reversal, and short cycling.
NOISE ATTENUATION
The Contractor shall supply and fix acoustic insulation and noise attenuator units where
necessary to reduce the air borne noise transmission through the distribution duct system; so
that the specified noise criteria levels are satisfied.
SOUND ATTENUATORS
Sound attenuators shall be located at upstream of supply air fan and downstream of fan return
air fan module to ensure effective sound reduction. The media shall
be made of 60kg/m
rook wool, UL (NFPA 90A) approval perforated galvanized sheet on the inner casing on outer
wall.
The selection and supply of sound attenuators shall be by specialist acoustic.
Attenuators or splitters of large cross section or length can be manufactured in modular section
as required for ease of site handling.
5.
Fire dampers
Type - Dampers shall be manufactured to DW142 shall meet the local codes, the standards of
the "National Fire Protection Association" 90A and shall comply with BS 476. Dampers shall
be sized so that the free air space is not less than the connected duct free air space. Location
shall be as shown on drawings and as required by Local Authority.
Material - Frame shall be constructed 1.2MM galvanized steel casing to be unaffected by
corrosion of high heat. Mechanical parts shall have bronze or SS non-corrosive pins. When
closed, the dampers shall be held closed by a catch arrangement.
Fuse links - Fire dampers shall be arranged to close automatically and remain tightly closed
upon the operation of an approved fusible link or other approved heat actuated device, located
where readily affected by an abnormal rise of temperature in the duct. Fusible links shall have
a temperature rating approximately 76oC.
Pag e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
Workmanship - Fire dampers shall be installed so as to provide the positive barrier to passage
of air when in a closed position. Dampers shall be installed so they will be self-supporting in
case of duct destruction due to heat. Care must be exercised that the frame will be set so that
closing device shall not bind.
Access Hole - Suitable hand hole openings with tightly fitted covers shall be provided to make
accessible for inspection and maintenance, or resetting.
Manufacture - Fire dampers and access doors shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the production of high quality products.
All fire dampers shall be UL LISTED supplied with a visual indicator of the damper blade
status, which shall be shown externally on the false ceiling.
The level of cleanliness and protection internal to the ductwork must be as defined in HVCA
document DW/TMC.
Provide fire dampers in all ducts over 125 sq.cm. in area, in the following locations,
whether or not specifically required by ordinances and codes:Duct entering and leaving fire shafts (duct shafts).
Ducts passing through designated fire walls.
Ducts through floors, and not encased in fire shaft.
Ducts leaving and entering plant area.
Ducts entering and leaving storage areas
6.
GUARANTEE:
WARRANTY PERIOD SHALL BE FIVE YEARS FOR THE COMPRESSOR FROM
DATE OF COMMISSIONING.
END OF SECTION 15050 - 1
Pag e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
15070 VENTILATING FANS

1.0
In-Line Centrifugal Fan

The housing shall utilize galvanized steel (aluminum optional some sizes) corner post
framework and panels. Units shall be equipped with three removable access panels. Units
shall be pre-wired to a junction box on the exterior and equipped with an electrical disconnect
switch. Two support angles shall be provided.
Statically & dynamically balanced backward inclined, centrifugal wheels shall be aluminum,
spark-resistant, non-overloading, & matched to deeply spun venturis. Motors shall be
continuous duty, ball bearing design, permanently lubricated, mounted out of the main
airstream, & furnished at the specified voltage, phase, & enclosure. Shafts shall be turned,
ground, polished, & rust protected. Heavy duty ball bearings are rated for a minimum L50 life
exceeding 200,000 hours. Pulleys shall be adjustable, cast iron, machined, keyed, securely
attached, & sized for 150% of the horsepower at its rated maximum speed.
Each fan shall bear the AMCA Licensed Ratings Seal for Air and Sound Performance, and
shall be UL and CSA listed.
2.0
Axial Flow Fan

Inline axial fan galvanized construction with aluminum impeller with adjustable pitch angle
blades.
Direct driven, TEFC motor Class H ins. 2-Speed motor is supplied on some fans as per
requirement. Smoke Fans are suitable for 300C/1hrs.
3.0
CENTRIFUGAL AIR BLOWER GENERAL

The centrifugal blower shall be of the rotatable belt driven/ direct driven type and SWSI/
DWDI. The blower shall be constructed of steel or aluminum with all seams continuously
welded for leak proof assembly. . All wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced and
shall be keyed to the shafts.
The blower shafts shall be AISI C-1040 or C1045 hot rolled and accurately turned and
polished. Close tolerances shall be maintained where the shaft makes contact with the
bearings.
All bearings on the blowers in arrangement 10 shall be grease lubricated, precision antifriction ball self aligning pillow block type.
All drives for belt driven fans shall be designed for 165% of rated horsepower capacities.
Motor drives shall be variable thru horsepower. Oil resistant non-static belts shall be provided.
In general all type of centrifugal blowers shall include housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings and
structural support members as a factory assembled unit.
Fan motor shall be TEFC enclosure and class F insulation suitable for ambient temperature of
50 deg C.
Pag e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
Each fan shall bear AMCA licensed rating seal for air & sound performance & shall be UL &
CSA listed.
4.0
SMALL DUCTED INLINE

All the fans shall be cabinet type which should house the fan assemblies.
Small inline ducted ventilators shall be direct drive, forward curved, centrifugal blower type.
Fan wheel shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be dynamically balanced. The
housing shall be constructed of aluminum and acoustically insulated for quite operation. An
integral aluminum back draft damper shall be standard. Blower and motor assembly shall be
easily removable from the housing without disturbing the ductwork .Fans mounted on the roof
should be with epoxy coating & should be weather proof.
The motor shall be permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection and shall
be factory tested prior to shipment. The unit shall be supplied with an internal wiring box and
receptacle. The fan rpm should not be more than 1400 rpm
The cabinet should be designed for quick transition from right angle discharge to top
discharge or into inline configuration without disturbing the power pack The discharge position
shall be adjustable by moving interchangeable panels supplied with removable fasteners and
should be field adjustable type Ceiling ventilators shall be furnished standard with a mould
white plastic, aerodynamically designed grill with 85% free area
Inline ducted/Ceiling ventilators shall be certified and licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for Air
and Sound Performance. Ceiling ventilator performance shall be based on tests and
procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 211 and comply with the
requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Fan sound power level ratings shall be
based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 311 and
comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. In-line ducted/ Ceiling
ventilators shall be UL 507 and additionally listed for UL 705 listed and shall be CSA listed.
5.0
FANS AXIAL
Axial flow fans shall be capable of giving the design flow when tested to B.S. 848
Each fan shall be supplied with a suitably rated contactor/starter/isolator of approved pattern.
Fan casings shall be constructed of mild steel plates with angle stiffeners with the casing hot
dip galvanized after manufacture. The inlets and outlets of the axial flow fans shall be flanged
for connection to the system.
An access door is to be provided on the casings of all fans. Casings shall cover both impeller
and motor so that fans can be removed without disturbing adjacent ductwork or other
components of the system. A flame proof external terminal box shall be fitted on the casing.
All lubrication points are to be extended to the outside of the casing and in a position that will
permit access in relation to the adjacent plant, services or building structure.
Impellers shall be die cast in aluminum alloy and X-rayed during manufacture. The impellers
shall be capable of running continuously at 20% in excess of the rated speed. The impeller
shall be keyed and locked on to the shaft, which shall be statically dynamically balances and
tested at over speed before dispatch from the manufacturers work.
Flexible connections shall be supplied and installed at both inlet and outlet of each fan.
The fan bearings shall be of the sleeve type wherever possible. The bearings are to be truly
aligned and rigidly mounted on to the casing.
Pag e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
Graphs of the performance curve of each fan are to be forwarded to the Consultant together
with a test report on the sound level at three diameters in a free field condition prior to the
order being confirmed.
Axial flow fans are to be driven by electric motors of commercially silent pattern carrying a
makers guarantee in this respect. The motors shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled.
All motors are to be positioned to permit effective ventilation of the motor and all components
parts of the fans and motor are to be suitable to withstand the temperature conditions
expected in the fan.
Electrical connections to the motors shall be in a totally enclosed terminal box secured to the
exterior of the casing. Wiring within the axial flow fans shall be suitable for the conditions
within the casings.
A suitable steel support is to be provided for each fan, and the frame is to be fabricated from
rolled steel channel with adequate cross members for bolting the fan in to position. The frame
shall be of welded construction with anti-vibration mountings
6.0
CENTRIFUGAL FANS
All centrifugal fans, handling more than 1000 CFM. (500 l/s) shall have backward inclined
blades, unless shown otherwise.
Provide access doors on the fan scroll. Doors shall be hinged, in reinforced angle frames and
provided with clamping devices. Minimum size shall be 18 X 14 (450mm X 350mm) or full
width of fan scroll, if scroll is less than 18 (450mm) wide.
Provide drain connections at the low point of fan scroll or where shown. Drains shall be 1
(25mm) pipe size half coupling welded in to the bottom of the scroll with a square headed,
threaded, brass plug.
Utility fans shall conform with the specification for centrifugal fans above with the exception of
the drive arrangement and belt guard. Drive shall be standard utility arrangement and belt
guard may be omitted if a hood is provided over the drive.
Centrifugal fans shall be in accordance with the Fan Schedule.
7.0
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

Fans shall be belt-driven in-line centrifugal units with backward inclined, aluminum fan wheels
in reinforced, zinc coated heavy gauge steel housings.
Motors shall be mounted on adjustable bases outside the air stream.
All internal components shall be accessible through removable or hinged access panels.
Provide disconnect switch mounted on the exterior of the fan casing.
Provide a matching wire mesh guard over the fan inlet and / or outlet if no ductwork is
connected at this location.
Twin fans shall have integral backdraft dampers, and two identical fans, motors and drives.
In-line centrifugal fans shall be in accordance with the Fan Schedule.
Fan casing shall be acoustically lined with 12mm thick acoustic insulation.
Fans shall be supplied with filter sections and washable filter media where noted. Filter
sections shall be closed couple to the fan.
Pag e | 7
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
Pag e | 8
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 150502FRESHAIRHANDLING UNITS&HEATRECOVERY DEVICES
9.1Thissection covers thesupply, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning ofthefresh air
handling units (FAHU) and the associated accessories. This section also applies to units with 100%
freshair.
9.2The fresh Air Handling Unit (FAHU) shall be factory fabricated, tested and of efficient design and
construction.TheFAHUshallbedrawthroughtypeandoperatewithlownoiselevel.TheFAHUshall
be supplied and installed with reference to the tender drawings and details as described in the
ScheduleofEquipmentData.EachFAHUshallconsistofbutnotlimitedtothefollowingcomponents:
a)
Casingmadeofrigidcoatedaluminumframeanddoublewallpanel(completewith 50mm
thickinsulation);
b)
Fanassemblyconsistoffanwheel,fanmotor,taperedlockpulleysandadequatenumberof
beltsfortransmissions;
c) Coilsectionwithcoolingcoilofcoppertubesandcopperfins;
d)Filtersectionwithfilterhousingandfiltermedia;
e)Insulateddualpitchedslopingdrainpansstainlesssteel;
f)Hingedandremovableaccessdoorforservicing;
g)Mixingchamber(ifshownindrawings)forfilteredfreshairandreturnair;
h)
Vibrationisolatingbases, vibration isolator and other accessories necessary for operation,

and;
i) Weatherproofroofforoutdoorunits.
9.3TheFAHUsandaccessoriesshallbeofcompactdesignandconstructionandsoselectedtomeetthe
spaceandheightconstraints.
9.4TheFAHUmodelshallbeEuroventCertifiedorcurrentlyundergoingcertification.
9.5AHUCasing
9.6Thecasingshallhaveperimeterframesassembledwithdoublewallpanels.Allpanelsshallbeeasily
removedfor the inspectionand servicingof internalcomponentssuch as fan assemblyand cooling
coil.Removalofpanelmustnotaffectthestructuralintegrityoftheunit.
9.7Thepanelshallbe 25 / 50mm(indoor/ outdoor)doublewall type with injectedCFCfree

polyurethanefoaminsulationforarigidconstruction. Thedensityoftheinsulationshallbe50kg/m3.
Theinsulationofthepanelsshallbeinjectedpolyurethanewiththermalconductivity(kvalue)ofno
morethan0.02W/(m/K).
9.8Besides the cooling coil and fan assembly, the air passage of the AHU shall be design to ensure
smoothair flow. Allexposedsheetmetaledgesshallbe filedor concealedas muchas possible.All
exposed insulation material shall meet UL94: Underwriter Laboratories Incorporated, Standard for
SafetyandFlammabilityofplasticmaterialforpartsindevicesandappliances.
9.9Casing design must have thermal break on the frame, panel and access doors to prevent casing
condensationundermechanicalroomambienttemperature.
Section 150502FreshAirAndHeatRecovery
Pag e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
9.10There shall be no exposed gaps between panels and between panels and frame. Casing shall be
designedto meet EuroventClass B casing leakagerequirementwith leakage rate of no more than
0.80l/s/m2at1000Pa.
9.11CasingstrengthshallbedesignedtomeetEuropeanStandardEN1886:1998,casingclass2Awiththe
panelandframedeflectionofnomorethan4mm.m1span.
9.12Thewholeunitshallbemountedonagalvanizedsteelbaserail.Thebaserailshallbeusedinlieuof
concreteplinthorotheradditionalbasesthatareusedatsite.
9.13Thepanelshallprovidenoisereductioncharacteristicofnolessthan25dB.
9.14FanAssembly
General
The entire fan assembly shall be mounted on a steel structure with vibration isolating base and
housedwithinthecasingofanAHU.
MechanicalpowertransmissionfromthemotortothefanshallbymeansoftaperedpulleysandV
beltsofadequatesizeandnumber.
Airtightaccesspanelordoorscompletewithapprovedgaskets,handles,latchesandhingesshallbe
provided for easy maintenance and servicing of the fan assembly. Inspection windows shall have
minimumsizeof150mmx150mm,doublethickness,airinsulated,reinforcedglasspanelmountedin
gasketedframe.Eachaccessopeningshallhaveaminimumof900mm(height)x600mm(width).
The fan shall be of forward or backward curved types as specified on the Schedule of Equipment
TechnicalData.Fanwheelsandshaftsshallbestaticallybalancedpriortoassemblyanddynamically
balancedtoISO1940asanassemblyinthefactoryatdesignspeedpriortodelivery.Testreportsshall
be providedfor approvalprior to shipment.Fan shaftsshall be selectedto operatewell belowthe
firstcriticalspeed.Fanwheelsandshaftsshallbedesignedforcontinuousoperationatthemaximum
ratedspeedandmotorcapacity.
Fan bearings shall be selfaligned(concentric) type with adaptor sleeve bearing. Bearing shall be
maintenancefreewithpermanentlysealedlubricatedballbearingtype.Bearinglifeshallbeatleast
300,000hoursbasedonratinglifeofL50.
All fan housings, shafts and impellers (wheels) shall be from the same fan manufacturer. Any mix
matching of fan components or modifications by party other than the fan manufacturer shall be
prohibited.
Fanshaftshallbeofmadeofcarbonsteel(C45)machinedandpolishedtotoleranceofstandardISO
2862GradeG6.Protectivecoatofantirustingshallbeappliedtoallbaresurfacesoftheshafts.
Fanshallbeselectedtoprovidehighstaticefficiencybutlowsoundlevelandpowerconsumptionat
specifiedairflowrate.Selectionoffanshallbeasperequipmentschedule.Thefanperformanceshall
betestedandcertifiedtoANSI/AMCA210,ANSI/ASHRAEStandard51LaboratoryMethodofTesting
FansforRatingandAMCA300ReverberantRoomMethodforSoundTestingofFans.
Fan Motors
The fan motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with IP54 protection and class F
insulationwith class B temperaturerise complyingwith BS2757. The motor shall be of 4 pole with
standard3phaseselectricalsupplyof380Vand50Hz.
9.15TheCoil:
Assembly
ThecoolingcoilshallbefabricatedbytheFAHUmanufacturer.ThecoolingcoilfortheFAHUshallbe
suitableforDXapplication.
Pag e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
Thecoilshallbeconstructedofcoppertubesmechanicallyexpandedintocopperfinstoenhanceheat
transfer. Suitable provision shall be made to facilitate adequate draining and cleaning through
removableplugsatbothendsofeachtubes.Eachsetofcoilshallbefittedwithairventatthehighest
point.
Allcoilcapacities, pressuredropsandselection procedure shallberatedinaccordance toARI

Standard410.
Thecoilshallbefittedwithsupplyandreturnheaders,madeofsteelpipes,toensureeven
distributionofchilledwaterthroughoutthecoil.
Coilshallbedesignedtoutilizethefullavailableunitcrosssectionarea.
9.16DrainPans&DrainPipes:
Alldrainpansshallbedoublepitchedslopingtypetoenabletotalcondensateremoval.Intermediate
drainpanshall beprovidedin thecaseofstackedcoils.Thedrainpansshallbecorrosionresistant,
insulatedtopreventcondensationandbeinginstalledrightbelowthecoolingcoil.Drainpipesshallbe
of uPVClaidwithsufficientgradient,properlysecuredto thefloorandterminatedintothenearest
floortrap.
9.17MixingChambers
Themixingchambersshallbeofadequatesizestoensureathoroughmixingoffilteredfreshairand
returnair.Theconstruction,materialandfinishingofmixingchambersshallbeidenticaltotheofthe
AHUcasing.Thefreshairintakeshallbecontrolledbyopposedbladedampers.
9.18Filters
7.1AllAHUsandfreshairintakesandwhereindicatedonthetenderdrawingsshallbeprovidedwith
primaryandsecondaryairfiltersofthetypeasspecifiedherein.
a)AirfiltersshallcomplywiththerequirementsofANSI/ASHRAE52.11992Standardoran
approved equivalent standard. Reference shall be made to ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 1992
Standardortorelevantapprovedequivalentstandardfordefinitionoftermsemployed.
b)AirfilterstestshallbeperformedbyanindependentTestingLaboratory.Testcertificates
shallbeproducedonrequest.
c) Thefiltersshallbeinstalledcompletewithallaccessoriesandotherminornecessaryfor
theirsatisfactoryinstallationandperformancewhetherindividuallyspecifiedornot.
d)Uniform air velocity through the media shall be achieved, if necessary by means of air
screens,bafflesandotherdevicestoapproval.
PrimaryFilterPrefilter
a)
Thefiltersshallhavearatedaveragedustspotefficiencyofnotlessthan2530%when
tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE52.1 1992 Standard atmospheric dust spot
method.
b)
Both fresh and return air filters shall have pleatedextendedsurface media. The filter
shallbethrowawaytype.Normalfilterdepthshallbe50mm.
c)Thefilters, with nonwoven synthetic fabric media, shall beclassified bythe

UnderwriterLaboratoryasClass2.
SecondaryFilterforAHU
a) AllAHUsshallbeprovidedwithSecondaryFilter.
b) TheSecondaryFiltershallbeofdisposablemediumefficiencytype.
Pag e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
c)
Average atmospheric dustspotefficiency shallbe85%oraboveinaccordance to

ASHRAE 5211992 Test Standard. Filter shall be classified as Underwriter Laboratory
Class2.
FilterMediaandFrameConstruction
a)
MediaSupportGrid
The media shall be treated with adhesive and continuouslylaminated to a supported
steelwiregrid.Themediashallbesandwichedtomaintainthedesignedspaceforeach
pleat to maximize dust collection capacity and to avoid the possibility of media
oscillationandmediabeingpulledaway.
b) EnclosingFrame
The enclosingframeshall madeof heavyduty,rigidan highwet strengthdoublewall

beverageboard. The frame, with two of its largest surfacesbeing diecut into mating
openingswithdiagonalsupports,shallbeasquareboxofabout50mmdepthcapable
of totally encasing the filter media. The filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the
internalperipheryoftheframetopreventairleak.
c)RearAccessFilterFrames
The rear access filter frames shall be in modular form with each module designed to
accommodate a standard size pleated filter. Constructed with galvanized steel, each
filterholdingframeshallbeequippedwithholdingclipstoholdthefilter.
d) SideAccessFilterFrame
SideaccessfiltersectionshallbeaccessiblefromthesideofanAHU.Theaccesspanel
shallbesealedbygasket,doublewallfastenedwithlatches.Insidethesection,standard
sized,50mmdeeppleatedfiltersshallbeheldbyextrudedaluminumtrack.
7.2FilterBypassLeakageRate
FilterassemblyshallbedesignedtomeetEuropeanStandardEN1886:1998,filterbypassleakageclass.
HEATWHEEL
ASHRAE Standard 621989 that recommended level of outside air brought into buildings has been
increased.Thisimposesmuchhigherlatentandsensibleloadsoncoolingandheatingequipment.
Heatwheelisdesignedtorecoverstotalenergy(sensibleandlatent)tomeetstherequirementsofindoor
AirQuality(IAQ),humiditycontrolandtosaveenergy.
Thewheelmadeofaluminumheatstoringmatrixandwithgalvanizedcasing.Thewheelispositionedin
39FAirHandlingUnitsothatitisdividedintotwohalfmoonsections.Staleairfromtheconditionedspace
is exhausted through one half while outdoor air is drawn through the other half in the counter flow
pattern.Atthesametimewheelisrotatedslowly.
Sensibleheatistransferredasthemetallicsubstratepicksupandstoresheatfromthewarmerairstream
andgivesituptothecoolersection.
Latent heat is transferredas the synthesizedmetallic substratecondensesmoisture from the air stream
thathasthehigherhumidityratiothroughadsorption(withasimultaneousreleaseofheat)andreleasesof
moisturethroughevaporation(andheatpickup)intotheairstreamthathasalowerhumidityratio.
Contractorshallsubmittherecoverywheelcalculationtoconsultantforapproval.
Pag e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
CONDENSINGUNIT
DESCRIPTION
Unitsshallbefactoryassembled,coolonly,designedforoutdoormountedinstallation.Theunitshallbe
factorywired,piped.Allunitswiringshallbebothnumberedandcolorcoded.
UNIT CABINET AND FRAME
The main frame shall be constructed of extruded aluminum profile joined by 3D nylon reinforced ABS
plasticroundedcornersformingthestructuralframetohouseallinternalcomponents.
All cabinetpanelsshall be made from G90 preplasticizedsheets whichare hot dip galvanizedwithPVC
coating,andshallprovideanexcellentresistancetoUV&corrosion.
Panelsshallbeeasilyremovableforinspectionandmaintenance,andshallbefixedtotheframewithself
tappingscrews.ExternalskinofthepanelsshallcomplywithASTMB117standardssuitablefor750hours
saltspraytest.Cabinetpanelsshallbeeasilyremovableforservicingandmaintenance.Fullperimeterbase
railsshallbeprovided.
CONDENSER FAN ASSEMBLY
Eachunitshallhavethreeorfourcondenserfans/motors.Theoutdoorfansshallbeofthedirectdriven
propeller type, discharge air vertically and shall be dynamically balanced for smooth operation. The fan
motors shall be totally enclosed IP54 with class F insulation. Motors shall have permanently lubricated
bearingsandshallhaveexternaloverloadprotection.
REFRIGERANT COMPONENTS
Compressors
a.CompressorsforallmodelsshallbeHermeticScroll.Allcompressorsshallbeinternallyprotected
with internal high pressure relief and over temperature protection. Thecompressors shall be
mountedonneoprenemountstoeliminatevibrationfrombeingtransmittedtotheunitstructure
andcabinet.
Coils
a. Condenser coils shall have aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless internally enhanced
copper tubes with all joints brazed. Condenser fin spacing shall be limited to16 fpi for 30 Ton
modelstomaximizeheattransferwhilefinspacingshallbelimitedto12fpiinthe35,40and50TR
modelstominimizeblockageandhighpressureoperatingcondition.SpecialHeresitecoatingshall
beavailableasafactoryoption.
b. Condensercoils shall be of the direct expansion,drawthru,design.Coils shall be testedup to a

pressureof450psig.
Condenser
RefrigerantCircuitandRefrigerantSafetycomponentsshallincludethefollowing:
a.Filterdrier/strainertoeliminateanymoistureorforeignmatter.
b.Accessibleservicegaugeconnectionsonbothsuctionanddischargelinestocharge,evacuate,and
measure refrigerant pressure during any necessary servicing or troubleshooting, without losing
charge.
c.Therefrigerationsystemshallprovideatleast15Fofsubcoolingatdesignconditions.
Pag e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
d.Unitshalloperatewithconventionalthermostatdesignsandhavealowvoltageterminalstripfor
easyhookup.
e.Unitcontrolboardshallhaveonboarddiagnosticsandfaultcodedisplay.
f. Standard controls shall include antishort cycle and low voltage protection, and permit cooling
operationdownto50F.
g.Controlboardshallmonitoreachrefrigerantsafetyswitchindependently.
h. Controlboardshallretainlast5 faultcodesin nonvolatilememory,whichwill notbelostinthe

eventofapowerloss.
ENDOFSUBSECTION15050
Pag e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
Pag e | 7
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15060HANGERS ANDSUPPORTS
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.ThisSection includes hangers andsupports formechanical systempipingandequipment.
B.RelatedSections includethefollowing:
1. Division 9Section"Painting" forhangers andsupports.
2. Division 13Sections onfiresuppression pipingforfiresuppression pipehangers.
3.
Division 15Section"PipeInsulation" forinsulation vaporbarriermaterials andthermal
hanger shieldinserts.
4.
Division 15Section"Mechanical VibrationControlsandSeismicRestraints" forvibration
isolation andseismic restraint devices.
5. Division 15Section"MetalDucts"forducthangers andsupports.
1.3DEFINITIONS
A.MSS:Manufacturers Standardization SocietyfortheValveandFittingsIndustry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSSSP90, "Guidelineson Terminologyfor Pipe Hangers and

Supports."
1.4PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design channel support systems for piping tosupport multiple pipes capable ofsupporting
combined weightofsupported systems, systemcontents, andtestwater.
B.
Design heavyduty steeltrapezes forpiping tosupport multiple pipescapable ofsupporting

combined weightofsupported systems, systemcontents, andtestwater.
C.
All hangersand supportsinstallationdetailsand any cuttingand drillingin structuralelements

shallbeapproved bytheEngineer.
Section 15060Hangers andSupports
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1.5SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data:For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component,and thermal
hanger shieldinsertindicated.
B.
Shop Drawings:Signed and sealed by aqualified professional engineer for multiple piping
supports and trapeze hangers.Include seismic and design calculationsand stress analysis
calculations justifying forces,sizes,embedments,, andcharacteristics ofcomponents and
fabrication details.
C. Welding Certificates: Copiesofcertificates forwelding procedures andoperators.
A.
Welding: Qualify processesand operatorsaccordingto ASME Boiler and PressureVessel Code:

SectionIX,"Welding andBrazingQualifications."
B.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13 for hangers and supportsused as componentsof fire
protection system. Include listingandlabeling byULandFMapproval.
C.
EngineeringResponsibility: Design and preparationof Shop Drawingsand calculationsfor each

multiple pipesupport andtrapeze byaqualified professional engineer.
D.
EngineeringResponsibility: Design and preparationof Shop Drawingsand calculationsfor each

multiple pipesupport, trapeze, andseismic restraint byaqualified professional engineer.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1MANUFACTUREDUNITS
A.
Pipe Hangers, Supports,and Components: MSSSP58, factoryfabricated components. Refer to

"Hanger and Support Applications"Article in Part3 for where to use specific hanger and support
types.
1.
2.
Galvanized,MetallicCoatings: For piping and equipmentthat will not have fieldapplied

finish.
NonmetallicCoatings: On attachmentsfor electrolyticprotectionwhere attachmentsare
indirectcontact withcoppertubing.
B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA2, factoryfabricatedcomponents forfieldassembly.
1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish,unlessbaremetalsurfaces areindicated.

2.
NonmetallicCoatings: On attachmentsfor electrolyticprotectionwhere attachmentsare
indirectcontact withcoppertubing.
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
2.2MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
MechanicalAnchor Fasteners:Inserttype attachments withpulloutandshearcapacities

appropriatefor supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection
system shallinclude ULlistingandFMapproval.
B.Structural Steel:ASTMA36/A36M,steelplates,shapes, andbars,blackandgalvanized.
C.
Grout: ASTMC1107,GradeB,factorymixed andpackaged, nonshrink andnonmetallic, dry,

hydrauliccement grout.
1.
Characteristics:Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommendedforboth interior and

exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, andnongaseous.
3. DesignMix:34.5MPa,28daycompressive strength.
PART3EXECUTION
3.1HANGER ANDSUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.Specific hangerrequirements arespecified inSections specifying equipment andsystems.
B.
Comply withMSSSP69 forpipehanger selections andapplications that arenotspecified inpiping

systemSpecification Sections.
C.
HorizontalPiping Hangersand Supports: Unless otherwiseindicatedand exceptas specifiedin

pipingsystemSpecification Sections, installthefollowing types:
1.
Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type1): Forsuspension ofnoninsulated orinsulated

stationary pipes,DN15toDN750.
2. Carbonor AlloySteel,DoubleBoltPipe Clamps(MSS Type3): For suspensionof pipes,
DN20toDN600,requiring clampflexibility andupto100mmofinsulation.
3.
Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type4): For suspension ofcold and hot pipes, DN15 toDN600 ,if
littleornoinsulation isrequired.
4.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type5):For suspensionof pipes, DN15 to DN100, to allow offcenter
closure forhanger installation beforepipeerection.
5.
Adjustable Swivel Split orSolidRing Hangers (MSS Type6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes,DN20toDN200.
6. AdjustableSteel Band Hangers(MSS Type7): For suspensionof noninsulatedstationary
pipes,DN15toDN200.
7.
AdjustableBand Hangers (MSS Type9):For suspensionof noninsulatedstationarypipes,
DN15toDN200.
8. Adjustable SwivelRing Band Hangers (MSS Type10): For suspension ofnoninsulated
stationary pipes,DN15toDN50.
9.
Split PipeRingwith or withoutTurnbuckleAdjustment Hangers (MSS Type11):For
suspension ofnoninsulated stationary pipes,DN10toDN200.
10.ExtensionHinged or TwoBoltSplit Pipe Clamps(MSS Type12):For suspensionof
noninsulated stationary pipes,DN10toDN80.
11.UBolts(MSSType24):Forsupport ofheavypipe,DN15toDN750.
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
12.Clips(MSSType26): Forsupportof insulatedpipesnotsubjectto expansionor

contraction.
13.Pipe Saddle Supports(MSS Type36):For support of pipes, DN100 to DN900 , with steel
pipebasestanchion support andcastiron floorflange.
14.Adjustable PipeSaddleSupports(MSSType38):Forstanchiontype supportforpipes,

DN65 to DN900, if vertical adjustmentis required, with steel pipe base stanchion support
andcastiron floorflange.
D.VerticalPiping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated andexcept asspecified inpiping system

Specification Sections, installthefollowing types:
1. Extension PipeorRiserClamps(MSSType8):Forsupport ofpiperisers,DN20toDN500.

2. Carbonor AlloySteelRiserClamps(MSSType42): For supportof pipe risers,DN20to
DN500, iflongerendsarerequired forriserclamps.
E. HangerRodAttachments:Unlessotherwiseindicatedand exceptas specifiedin piping system

Specification Sections, installthefollowing types:
1.SteelClevises (MSSType14):For49to232deg.Cpipinginstallations.
2.SwivelTurnbuckles (MSSType15):ForusewithMSSType11,splitpiperings.
3. MalleableIron Sockets(MSSType16):Forattaching hangerrodstovarioustypes
ofbuilding attachments.
4.SteelWeldlessEyeNuts(MSSType17):For49to232deg.Cpipinginstallations.
3.2 HANGER ANDSUPPORT INSTALLATION
F.
Pipe Hangerand SupportInstallation: Complywith MSSSP69 and MSSSP89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, andattachments asrequired toproperly support pipingfrombuilding structure.
G.
Channel Support System Installation:Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together onfieldassembled channel systems.
1. Fieldassemble andinstallaccording tomanufacturer's writteninstructions.
H.
HeavyDutySteel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping
andsupport together onfieldfabricated, heavyduty trapezes.
1.
Pipes ofVarious Sizes: Support together andspace trapezes forsmallest pipe size orinstall
intermediate supportsforsmallerdiameterpipesas specifiedaboveforindividualpipe
hangers.
2. Field fabricatefrom ASTMA36/A36M,steel shapesselectedfor loadsbeing supported.
Weldsteelaccording toAWSD1.1.
I.
Install building attachments within concrete slabsorattach tostructural steel. Space attachments
withinmaximumpipingspanlengthindicatedin MSSSP69.Installadditionalattachments at
concentrated loads,including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, andexpansion joints, andat
changes indirection ofpiping. Install concrete inserts before concrete isplaced; fasten inserts to
formsandinstallreinforcing barsthrough openings attopofinserts.
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
J. Installmechanicalanchor fastenersin concreteafterconcreteis placedandcompletelycured.

Install fasteners according tomanufacturer'swritten instructions. Do not use in lightweight
concrete slabsorinconcrete slabslessthan100mmthick.
K.
Installhangersandsupports complete withnecessary inserts,bolts,rods,nuts,washers, and

otheraccessories.
L.
Install hangers andsupports toallow controlled thermal andseismic movement ofpiping systems,
topermitfreedomof movement betweenpipeanchors,andtofacilitateactionof expansion
joints,expansion loops,expansion bends,andsimilarunits.
M.
Load Distribution: Install hangersand supportsso that piping live and dead loads and stresses
frommovement willnotbetransmitted toconnected equipment.
N.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe
deflections allowed byASMEB31.9,"Building Services Piping," isnotexceeded.
O.
Supports exposed to external weather conditions shall be hot dipped galvanized with zinc coated
cutedges.
P. Insulated Piping: Comply withthefollowing:
1.
Pipeinsulationshallbe continuous throughpipehangers.Wherepipeis supportedby

insulation, provide galvanized steelshields andprotection saddles. Where shields areused
on pipes 50 mm and larger, provide insulationinserts at points of hangers and supports.
Insulationinserts shall be of calcium silicate, cellular glass, minimum128 kg/m3, molded
glassfiber,minimum 128kg/m3,orotherapproved materialof thesamethickness as
adjacent insulation. Insulation inserts shallcover bottom halfofpipecircumference andbe
notlessinlength thantheprotection shield. Vaporbarrier facing ofinsert shallbeofsame
materialas facingon adjacentinsulation. Seal insertsinto insulationwith vapor barrier
coating orweatherproof coating asapplicable. Where anchors are secured tochilled piping
that is to be insulated,insulateanchorssame as piping for a distancenot less than four
times theinsulation thickness toprevent condensation.Vapor sealinsulation around
anchors.
2. Attachclampsandspacers topiping.
a.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature:Clamp may project through

insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature:Use thermalhangershield insert
withclampsizedtomatchODofinsert.
c. Donotexceedpipestresslimitsaccording toASMEB31.9.
3.
InstallMSSSP58,Type39 protectionsaddles,if insulationwithoutvaporbarrieris

indicated. Fillinterior voidswithinsulation thatmatches adjoining insulation.
4.
Install MSSSP58,Type40protective shields oncoldpiping withvaporbarrier. Shields shall

spanarcof180degrees.
5. ShieldDimensions forPipe:Notlessthanthefollowing:
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
a. DN8toDN90:300mmlongand1.22mmthick.
b. DN100:300mmlongand1.52mmthick.
c. DN125andDN150:450mmlongand1.52mmthick.
d. DN200toDN350:600mmlongand1.91mmthick.
e. DN400toDN600:600mmlongand2.67mmthick.
6. ThermalHanger Shields: Installwithinsulation samethickness aspipinginsulation.
3.2EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structuralsteelstands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support

equipment abovefloor.
B. Grouting: Groutundersupports forequipment andmakesmooth bearing surface.
3.3METALFABRICATION
A.Allfabricated channels andtrapezesupports shallbehotdippedgalvanized steel.
B.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneousmetal fabricationsfor heavydutysteel trapezesand equipment

supports.
C.
Fit exposed connectionstogether to form hairline joints.Fieldweld connectionsthat cannot be

shopwelded because ofshipping sizelimitations.
D.
FieldWelding: Comply withAWSD1.1procedures forshielded metalarcwelding, appearance and

qualityofwelds,andmethods usedincorrecting welding work,andwiththefollowing:
1.
Use materialsand methodsthat minimizedistortionand developstrengthand corrosion

resistance ofbasemetals.
2. Obtain fusionwithout undercut oroverlap.
3. Remove welding fluximmediately.
4.
Finish welds atexposed connections sonoroughness shows afterfinishing andcontours of
welded surfaces matchadjacent contours.
E.
Allsupports exposed toexternal weather condition shallbehotdipped galvanized withzinc

coatededges.
3.4ADJUSTING
A.
HangerAdjustment: Adjusthangersto distributeloads equallyon attachmentsand to achieve

indicated slopeofpipe.
3.5PAINTING
A.
TouchingUp:Clean field welds and abradedareas of shop paint. Paint exposedareas

immediatelyafter erecting hangers and supports.Use same materials as used for shop painting.
Comply withSSPCPA 1requirements fortouching upfieldpainted surfaces.
Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1. Applypaintbybrushorspraytoprovide aminimum dryfilmthickness of0.05mm.
B.
TouchingUp: Cleaningandtouchuppaintingof fieldwelds,boltedconnections, andabraded

areasofshoppaintonmiscellaneous metalarespecified inDivision 9Section "Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces:Clean welds, bolted connections,and abraded areas and apply galvanizing
repairpainttocomply withASTMA780.
ENDOFSECTION 15060
Pa g e | 7
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15070VENTILATING FANS
1.0
In-Line Centrifugal Fan

The housing shall utilize galvanized steel (aluminum optional some sizes) corner post
framework and panels. Units shall be equipped with three removable access panels. Units
shall be pre-wired to a junction box on the exterior and equipped with an electrical disconnect
switch. Two support angles shall be provided.
Statically & dynamically balanced backward inclined, centrifugal wheels shall be aluminum,
spark-resistant, non-overloading, & matched to deeply spun venturis. Motors shall be
continuous duty, ball bearing design, permanently lubricated, mounted out of the main
airstream, & furnished at the specified voltage, phase, & enclosure. Shafts shall be turned,
ground, polished, & rust protected. Heavy duty ball bearings are rated for a minimum L50 life
exceeding 200,000 hours. Pulleys shall be adjustable, cast iron, machined, keyed, securely
attached, & sized for 150% of the horsepower at its rated maximum speed.
Each fan shall bear the AMCA Licensed Ratings Seal for Air and Sound Performance, and
shall be UL and CSA listed.
2.0
Axial Flow Fan

Inline axial fan galvanized construction with aluminum impeller with adjustable pitch angle
blades.
Direct driven, TEFC motor Class H ins. 2-Speed motor is supplied on some fans as per
requirement. Smoke Fans are suitable for 300C/1hrs.
3.0
CENTRIFUGAL AIR BLOWER GENERAL

The centrifugal blower shall be of the rotatable belt driven/ direct driven type and SWSI/
DWDI. The blower shall be constructed of steel or aluminum with all seams continuously
welded for leak proof assembly. . All wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced and
shall be keyed to the shafts.
The blower shafts shall be AISI C-1040 or C1045 hot rolled and accurately turned and
polished. Close tolerances shall be maintained where the shaft makes contact with the
bearings.
All bearings on the blowers in arrangement 10 shall be grease lubricated, precision antifriction ball self aligning pillow block type.
All drives for belt driven fans shall be designed for 165% of rated horsepower capacities.
Motor drives shall be variable thru horsepower. Oil resistant non-static belts shall be provided.
In general all type of centrifugal blowers shall include housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings and
structural support members as a factory assembled unit.
Fan motor shall be TEFC enclosure and class F insulation suitable for ambient temperature of
50 deg C.
Each fan shall bear AMCA licensed rating seal for air & sound performance & shall be UL &
CSA listed.
4.0
SMALL DUCTED INLINE
Section 15070Ventilating Fans
Pag e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
All the fans shall be cabinet type which should house the fan assemblies.
Small inline ducted ventilators shall be direct drive, forward curved, centrifugal blower type.
Fan wheel shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be dynamically balanced. The
housing shall be constructed of aluminum and acoustically insulated for quite operation. An
integral aluminum back draft damper shall be standard. Blower and motor assembly shall be
easily removable from the housing without disturbing the ductwork .Fans mounted on the roof
should be with epoxy coating & should be weather proof.
The motor shall be permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection and shall
be factory tested prior to shipment. The unit shall be supplied with an internal wiring box and
receptacle. The fan rpm should not be more than 1400 rpm
The cabinet should be designed for quick transition from right angle discharge to top
discharge or into inline configuration without disturbing the power pack The discharge position
shall be adjustable by moving interchangeable panels supplied with removable fasteners and
should be field adjustable type Ceiling ventilators shall be furnished standard with a mould
white plastic, aerodynamically designed grill with 85% free area
Inline ducted/Ceiling ventilators shall be certified and licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for Air
and Sound Performance. Ceiling ventilator performance shall be based on tests and
procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 211 and comply with the
requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Fan sound power level ratings shall be
based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 311 and
comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. In-line ducted/ Ceiling
ventilators shall be UL 507 and additionally listed for UL 705 listed and shall be CSA listed.
5.0
FANS AXIAL
Axial flow fans shall be capable of giving the design flow when tested to B.S. 848
Each fan shall be supplied with a suitably rated contactor/starter/isolator of approved pattern.
Fan casings shall be constructed of mild steel plates with angle stiffeners with the casing hot
dip galvanized after manufacture. The inlets and outlets of the axial flow fans shall be flanged
for connection to the system.
An access door is to be provided on the casings of all fans. Casings shall cover both impeller
and motor so that fans can be removed without disturbing adjacent ductwork or other
components of the system. A flame proof external terminal box shall be fitted on the casing.
All lubrication points are to be extended to the outside of the casing and in a position that will
permit access in relation to the adjacent plant, services or building structure.
Impellers shall be die cast in aluminum alloy and X-rayed during manufacture. The impellers
shall be capable of running continuously at 20% in excess of the rated speed. The impeller
shall be keyed and locked on to the shaft, which shall be statically dynamically balances and
tested at over speed before dispatch from the manufacturers work.
Flexible connections shall be supplied and installed at both inlet and outlet of each fan.
The fan bearings shall be of the sleeve type wherever possible. The bearings are to be truly
aligned and rigidly mounted on to the casing.
Graphs of the performance curve of each fan are to be forwarded to the Consultant together
with a test report on the sound level at three diameters in a free field condition prior to the
order being confirmed.
Axial flow fans are to be driven by electric motors of commercially silent pattern carrying a
makers guarantee in this respect. The motors shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled.
Pag e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
All motors are to be positioned to permit effective ventilation of the motor and all components
parts of the fans and motor are to be suitable to withstand the temperature conditions
expected in the fan.
Electrical connections to the motors shall be in a totally enclosed terminal box secured to the
exterior of the casing. Wiring within the axial flow fans shall be suitable for the conditions
within the casings.
A suitable steel support is to be provided for each fan, and the frame is to be fabricated from
rolled steel channel with adequate cross members for bolting the fan in to position. The frame
shall be of welded construction with anti-vibration mountings
6.0
CENTRIFUGAL FANS
All centrifugal fans, handling more than 1000 CFM. (500 l/s) shall have backward inclined
blades, unless shown otherwise.
Provide access doors on the fan scroll. Doors shall be hinged, in reinforced angle frames and
provided with clamping devices. Minimum size shall be 18 X 14 (450mm X 350mm) or full
width of fan scroll, if scroll is less than 18 (450mm) wide.
Provide drain connections at the low point of fan scroll or where shown. Drains shall be 1
(25mm) pipe size half coupling welded in to the bottom of the scroll with a square headed,
threaded, brass plug.
Utility fans shall conform with the specification for centrifugal fans above with the exception of
the drive arrangement and belt guard. Drive shall be standard utility arrangement and belt
guard may be omitted if a hood is provided over the drive.
Centrifugal fans shall be in accordance with the Fan Schedule.
7.0
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

Fans shall be belt-driven in-line centrifugal units with backward inclined, aluminum fan wheels
in reinforced, zinc coated heavy gauge steel housings.
Motors shall be mounted on adjustable bases outside the air stream.
All internal components shall be accessible through removable or hinged access panels.
Provide disconnect switch mounted on the exterior of the fan casing.
Provide a matching wire mesh guard over the fan inlet and / or outlet if no ductwork is
connected at this location.
Twin fans shall have integral backdraft dampers, and two identical fans, motors and drives.
In-line centrifugal fans shall be in accordance with the Fan Schedule.
Fan casing shall be acoustically lined with 12mm thick acoustic insulation.
Fans shall be supplied with filter sections and washable filter media where noted. Filter
sections shall be closed couple to the fan.
Pag e | 3
Rajesh Building
Proposed (B+G+4) Residential withRetail
PlotNo.JVC10RMRA300, AlBarsha
SECTION 15075MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.ThisSection includes mechanical identification materials anddevices.
1.3SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data:Foridentification materials anddevices.
B.
Samples:Of color,letteringstyle,andgraphicrepresentation requiredforeachidentification

material anddevice.
C.
ValveSchedules:For each pipingsystem. Reproduceon standardsize bondpaper. Tabulate

valve number,pipingsystem,systemabbreviation as shownon tag, room or spacelocationof
valve, and variations for identification. Mark valves intended for emergencyshutoff and similar
specialuses. Besides mounted copies, furnishcopiesformaintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
A.
ComplywithASMEA13.1,"SchemefortheIdentification of PipingSystems" forletteringsize,

lengthofcolorfield,colors,andviewing anglesofidentification devices.
1.5SEQUENCING ANDSCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate installation ofidentifying devices with completion ofcovering and painting ofsurfaces
wheredevices aretobeapplied.
B. Installidentifying devices beforeinstalling acoustical ceilings andsimilarconcealment.
Section 15075Mechanical Identification
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1IDENTIFYING DEVICES ANDLABELS
A.
General: Manufacturer'sstandard products ofcategories and types required for each application
as referencedin other Division 15 Sections. If more than one type is specifiedfor application,
selection istheContractor's option,butprovide oneselection foreachproduct category.
B.
Equipment Nameplates:Metal permanentlyfastened to equipment with data engraved or

stamped. Nameplates forexternal andwetapplications tobestainless steel
1.
2.
Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and
powercharacteristics, labelsoftestedcompliances, andessential data.
Location: Accessible andvisible.
C.
PressureSensitive Pipe Markers:Manufacturer'sstandard preprinted,permanentadhesive,

colorcoded, pressuresensitivevinyltypewithpermanent adhesive, complying withASMEA13.1.
D.
Pipes, IncludingInsulation: Fullbandpipe markers, extending360 degrees around pipe at each

location.
E. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions asselected bytheEngineer.
1.
Arrows:Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodateboth

directions, orasseparate unit,oneachpipemarkertoindicate direction offlow.
F. SnaponPlasticPipeMarkers:Manufacturer's standardpreprinted, semirigid, snapon,color

coded,complying withASMEA13.1.
G.
Plastic Duct Markers:Manufacturer'sstandard colorcoded,laminated plastic.Comply with the

following colorcode:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Green:Coldair.
Yellow: Hotair.
Yellow/Green orGreen: Supplyair.
Blue:Exhaust, outside, return, andmixedair.
Forhazardous exhausts, usecolorsanddesignsrecommended byASMEA13.1.
Nomenclature: Include thefollowing:
a. Direction ofairflow.
b.
Ductservicesuchassupply,returnandexhaust.
c.
Ductorigin.
d. Ductdestination.
e. Designliterspersecond.
H.
Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standardcolorcoded,pressuresensitive, selfadhesive,vinyl tape,

atleast0.08mmthick.
1.
2.
Width: 40mm onpipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150mm; 65mm for larger
pipes.
Color:Comply withASMEA13.1,unlessotherwise indicated.
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
I.
Valve Tags:Stamped or engraved with 6 mm letters for piping system abbreviationand 13 mm

sequenced numbers. Include 4mmholeforfastener.
1.
2.
Material:0.8 mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum for indoor and internal applications,
andstainless steelforexternal andwetapplications.
Size:40mmdiameter, unlessotherwise indicated.
J. ValveTagFasteners: Brass,wirelink chain;beadedchain;orShooks.
K.
Access Panel Markers: 2 mm thick, engravedplasticlaminate markers,with abbreviatedterms

andnumbers corresponding toconcealed valve.Provide 3mmcenterholeforattachment.
L.
Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting onmasonry walls for each
pageofvalveschedule. Include screws.
1.
2.
Frame:Extruded aluminum.
Glazing: ASTMC1036,TypeI,Class1,GlazingqualityB,2.5mm,singlethickness glass.
M.
EngravedPlasticLaminate Signs: ASTMD709, TypeI, cellulose,paperbase,phenolicresin

laminateengravingstock;GradeES2,blacksurface,blackphenoliccore,with whitemelamine
subcore, unless otherwiseindicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for
mechanical fastening.
1.
2.
3.
Engraving: Engraver'sstandardletter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment

identification.
Thickness: 3mm,unlessotherwise indicated.
Fasteners: Selftapping, stainlesssteel screwsorcontacttype, permanent adhesive.
N.
PlasticizedTags:Preprintedor partially preprinted,accidentprevention tags, of plasticizedcard

stockwithmatfinishsuitable forwriting.
1.
2.
3.
Size:85mmby145mm.
Fasteners: Brassgrommets andwire.
Nomenclature:Largesizeprimarycaptionsuch as DANGER,CAUTION,or DO NOT
OPERATE.
O.
Letteringand Graphics: Coordinatenames, abbreviations,and other designationsused in

mechanicalidentificationwith correspondingdesignationsindicated. Use numbers,letters, and
terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance ofmechanical systems and
equipment.
1.
MultipleSystems:Identifyindividualsystemnumberandserviceif multiplesystemsof
samenameareindicated.
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
PART3EXECUTION
3.1LABELING ANDIDENTIFYING PIPINGSYSTEMS
A.
Installpipemarkers oneachsystem. Include arrows showing normaldirection offlow.
B.
MarkerType:Stenciled markers complying withASMEA13.1.
C. Fastenmarkers onpipesandinsulated pipessmaller than150mmODbyfollowing method:
1.
Tapedto pipe or insulationwith colorcodedplasticadhesivetape, not less than 20 mm

wide, lapped a minimumof 40mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference ofpipe.
D.Fastenmarkers onpipesandinsulated pipes150mmindiameter andlargerbyfollowing method:
1.
Tapedto pipe or insulationwith colorcodedplasticadhesivetape, not less than 40 mm

wide, lapped a minimumof 75mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference ofpipe.
E.
Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping isexposed in finished spaces; machine rooms;
accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, ceilings, and plenums; and exterior
nonconcealed locations according tothefollowing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Neareachvalveandcontroldevice.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs forfixtures andterminal units. Mark
eachpipeatbranch, whereflowpattern isnotobvious.
Nearpenetrations through walls,floors,ceilings, ornonaccessible enclosures.
Ataccessdoors,manholes, andsimilaraccesspointsthatpermitviewofconcealed piping.
Nearmajorequipment itemsandotherpointsoforigination andtermination.
Spaced at amaximum of15 mintervals along each run. Reduce intervals to7.5m inareas
ofcongested pipingandequipment.
Onpipingaboveremovable acoustical ceilings, exceptomitintermediately spacedmarkers.
All presently usedservicesshallbe classifiedundertheaforesaidcategories as deemed
relevant.If new services are identified and cannot be logically classified under any of the
aforesaid categories, then such services shall beprovided with anew, separate abbreviated
standard, asapproved bytheEngineer.
Unless otherwisedirected by the Engineer, the abbreviationsshall be imprinted clearly in
English letters of 12 mm height and 3 mm depth, as per lettering sample shown, on a 100
mm diameter,10 mm thick circular castaluminumstud which hasan insert length of at
least 100 mm, to allow itto be set into concrete.The insert section shall have athickness
sufficient topreventbreakoffofthestudandshallbeprovidedwithbackcut
indentations to ensurethattheroutemarkeris firmlyheldin placeby thesurrounding
concrete.
3.2VALVETAGS
F. Install onvalves andcontrol devices inpiping systems, except check valves, valves within factory
fabricatedequipmentunits, plumbingfixture supplystops, shutoffvalves,faucets,convenience
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
andlawnwatering hoseconnections, andHVACterminaldevicesandsimilarroughingin

connections ofenduse fixtures andunits.Listtaggedvalvesinvalveschedule.
G.
ValveTagApplication Schedule:Tagvalvesaccording tosize,shape,colorscheme,andwith

captions similartothoseindicated inthefollowing:
H.TagMaterial: Brassoraluminum.
I. TagSizeandShape:According tothefollowing:
1.
2.
FireProtection: 40mm,round.
Sprinkler: 40mm,round.
J.TagColor:According tothefollowing:
1.
2.
FireProtection: Red.
Sprinkler: Red
J. LetterColor:According tothefollowing:
1.
2.
FireProtection: White.
Sprinkler: White.
K. Installmounted valveschedule ineachmajorequipment room.
3.2EQUIPMENT SIGNSANDMARKERS
A.
Install engraved plasticlaminate signsorequipment markers onorneareachmajoritemof

mechanical equipment. Include signsforthefollowing generalcategories ofequipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Maincontrol andoperating valves, including safety devices andhazardous unitssuchasgas

outlets.
Firedepartment hosevalvesandhosestations.
Meters, gages,thermometers, andsimilarunits.
Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, andsimilarmotordriven units.
Heat exchangers,coils, evaporators,cooling towers, heat recoveryunits, and similar
equipment.
Fans,blowers, primarybalancing dampers, andmixingboxes.
Packaged HVAC centralstationand zonetypeunits, Variable Air Volume (VAV) boxes, fan
coilunits,controls andcomponents.
Tanksandpressure vessels.
Strainers, filters,humidifiers, watertreatment systems, andsimilarequipment.
B.
Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, toreduce amount oftext inexposed sign outside
concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed above acoustical ceiling or similar
concealment.
1.
Identify operational valves and similar minor equipmentitems located in unoccupied

spaces, including machine rooms,byinstalling plasticized tags.
C.
DuctSystems:Identifyair supply,return,exhaust,intake,andreliefductswith ductmarkers,

provide arrowsshowing serviceanddirection offlow.
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1.
Location:Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at
maximum intervals of15mineach space where ducts areexposed orconcealed by
removable ceilingsystem.
3.3ADJUSTING ANDCLEANING
A.
Relocatemechanicalidentificationmaterialsand devicesthat have becomevisuallyblockedby

workofthisorotherDivisions.
B. Cleanfacesofidentification devicesandglassframesofvalvecharts.
ENDOFSECTION 15075
Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15081DUCTINSULATION
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.This Sectionincludessemi rigid andflexibleduct,plenuminsulation;insulatingcements;field

applied jackets;accessories andattachments; andsealingcompounds.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Division 7 Section"ThroughPenetration FirestopSystems"for firestopping materialsand

requirements forpenetrations through fireandsmokebarriers.
Division 15Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for
pumps, tanks,hydronic specialties, andotherequipment.
Division 15Section"PipeInsulation" forinsulation forpipingsystems.
Division 15Section"MetalDucts"forductliner.
A.
Materialsshall be compatibleand shall not contributeto corrosion,soften, or otherwiseattack

surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry state. Materials to be used on
stainlesssteel surfaces shallmeetASTMC795requirements. Materials shallbeasbestos free.
B. Thermalinsulationsystem materials shall benoncombustible,asdefined byNFPA 220.

Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermalinsulation materials, except cellular
elastomers, shall have amaximum flamespread classification (FSC) of25and asmokedeveloped
classification (SDC) of 50. Flamecontributed classification (FCC) shall be as specified for the
application. Thesemaximum values shallbedetermined inaccordance withASTME84andNFPA
255.
C.
Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall be nonflammablein their wet state.Adhesives, coatings,
and sealants shall have published orcertified temperature ratings suitable for the entire range of
working temperatures normalforthesurfaces towhichtheyaretobeapplied.
1.4SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, andjackets (both factory andfield applied,
ifany),foreachtypeofproduct indicated.
B.ShopDrawings: Showfabrication andinstallation detailsforthefollowing:

Section 15081DuctInsulation
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1.
2.
3.
Removable insulation sections ataccess panels.

Application offieldapplied jackets.
Applications atlinkages forcontroldevices.
C.
Samples:For each type of insulation, adhesives, coatings, and fieldapplied jacket. Identify each
Sample, describingproductand intendeduse. Submit 300 mm square sections of each sample
material.
1.
Manufacturer'sColor Charts: Show the fullrange ofcolors available for each type offield
applied finishmaterial indicated.
D.
MaterialTest Reports: Froma qualifiedtestingagencyacceptableto the Engineer,indicating,

interpreting,and certifying test results for complianceof insulationmaterials, sealers,
attachments, cements, andjacketswithrequirements indicated. Includedatesoftests.
E. Installer Certificates: SignedbytheContractor certifying thatinstallers complywithrequirements.
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have completed successfullyacraft training

program certified byanagencyacceptable totheEngineer.
B.
FireTestResponse Characteristics: As determined by testingmaterialsidenticalto those

specified inthisSection according toASTME84,UL723, NFPA 225orANSI A.2.5, byatesting and
inspectingagency acceptableto the Engineer. Factory label insulationand jacket materialsand
sealer and cement material containers with appropriatemarkings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
2.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flamespread ratingof25orless,andsmokedevelopedrating

of50orless.
Insulation InstalledOutdoors:Flamespread ratingof75orless,andsmokedeveloped
ratingof150orless.
C.
Mockups:Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish listed
below to demonstratequality of insulation application and finishes.Build mockups according to
thefollowing requirements, usingmaterials indicated forthecompleted Work:
1.
Includethefollowing mockups:
a. One(1)3msectionofrectangular straight duct.

b.
One(1)90degreesquare elbowandone90degreeradiuselbow.
c.
One(1)branchtakeoff.
d. One(1)transition fitting.
e. Four(4)support hangers.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Build mockups with cutawaysections to allow observationof applicationdetails for

insulation materials, mastics, attachments, andjackets.
Buildmockups inthelocation indicated or,ifnotindicated, asdirected bytheEngineer.
Notifythe Engineer7 days in advanceof datesand timeswhenmockupswill be
constructed.
Obtain theEngineer's approval ofmockups beforestarting insulation application.
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
6.
7.
8.
Maintain mockups during constructionin an undisturbedcondition as a standard for

judging thecompleted Work.
Demolish andremove mockups whendirected.
Approvedmockupsmaybecomepartof thecompletedWorkif undisturbed at timeof
A.
Packaging: Shipinsulation materials incontainers marked bymanufacturer withappropriate

ASTMorotherapproved specification designation, typeandgrade,andmaximum use
temperature.
1.7COORDINATION
A.Coordinate clearance requirements withductInstaller forinsulation application.
1.8SCHEDULING
A.
Scheduleinsulationapplicationafter testing duct systems. Insulationapplicationmay begin on

segments ofductsthathavesatisfactory testresults.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1INSULATION MATERIALS
A.Insulationconductanceshall be maximumvalues, as tested at any point, not an average.

Insulation conductancefound by test to exceed the stipulated maximum shall either be replaced
oraugmented byanadditional thickness tobringittotherequired maximum conductance.
B.Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:Closedcell, sponge or expandedrubbermaterials.

Comply withASTMC534,TypeIIforsheetmaterials.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Adhesive: Solventbase,contactadhesive asrecommended byinsulation material

manufacturer.
UltravioletProtectiveCoating: Asrecommended byinsulation material manufacturer.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mK at20deg.C(68degF).
Density:65to80kg/m3.
WaterVaporPermeability :0.15perminch.
NoiseReduction: Upto27Lfor20mmthickinsulation.
2.2FIELDAPPLIED JACKETS
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.
General: ASTMC921,Type1,maximum moisture vaportransmission 0.02perms,(measured

beforefactoryapplication or installation), minimumpunctureresistance50 Beachunitson all
surfaces.Minimumtensilestrength,6.1 N/mmwidth. Jacketsusedon insulationexposedin
finished areasshallhavewhitefinishsuitable forpainting without sizing.
B.AluminumJacket: Aluminumjacketsshall be corrugated,embossedor smoothsheet,ASTMB

209M, andhaving anintegrally bonded moisture barrier overentire surface incontact with
insulation. Corrugated aluminum jacketshallnotbeusedoutdoors.
1.
2.
Finish and Thickness:Stucco embossed finish, 0.6 mm thick for indoor installation and 0.8
mmforoutdoor installation unlessotherwise noted.
Moisture Barrier: 0.025mmthick,heatbonded polyethylene andkraftpaper.
2.3ACCESSORIES ANDATTACHMENTS
A.

stainlesssteel surfaces shallmeet ASTM C795requirements. Materials shallbeasbestos freeand
conform tothefollowing.
B.
AdhesiveAttached Anchor PinsandSpeedWashers: Galvanized steelplate,pin,andwasher

manufacturedfor attachment toduct and plenum with adhesive.Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.
1.
Adhesive:Recommendedbythe anchor pin manufacturerasappropriate for surface

temperatures ofducts, plenums, andbreechings; andtoachieve aholding capacity of45kg
fordirectpullperpendicular totheadhered surface.
C. Adhesives:
1.
CellularElastomer: Adhesive forcellularelastomer insulation shallbea solventcutback
chloroprene elastomer conforming toASTM C916, Type I,and shall be atype approved by
themanufacturer ofthecellular elastomer fortheintended use.
D.Coatings:
1.
2.
Outdoor andIndoorNonVaporBarrier Finishing: Coatings foroutdoor andindoornon

vaporbarrier finishing of insulation surfaces shall be pigmented polymer emulsion
recommended by the insulationmaterial manufacturer for the surfaceto be coatedand
shallbeappliedtothespecified dryfilm thickness.
Cellular Elastomer Insulation: Finishcoating forcellular elastomer insulation shallbea
polyvinylchloride lacquerapprovedby the manufacturerof the cellular elastomerfor the
intended use.
PART3EXECUTION
3.1EXAMINATION
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.
Examinesubstratesand conditionsfor compliancewith requirements for installationand other

conditions affecting performance ofinsulation application.
B. Proceed withinstallation onlyafterunsatisfactory conditions havebeencorrected.
3.2PREPARATION
A.
SurfacePreparation:Cleanand dry surfacesto receiveinsulation. Removematerialsthat will

adversely affectinsulation application.
3.3GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according tothe manufacturer'swritten

instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of
ductsandfittings.
B.
Refer toschedules atthe end ofthis Section formaterials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required foreachductsystem.
C.
Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable fortheservice. Use accessories
thatdonotcorrode, soften,orotherwise attackinsulation orjacketineitherwetordrystate.
D.Applymultiple layersofinsulation withlongitudinal andendseamsstaggered.
E.
Sealjoints andseams with vaporretarder mastic oninsulation indicated toreceive avapor

retarder.
F. Keepinsulation materials dryduringapplication andfinishing.
G.
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended bytheinsulation material manufacturer.
H.Applyinsulation withtheleastnumber ofjointspractical.
I.
Applyinsulationover fittingsand specialties,with continuousthermaland vaporretarder

integrity, unlessotherwise indicated.
J.
Hangers andAnchors: Where vapor retarder isindicated, sealpenetrations ininsulation at

hangers,supports,anchors,and other projectionswith vaporretarder mastic. Apply insulation
continuously through hangers andaroundanchorattachments.
K.
Insulation Terminations:Forinsulation application where vapor retarders areindicated, sealends

withacompound recommended bytheinsulation material manufacturer tomaintain vapor
retarder.
L.Applyinsulation withintegraljacketsasfollows:
1.
2.
Pulljackettightandsmooth.
JointsandSeams:Coverwithtapeandvaporretarderasrecommended byinsulation
material manufacturer tomaintain vaporseal.
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
3.
VaporRetarderMastics:Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and

jointsandatendsadjacent toductflangesandfittings.
M.
Cut insulation according tomanufacturer'swritten instructions toprevent compressing insulation

tolessthan75percent ofitsnominal thickness.
N. Installvaporretarder masticonductsandplenums scheduled toreceivevaporretarders.
1.
2.
Ducts withVapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing atseams andsealwithvapor

retarder mastic andpressuresensitivetape having same facing asinsulation.Repair
punctures, tears,andpenetrations withtapeormastictomaintain vaporretarder seal.
Ducts without Vapor Retarders:Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with
outward clinching staplesandpressuresensitivetapehavingsamefacingasinsulation.
O.
RoofPenetrations:Applyinsulation forinteriorapplications to a pointevenwithtopof roof

flashing.
1.
2.
3.
Sealpenetrations withvaporretarder mastic.

Applyinsulation forexterior applications tightlyjoinedtointerior insulation ends.
Sealinsulation toroofflashing withvaporretarder mastic.
P.
InteriorWall and PartitionPenetrations: Apply insulationcontinuouslythroughwalls and

partitions, exceptfirerated wallsandpartitions.
Q.
FireRatedWall and PartitionPenetrations: Terminateinsulationat fire/smokedampersleeves

forfirerated wallandpartition penetrations.
R.
Floor Penetrations: Terminateinsulationat undersideof floor assemblyand at floor support at

topoffloor.
1.
For insulation indicated tohave vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation ends
withvaporretarder mastic.
3.4FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
A.
Flexible elastomericcellular insulation shall be installed with seams and joints sealed with
rubberized contact adhesive. Insulation with preapplied adhesive is not permitted. Flexible
elastomericcellular insulationshall not be used on surfacesgreater than 93 degrees C.Seams
shallbestaggered when applying multiple layers ofinsulation. Insulation exposed toweather and
not shown to have jacketingshall be protectedwith two coats of UV resistantfinish as
recommended bythemanufacturer aftertheadhesive isdry. Abrush coating ofadhesive shallbe
applied tobothbuttendstobejoined andtobothslitsurfaces tobesealed. Theadhesive shallbe
allowedtosetuntildrytotouchbuttackyunderslightpressurebeforejoiningthesurfaces.
Insulationsealsat seamsand jointsshallnot be capableof beingpulledapartone hourafter
application. Insulation thatcanbepulledapartonehourafterinstallation shallbereplaced.
B.Applyinsulation toductsandplenums asfollows:
1.
Followthemanufacturer's writteninstructions forapplying insulation.
Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
2.
3.
4.
5.
Seal longitudinalseamsand end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

Cement toavoidopenings ininsulation thatwillallowpassage ofairtotheductandplenum
surface.
Installinsulation sheetsofthelargestmanageable size.
Applyfullcoverage ofadhesive tothesurfaces ofductandtotheinsulation.
Buttinsulation jointsfirmlytogether andapplyadhesive toinsulation edgesatjoints.
3.5FINISHES
A.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:After adhesive hasfully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
3.6DUCTSYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A.Insulation materials andthicknesses arespecified inschedules attheendofthisSection.
B.Materialsand thicknessesfor systems listed below are specifiedin schedulesat the end of this
Section.
C. Insulate thefollowing plenums andductsystems:
1.
2.
3.
Indoorconcealed supply, return, andoutsideair ductwork.

Indoorexposed supply, return, andoutsideair ductwork.
Outdoor exposed supplyandreturnductwork
D.
ItemsNotInsulated: Unlessotherwise indicated, donotapplyinsulation tothefollowing systems,

materials, andequipment
1.
Factoryinsulated flexible ducts.
2.
Factoryinsulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, andfilterboxesandsections.
3.
Flexibleconnectors.
4.
Vibrationcontrol devices.
5.
Testing agencylabelsandstamps.
6.
Nameplates anddataplates.
7.
Accesspanelsanddoorsinairdistribution systems.
3.6INDOOR DUCTANDPLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A.
Service: Supplyair ducts.

1.
2.
3.
4.
Material: Flexible elastomeric.

Thickness: 19mm.
FieldApplied Jacket:Aluminum jacketwhereexposed tovieworinmechanical rooms.
VaporRetarder Required: No.
B.Service: Returnair ducts.

1.
2.
3.

Thickness: 19mm.
Pa g e | 7
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
4.
C. Service: Outsideair ducts.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Thickness: 32mm.
3.7OUTDOOR DUCTANDPLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A.
Service: Supplyair ducts.

1.
2.

Thickness: 32mm.
a. FieldApplied Jacket:Aluminum jacket,0.8mmthick.
3.
B.Service: Returnair ducts.

1.
2.

Thickness: 32mm.
a. FieldApplied Jacket:Aluminum jacket,0.8mmthick.
3.
ENDOFSECTION 15081
Pa g e | 8
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15083PIPEINSULATION
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.ThisSection includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field
applied jackets;accessories andattachments; andsealingcompounds.
1.
Division 7 Section"ThroughPenetration FirestopSystems"for firestopping materialsand
requirements forpenetrations through fireandsmokebarriers.
2.
Division 15Section"DuctInsulation" forinsulation forductsandplenums.
3.
Division 15Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for
pumps, tanks,hydronic specialties, andotherequipment.
4.
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection
saddles.
5.
Division 15SectionHydronic Piping forPreinsulated Piping.
A.

stainlesssteel surfaces shallmeetASTMC795requirements. Materials shallbeasbestos free.
B. Thermalinsulationsystem materials shall benoncombustible,asdefined byNFPA 220.

Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermalinsulation materials, except cellular
elastomers, shallhavea flamespread classification (FSC)of25,anda smokedeveloped
classification (SDC)of50. These maximum values shallbedetermined inaccordance withASTME
84andNFPA255.Coatings andsealants shallbenonflammable intheirwetstate.
1.4SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, andjackets (both factory andfield applied,
ifany),foreachtypeofproduct indicated.
B.ShopDrawings: Showfabrication andinstallation detailsforthefollowing:
1.
2.
Application ofprotective shields,saddles, andinsertsatpipehangersforeachtypeof

insulation andhanger.
Attachment andcovering ofheattraceinsideinsulation.
Section 15083PipeInsulation
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
3.
4.
5.
6.
Insulation application atpipeexpansion jointsforeachtypeofinsulation.

Insulationapplicationat elbows,fittings,flanges,valves,and specialtiesfor each type of
insulation.
Removable insulation atpipingspecialties andequipment connections.
Application offieldapplied jackets.
C.
Samples: For each type of insulationand jacket. Identify each Sample, describingproductand
intended use.SubmitSamples inthefollowing sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Preformed PipeInsulation Materials: 300mmlongbyDN50.

SheetFormInsulation Materials: 300mmsquare.
JacketMaterials: 300mmlongbyDN50.
Manufacturer'sColor Charts: Show the fullrange ofcolors available for each type offield
applied finishmaterial indicated.
D.
MaterialTest Reports: Froma qualifiedtestingagencyacceptableto the Engineer,indicating,

interpreting,and certifying test results for complianceof insulationmaterials, sealers,
attachments, cements, andjacketswithrequirements indicated. Includedatesoftests.
E. Installer Certificates: SignedbytheContractor certifying thatinstallers complywithrequirements.
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed acraft training
program certified byanagencyacceptable totheEngineer.
B.
FireTestResponse Characteristics: As determined by testingmaterialsidenticalto those

specified inthisSection according toASTME84,UL723, NFPA 225orANSI A.2.5, byatesting and
inspectingagency acceptableto the Engineer. Factory label insulationand jacket materialsand
sealer and cement material containers with appropriatemarkings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
2.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flamespread ratingof25orless,andsmokedevelopedrating

of50orless.
Insulation InstalledOutdoors:Flamespread ratingof75orless,andsmokedeveloped
ratingof150orless.
C.
Mockups:Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish listed
below to demonstratequality of insulation application and finishes.Build mockups according to
thefollowing requirements, usingmaterials indicated forthecompleted Work:
1.
Includethefollowing mockups:
a. One(1)3msectionofDN50straight pipe.
b. One(1)90degreeelbow.
c. One(1)teefitting.
d. One(1)DN50/DN100valve.
e.
Four(4) support hangers, including hangershieldandinsert.
f.
One(1)strainer withremovable portion ofinsulation.
g. One(1)reducer.
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Build mockups with cutawaysections to allow observationof applicationdetails for

insulation materials, mastics, attachments, andjackets.
Buildmockups inthelocation indicated or,ifnotindicated, asdirected bytheEngineer.
Notifythe Engineer7 daysin advanceof datesand timeswhenmockupswill be
constructed.
Obtain theEngineer's approval ofmockups beforestarting insulation application.
Demolish andremove mockups whendirected.
Approvedmockupsmaybecomepartof thecompletedWorkif undisturbed at timeof
A.
Packaging: Shipinsulation materials incontainers marked bymanufacturer withappropriate

ASTMorotherapproved specification designation, typeandgrade,andmaximum use
temperature.
1.7COORDINATION
A.Coordinatesize and location of supports, hangers, and insulationshields specifiedin Division 15

Section"Hangers andSupports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements withpipingInstaller forinsulation application.
1.8SCHEDULING
A.
Scheduleinsulationapplicationafter testing piping systems and, where required,after installing

and testing heattracetape. Insulationapplicationmay begin on segmentsof piping that have
satisfactory testresults.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1INSULATION MATERIALS
A.Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:Closedcell, sponge or expandedrubbermaterials.

Comply withASTMC534,TypeIfortubular materials andTypeIIforsheetmaterials.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Adhesive:Solventbase,contactadhesive,as recommended by insulationmaterial

manufacturer.
UltravioletProtectiveCoating: Asrecommended byinsulation manufacturer.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mKat20deg.C(68deg.F).
Density: 65to80kg/m3.
WaterVaporPermeability: 0.15perminch.
NoiseReduction upto27Lfor20mmthickinsualtion.
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
B.
PrefabricatedThermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTMC450 for dimensions used in
preforming insulation tocovervalves,elbows, tees,andflanges.
2.2FIELDAPPLIED JACKETS
A.
General: ASTMC921,Type1,maximum moisture vaportransmission 0.02perms,(measured

beforefactoryapplication or installation), minimumpunctureresistance50 Beachunitson all
surfaces.Minimumtensilestrength,6.1 N/mmwidth. Jacketsusedon insulationexposedin
finished areasshallhavewhitefinishsuitable forpainting without sizing.
B.
AluminumJacket:Aluminumroll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated
sizes. Comply withASTMB209M, 3003alloy, H14temper. Aluminum shallbemade from
smooth polished Temper Alloy.Straps shall be AISI 300 series corrosionresistant steel, 15 mils
(0.381 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, for pipe under 12 inch (DN300) diameter and 3/4inch
(20mm)wideforpipeover12inch(DN300) diameter.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Finish and Thickness:Stucco embossed finish 0.6 mm thick for indoor installationand 0.8
mmforoutdoor installation, unlessotherwise indicated.
Moisture Barrier: 0.025mmthick,heatbonded polyethylene andkraftpaper.
Elbows: Preformed, 45and90degree, short andlongradius elbows; samematerial,
finish, and thickness as jacket. Elbows shall be deepdrawn,dieshaped,2piece
components forlongradius.
Pipejacketsshallhavenotlessthan2inch(50mm) longitudinal andcircumferential lap.
Sealant for longitudinal and butt joints ofaluminum jacketing shall beanaluminum
pigmented, butyl,polymer sealant withhighbutyl solids.
2.3ACCESSORIES ANDATTACHMENTS
A.Bands: 19mmwide,inoneofthefollowing materials compatible withjacket:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Stainless Steel:ASTMA666,Type304;0.5mmthick.
Galvanized Steel:0.13mmthick.
Aluminum: 0.18mmthick.
Brass:0.25mmthick.
NickelCopper Alloy:0.13mmthick.
PART3EXECUTION
3.1EXAMINATION
A.
Examinesubstratesand conditionsfor compliancewith requirements for installationand other

conditions affecting performance ofinsulation application.
B. Proceed withinstallation onlyafterunsatisfactory conditions havebeencorrected.
3.2PREPARATION
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.
Surface Preparation:Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces.Remove materials that will
adversely affectinsulation application.
3.3GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according tothe manufacturer'swritten

instructions; withsmooth,straight,andevensurfaces;freeof voidsthroughout thelengthof
piping, including fittings, valves,andspecialties.
B.
Insulation materials shall be installed in afirst class manner with smooth and even surfaces, with
jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Insulation shall be
continuous throughallsleevesandopenings.Anchors, supportsandothermetalprojections
through insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed for a minimum length of
150mm.
C.
Refer toschedules attheend ofthis Section formaterials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required foreachpipingsystem.
D.
Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable fortheservice. Use accessories
thatdonotcorrode, soften,orotherwise attackinsulation orjacketineitherwetordrystate.
E. Applyinsulation withlongitudinal seamsattopandbottomofhorizontal piperuns.

F. Applymultiple layersofinsulation withlongitudinal andendseamsstaggered.
G.Donotweldbrackets, clips,orotherattachment devicestopiping,fittings, andspecialties.
H.
Sealjoints andseams with vaporretarder mastic oninsulation indicated toreceive avapor

retarder.
I. Keepinsulation materials dryduringapplication andfinishing.
J.
Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended bytheinsulation material manufacturer.
K. Applyinsulation withtheleastnumber ofjointspossible.
L.
Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vaporretarder
integrity,unlessotherwiseindicated.Referto specialinstructions for applyinginsulationover
fittings, valves,andspecialties.
M.
Hangers andAnchors: Where vapor retarder isindicated, sealpenetrations ininsulation at

hangers, supports, anchors, andotherprojections withvaporretarder mastic.
1.
2.
Applyinsulation continuously through hangers andaround anchor attachments.

For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs at least300 mm from pointof attachmentto pipe and taperinsulationends. Seal
tapered ends with a compoundrecommendedby the insulation material manufacturerto
maintain vaporretarder.
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
3.
4.
Installinsertmaterialsandapplyinsulation to tightlyjointheinsert.Sealinsulationto
insulation inserts with adhesive orsealing compound recommendedby the insulation
material manufacturer.
Cover insertswith jacket materialmatchingadjacentpipe insulation. Install shieldsover
jacket, arrangedto protect the jacket from tear or punctureby the hanger,support,and
shield.
N.
InsulationTerminations:For insulationapplication wherevaporretardersare indicated,taper

insulationends. Seal taperedends with a compoundrecommended by the insulationmaterial
manufacturer tomaintain vaporretarder.
O. Applyadhesives andmasticsatthemanufacturer's recommended coverage rate.

P. Applyinsulation withintegraljacketsasfollows:
1.
2.
3.
Pulljackettightandsmooth.
Circumferential Joints: Coverwith75mmwidestrips,ofsamematerial asinsulation jacket.
Securestripswith adhesiveand outwardclinchingstaplesalongboth edgesof strip and
spaced100mmo.c.
Longitudinal Seams:Overlapjacketseamsat least40mm. Applyinsulationwith
longitudinalseamsat bottomof pipe. Cleanand dry surfaceto receiveselfsealinglap.
Staplelapswithoutward clinching staplesalongedgeat100mmo.c.
4.
5.
VaporRetarderMastics:Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and

jointsandatendsadjacent toflanges,unions, valves,andfittings.
At penetrations in jacketsfor thermometers and pressuregages,fill and seal voidswith
vaporretarder mastic.
Q.
Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrationsof belowgradeexterior walls, terminateinsulation

flushwithmechanical sleeveseal.Sealterminations withvaporretarder mastic.
R. InteriorWallandPartition Penetrations: Applyinsulation continuously through wallsandfloors.
S.
FireRated Wall andPartition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations of

firerated wallsandpartitions.
1.
Firestopping andfireresistive jointsealersarespecified inDivision 7Section"Through

Penetration Firestop Systems."
T. FloorPenetrations: Applyinsulation continuously through floorassembly.
1.
For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vaporretardermastic where floor
supports penetrate vaporretarder.
3.4FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
A.Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 150 mm and less.
Type IIsheet insulation used onpipes larger than 150mm shall not bestretched around thepipe.
Onpipes largerthan 300mm,theinsulation shallbeadhered directly tothepipeonthelower 1/3
ofthe pipe. Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation.Sweat fittings
shallbeinsulated withmitercut pieces thesamesizeasonadjacent piping. Screwed fittings shall
Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from mitercut pieces and shall be overlapped
andsealedtotheadjacent pipeinsulation.
B.Applyinsulation tostraight pipesandtubesasfollows:
1.
2.
Followmanufacturer's writteninstructions forapplying insulation.

Seal longitudinalseamsand end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement toavoidopenings ininsulation thatwillallowpassage ofairtothepipesurface.
C. Applyinsulation toflangesasfollows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Applypipeinsulation toouterdiameter ofpipeflange.

Make width of insulationsegment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twicethethickness ofthepipeinsulation.
Fillvoidsbetween innercircumference offlangeinsulation andoutercircumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments withcutsections ofsheet insulation ofthe same thickness
aspipeinsulation.
Secure insulationto flanges and seal seams with manufacturer'srecommendedadhesive.
D.Applyinsulation tofittings andelbowsasfollows:

1.
2.
Applymitered sections ofpipeinsulation.

Secureinsulationmaterialsand seal seamswith manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
E. Applyinsulation tovalvesandspecialties asfollows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Apply preformedvalve covers manufactured of the same materialas pipe insulationand

attached according tothemanufacturer's writteninstructions.
Applycutsegments ofpipeandsheet insulation tovalvebody. Arrange insulation topermit
accessto packingand to allowvalveoperationwithoutdisturbinginsulation.For check
valves, fabricate removable sections ofinsulation arranged toallow access tostainer
basket.
Applyinsulation toflangesasspecified forflangeinsulation application.
Secure insulationto valves and specialtiesand seal seams with manufacturer's
recommendedadhesive.Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of
airtothepipesurface.
3.5FIELDAPPLIED JACKETAPPLICATION
A.Apply metaljacketwhereindicated,with 50mmoverlapat longitudinalseamsand end joints.

Overlaplongitudinalseams arrangedto shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproofsealant
recommendedby insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainlesssteelbands 300 mm o.c.
andatendjoints.
3.6FINISHES
Pa g e | 7
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.
Flexible Elastomeric ThermalInsulation: Afteradhesive hasfullycured,apply2coatsofthe

insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
3.7PIPINGSYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A.Insulation materials andthicknesses arespecified inschedules attheendofthisSection.
B.
Items NotInsulated: Unless otherwise indicated, donotapply insulation tothefollowing systems,

materials, andequipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Flexibleconnectors.
Vibrationcontrol devices.
Firesuppression piping.
Drainage pipinglocated incrawlspaces, unlessotherwise indicated.
Belowgrade piping,unlessotherwise indicated.
Chromeplated pipesandfittings, unlesspotential forpersonnel injury.
Airchambers, unions, strainers, checkvalves,plugvalves,andflowregulators.
3.8FIELDQUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspection: Engagea qualified inspection agencyacceptable totheEngineer, toperformthe

followingfield qualitycontrol inspections, afterinstallinginsulationmaterials,jackets,and
finishes, todetermine compliance withrequirements:
B.
Inspection:Perform the following field qualitycontrol inspections, after installing insulation

materials, jackets, andfinishes, todetermine compliance withrequirements:
1.
2.
3.
Inspectfittingsandvalvesrandomly selected bytheEngineer.

Remove fitting covers from20elbows or1percent ofelbows, whichever isless, forvarious
pipesizes.
Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whicheveris less, for various
pipesizes.
C.
Insulationapplicationswill be considereddefectiveif sampleinspectionrevealsnoncompliance

withrequirements.RemovedefectiveWorkandreplacewithnewmaterialsaccordingto the
Specification.
D.Reinstallinsulationand covers on fittingsand valves uncoveredfor inspectionaccordingto the

Specification.
3.9INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.Refertoinsulation application schedules forrequired insulation materials.
B.
Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges andmaterial, thickness,
andjacketrequirements.
3.10INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

Pa g e | 8
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.Service: Condensate drainpiping.
1.
2.
Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.

Insulation Thickness: 19mm.
3.
4.

B.Service: Chilledwater supplyandreturn.
1.
2.

Insulation Thickness: Applythefollowing insulation thicknesses:
a. Pipe,sizesuptoDN50:19mm.
b. PipesizeslargerthenDN50:25mm
3.
4.

VaporRetarder Required: No
C. Service: Refrigerant suction andhotgas piping.
1.
2.

Pipe,allsizes:25mm.
3.
4.
FieldApplied Jacket:None.
VaporRetarder Required: No
3.11EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
This applicationscheduleis for abovegroundinsulationoutside the building.Loosefillinsulation,for

belowground piping,isspecified inDivision2pipingdistribution Sections.
A.Service: Refrigerant suction.
5.
6.

a. Pipe,allsizes:32mm.
7.
8.
FieldApplied Jacket:Aluminum jacket,0.8mmthick

B.Service: Chilledwater supplyandreturn.
9.
10.

a. Pipe,allsizes:38mm.
Pa g e | 9
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
11.
12.
FieldApplied Jacket:Aluminum jacket,0.8mmthick

VaporRetarder Required: Yes.
ENDOFSECTION 15083
Pa g e | 10
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15100VALVES
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.ThisSection includes generaldutyvalvescommon toseveralmechanical pipingsystems.

B.RelatedSections: Thefollowing Sectionscontainrequirements thatrelatetothisSection:
1. Specialpurpose valvesarespecified inDivision 15pipingsystemSections.
2. Valvetagsandchartsarespecified inDivision 15Section "Mechanical Identification."
1.3SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and temperature
classification, endconnection details,seatingmaterials, trimmaterialandarrangement,
dimensions and required clearances, andinstallation instructions. Include listindicating valve and
itsapplication.
B.
Listing ofProduct Installation shall besubmitted forvalve assemblies indicating atleast 5installed
units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for aminimum of 5
years.
C.
Maintenance data for valvesto includein the operationand maintenance manualspecifiedin

Division 1. Includedetailedmanufacturer's instructions onadjusting, servicing, disassembling,
andrepairing.
A.SingleSourceResponsibility: Comply with the requirementsspecifiedin Division 1 Section

"Product Requirements", under"Source Limitations" Paragraph.
B.
ASMECompliance: ComplywithASMEB31.9forbuildingservicespipingandASMEB31.1for
powerpiping.
C. MSSCompliance: Comply withthevarious MSSStandard Practice documents referenced.
Section 15100 Valves
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.Prepare valvesforshipping asfollows:
1. Protectinternalpartsagainstrustandcorrosion.
2. Protectthreads, flangefaces,grooves, andweldends.
3. Setglobeandgatevalvesclosedtoprevent rattling.
4. Setballandplugvalvesopentominimize exposure offunctional surfaces.
5. Setbutterfly valvesclosed orslightlyopen.
6. Blockcheckvalvesineitherclosedoropenposition.
B.Usethefollowing precautions duringstorage:
1. Maintain valveendprotection.
2.
Storeindoorsandmaintainvalvetemperature higherthanambientdewpoint
temperature.If outdoorstorageis necessary,storevalvesoff the groundin watertight
enclosures.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1BASIC,COMMON FEATURES
A.Design: Risingstemorrisingoutside screwandyokestems,exceptasspecified below.
1.
Nonrising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of rising
stems.
B.
Internal andexternal partsofallcastiron andductileiron valves installed under ground, in

trenches,valvechambersor exposedto outdoorsshallbe factorycoatedwith minimum200
micronfusionbonded epoxycoating.
1.
Valves Installed Indoors: Epoxy coating (min. 200 micron) shall be applied to internal parts
only.
2. Valvesusedforhydronic systems:
a. ValvesInstalled Indoors: Factorycoating isacceptable.

b.
Valves installed Outdoors: Epoxy coating (min. 200 micron) shall be applied to
external partsonly.
C. Pressureand TemperatureRatings: As indicatedin the "ApplicationSchedule"of Part3 of this

Section andasrequired tosuitsystempressures andtemperatures.
D.Sizes:Samesizeasupstream pipe,unlessotherwise indicated.
E.
Operators: Use specifiedoperatorsand handwheels,except provide the followingspecial

operator features:
1. Handwheels: Forvalvesotherthanquarter turn.

2.
Lever Handles: For quarterturnvalves DN150 and smaller, except for plug valves, which
shallhavesquareheads. FurnishtheEmployer with1wrenchforevery10plugvalves.
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
ChainWheel Operators:Forvalves DN100 andlarger, installed 2400 mm orhigher above

finished floorelevation.
4. GearDrive Operators: Forquarterturn valvesDN200 andlarger.
3.
F.
Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to
receive insulation.
G.BypassandDrainConnections: Comply withMSSSP45bypass anddrainconnections.

H.Threads: ASMEB1.20.1.
I. Flanges: ASMEB16.1forcastiron,ASMEB16.5forsteel,andASMEB16.24forbronzevalves.
J. Allvalvesshallbeinanaccessible location. Ifnot,suitable meansofaccessshallbeprovided.
2.2GATEVALVES
A.
Gate Valves, DN50 and Smaller: MSSSP80; Class125, 1380 kPa cold working pressure (CWP), or
Class150,2070kPaCWP;castbronze bodyandbonnet, orEPDMlinedsolidbronze wedge,
coppersilicon alloy rising stem, mechanical packing, threaded connections; andwith aluminum or
malleableiron handwheel.
B.
Gate Valves, DN65 and Larger:MSSSP70, Class125, 1380 kPa CWP, ASTMA126 castiron body
and bonnet, EDPM lined solid castironwedge, brassalloystem, outside screw and yoke,
mechanical packing, flangedendconnections; andwithcastiron handwheel.
2.3BALLVALVES
A.
Ball Valves, DN100 and Smaller: MSSSP110, Class150, 4140 kPa CWP, ASTM B584 bronze body
and bonnet, 2piece construction;chromeplatedbrass ball, standard port for DN15valves and
smaller and conventionalport for DN20 valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem;
Teflonseatsandseals;threaded connections:
1. Operator: Steelhandwheel.
2. Operator: Vinylcovered steelleverhandle.
3. Operator: Leveroperators withlock.
4. StemExtension: Forvalvesinstalled ininsulated piping.
5. Memory Stop:Foroperator handles.
2.4GLOBEVALVES
A.
Globe Valves,DN50 and Smaller: MSSSP80; Class125, 1380 kPa CWP, or Class150, 2070 kPa
CWP;castbronze bodyandscrewedbonnet,rubber,bronze,siliconbronzealloy stem,
mechanical packing threaded connections; andwithaluminum ormalleableiron handwheel.
B.
Globe Valves, DN65 and Larger: MSSSP85, Class125, 1380kPa CWP, ASTM A126castiron body
and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brassalloy stem, outside
screwandyoke,mechanical packing, flanged endconnections; andwithcastiron handwheel.
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
2.5BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
Butterfly Valves:MSSSP67, Class 125 1380kPa CWP, 1035 kPa maximum pressure differential,
ASTMA126castiron bodyandbonnet, extended neck,stainlesssteel stem,fieldreplaceable
EPDMsleeveandstemseals,flanged, lug,orgrooved style:
1. DiscType:Aluminum bronze,EPDMlined.
2. DiscType:Elastomercoated ductile iron,EPDMlined.
3. DiscType:Epoxycoated ductile iron,EPDMlined.
4. Operator forSizesDN50toDN150: Standard leverhandle, withlatchlock.
5. Operator forSizesDN200 toDN600: Gearoperator withposition indicator.
6.
Operator forSizesDN200andLarger, 2400mmorHigheraboveFloor:Chainwheel
operator.
2.6CHECKVALVES
A.
Swing Check Valves, DN50 and Smaller:MSSSP80; Class125, 1380 kPa CWP, or Class150, 2070
kPa CWP; horizontal swing, Ypattern, castbronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber
seatorcomposition seat,threaded connections.
B.
Swing Check Valves, DN65 toDN150: MSSSP71, Class125, 1380 kPaCWP, ASTM A126castiron
bodyand boltedcap, horizontalswing, weightednonslam,silenttype, bronzedisc, flangedor
grooved endconnections.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
C.
Examinepipingsystemfor compliance withrequirements for installation tolerancesandother

conditions affecting performanceof valves.Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions havebeencorrected.
D.
Examine valveinterior forcleanliness, freedom fromforeignmatter,andcorrosion. Remove

specialpackingmaterials,suchas blocks,usedto preventdisc movementduringshippingand
handling.
E.
Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions.Examine guides and seats made
accessible bysuchoperation.
F. Examine threadsonvalveandmatingpipeforformandcleanliness.
G.
Examinemating flange faces for conditionsthat might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size,length, andmaterial. Check gasket material forproper size,material composition suitable for
service, andfreedom fromdefectsanddamage.
H.Donotattempt torepairdefective valves;replacewithnewvalves.
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
3.2 INSTALLATION
I. Installvalvesasindicated, according tomanufacturer's writteninstructions.
J.
Piping installation requirements are specified inother Division 15Sections. Drawings indicate the
generalarrangement ofpiping,fittings, andspecialties.
K.
Installvalveswithunionsorflangesateachpieceofequipment arranged toallowservicing,

maintenance, andequipment removal without system shutdown.
L.Locatevalvesforeasyaccessandprovide separate support wherenecessary.

M.Installvalvesinhorizontal pipingwithstematorabovethecenterofthepipe.
N. Installvalvesinaposition toallowfullstemmovement.
O.
Forchainwheel operators, extendchainsto1500mmabovefinished floorelevation.
P.
Installation ofCheckValves: Installforproperdirection offlowasfollows:

1. SwingCheckValves:Horizontal position withhingepinlevel.
3.3 THREADED CONNECTIONS
Q.
Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximityof valve internal seat or wall to
determine howfarpipeshouldbethreaded intovalve.
R. Alignthreads atpointofassembly.
S.
Apply appropriatetape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal
threading isspecified.
T.
Assemble joint, wrench tight.Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is
beingthreaded.
3.4 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
U.Alignflangesurfaces parallel.
V.
Assemble joints bysequencing bolttightening tomake initial contact offlanges andgaskets asflat
andparallelas possible.Usesuitablelubricantson boltthreads.Tightenboltsgraduallyand
uniformly withatorquewrench.
W.
For deadend service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper
shutoffandretention.
3.5 VALVEENDSELECTION
X. Selectvalveswiththefollowing endsortypesofpipe/tube connections:
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1. SteelPipeSizes,DN50andSmaller: Threaded end.

2. SteelPipeSizes,DN65andLarger: Flanged.
3.6 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Y.
General Application: Usegate, ball, and butterfly valves forshutoff duty; globe andballvalves for
throttlingduty.Refer to piping system SpecificationSections for specific valve applicationsand
arrangements. RefertotheDrawings alsofortherequirement ofthetypeofthevalve.
Z. ChilledWater Systems: Usethefollowing valvetypes:
1. GateValves: Class125,castiron body.

2. BallValves: Class150,4140kPaCWP,withstemextension andmemory stop.
3. PlugValves:EPDMpacking.
4. GlobeValves: Class125,bronzebodywithbronzedisc;orClass125,castiron body.
5. Butterfly Valves: Class 125, aluminum bronze, or elastomercoatedductile iron disc; EPDM
sleeveandstemseals.
6.
CheckValves: Class125, bronzebodyswing check with rubberseat; Class125, castiron
bodyswingcheck;forpipesizesDN65andlarger.ADJUSTING
3.7 ADJUSTING
Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before
finaladjusting andbalancing. Replace valvesifleakpersists.
ENDOFSECTION 15100
Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15122METERS ANDGAGES
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
ThisSection includes metersandgagesformechanical systems
1.3SUBMITTALS
A.
ProductData: Includescale range, ratings,and calibratedperformancecurvesfor each meter,

gage,fitting, specialty, andaccessory specified.
B.
ShopDrawings:Includescheduleindicatingmanufacturer's number,scalerange,fittings,and
location foreachmeterandgage.
C.
ProductCertificates: Signedby manufacturersof metersand gages certifyingaccuraciesunder

specified operating conditions andcompliance withspecified requirements.
D.ShopDrawings: Forbrackets forductmounting thermometers.
E. MaintenanceData:For meters and gages to include in maintenancemanuals specified in

Division 1.Includedataforthefollowing:
1. Flowmeasuring systems.
2. Flowmeters.
A. Comply with applicable portions ofASME and ISA standards orapproved equal pertainingto
construction andinstallation ofmetersandgages.
B. Uniformity/standardizationofmeters and gages furnished, ofasingle manufacturer,shall be

maintained throughout theairportfacilities.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOMETERS,GENERAL
ScaleRange: Temperature rangesforservices listedareasfollows:

ChilledWater:minus18toplus38deg.C,with1degree scaledivisions.
Section 15122Meters andGages
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
Accuracy: Plusorminus1percent ofrangespanorplusorminusonescaledivision to

maximum of1.5percent ofrangespan.
2.2 LIQUIDINGLASS THERMOMETERS

A.
Description: ASTME1.
B.Case:Diecastandaluminum finished inbakedepoxy enamel, glassfront,springsecured,
230mmlong.
C.Adjustable Joint:Finishtomatchcase,180degree adjustment inverticalplane,360degree

adjustment inhorizontal plane,withlockingdevice.
D.Tube:Redorbluereading, organicliquid filledwithmagnifying lens.
E.Scale:Satinfaced nonreflective aluminum withpermanently etchedmarkings.
F. Stem:Copperplated steel,aluminum, orbrassforseparable socket;oflengthtosuitinstallation.
2.3 DIRECTMOUNTING,FILLEDSYSTEM DIALTHERMOMETERS

A.
Description: Vaporactuated, universalangle dialtype.
B.Case:Drawnsteelorcastaluminum, with115mmdiameter, glasslens.
Adjustable Joint:Finishtomatchcase,180degree adjustment inverticalplane,360degree

adjustment inhorizontal plane,withlocking device.
DThermal Bulb:Copper withphosphorbronze Bourdon tubepressure gage.

EMovement: Brass,precision geared.
FScale:Progressive, satinfaced nonreflective aluminum withpermanently etchedmarkings.
G.
Stem:Copperplated steel,aluminum, orbrassforseparable socket;oflengthtosuit

installation.
2.4INSERTION DIALTHERMOMETERS
A.Description: ASMEB40.3,bimetal type.

BDial:25mmdiameter.
C.Case:Stainlesssteel.
B.Stem:Dustproof andleakproof3mmdiameter, taperedend stemwithnominal lengthof

Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
125mm.
2.5SEPARABLE SOCKETS
A. Description: Fittingwithprotective socketforinstallation inthreaded pipefittingtohold

fixedthermometer stem.
1. Material: Brass,foruseincopperpiping.
2. Material: Stainlesssteel, foruseinsteelpiping.
3.
ExtensionNeckLength:Nominal thickness of 50mm, but not less than thickness of
insulation. Omitextension neckforsocketsforpipingnotinsulated.
4. Insertion Length:Toextendtocenterofpipe.
5. Cap:Threaded, withchainpermanently fastened tosocket.
6. HeatTransfer Fluid:Oilorgraphite.
2.6THERMOMETER WELLS
A.
Description: Fittingwithprotective wellforinstallation inthreaded pipefittingtoholdtest

thermometer.
1.Material: Brass,foruseincopper piping.
2Material: Stainlesssteel, foruseinsteelpiping.
3
ExtensionNeck Length: Nominal thickness of50mm,butnotlessthanthickness of
insulation. Omitextension neckforwellsforpipingnotinsulated.
4Insertion Length: Toextendtocenterofpipe.
5Cap:Threaded, withchainpermanently fastened tosocket.
6HeatTransfer Fluid:Oilorgraphite.
B. All thermometerwells are not to restrict the flow or service flow and are not to be installed with
sectionsoutsidetheservicebeingmonitored.
2.7DUCTTHERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES
A.
Description:Flangedfittingbracket for mounting inhole ofduct, with threaded end for
attaching thermometer.
1
ExtensionNeck Length: Nominal thickness of50mm,butnotlessthanthickness of
exterior insulation.
2.InsertionNeck Length:Nominal thickness of50mm,butnotlessthanthickness of
insulation lining.
2.8 PRESSURE GAGES
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
Description: ASMEB40.1,phosphorbronze Bourdon tubetypewithbottomconnection; dry

type,forallpurpose use.Liquidfilledcase type,forbooster setsandpumps.
B. Case:Drawnsteel,brass,oraluminum with115mmdiameter, glasslens.

C. Connector: Brass,DN8.
D.Scale:Whitecoated aluminum withpermanently etchedmarkings.
E. Accuracy: GradeA,plusorminus1percent ofmiddle50percent ofscale.

F. Range:Comply withthefollowing:
1. Vacuum: 100kPaofvacuumto103kPaofpressure.
2. FluidsunderPressure: Twotimestheoperating pressure.
2.9. PRESSUREGAGE FITTINGS
A.Valves: DN8brassorstainlesssteel needletype.
B.Syphons: DN8coilofbrasstubing withthreaded ends.
C. Snubbers: ASMEB40.5,DN8brassbushing withcorrosionresistantporousmetal discof

material suitable forsystemfluidandworking pressure.
2.10 TESTPLUGS
A.
Description: Nickelplated, brassbody testpluginDN15fitting.
B.
Body:Lengthasrequired toextendbeyond insulation.
C.Pressure Rating: 3450kPaminimum.
D.
CoreInsert:Selfsealing valve,suitable forinserting 3mmODprobefromdialtype

thermometer orpressure gage.
E.
CoreMaterial forAir,Water,Oil,andGas:Minus7toplus93deg.C,chlorosulfonated
polyethylene synthetic rubber.
F.
CoreMaterial forAirandWater: Minus35toplus136deg.C,ethylenepropylenediene

terpolymer rubber.
G.TestPlug Cap:Gasketed andthreaded cap,withretention chainorstrap.
H.
Test Kit: Pressuregage and adapterwith probe,two bimetaldial thermometers, and carrying
case.
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1.
Pressure Gage andThermometer Ranges: Approximatelytwotimes thesystem's operating

conditions.
2.11. FLOWMEASURINGSYSTEMS
A.System includes calibrated flowelement, separate meter,hosesortubing,valves, fittings, and

conversion chartcompatible withflowelement, meter,andsystem fluid.
2.
Flow range offlowmeasuringelement and meter covers operating range ofequipment or

system whereused.
3. Display: Visualinstantaneous rateofflow.
4. Display: Visualinstantaneous rateofflow,withregister toindicatetotalvolume inliters.
B. Permanent Meters: Suitable forwallorbracket mounting. Include 150mmdiameter,
orequivalent, dialwithfittingsandcopper tubingforconnecting toflowelement.
1.Scale:Literspersecond.
2.Accuracy: Plusorminus1percent ofcenter60percent ofrange.
C. Includecomplete operating instructions witheachmeter.
D.
VenturiFlowElements: Differentialpressuredesign, flowelement fittingmadefor

installation inpiping.
1.Construction: Bronze, brass, or factoryprimedsteel; with brass fittings and attached tag with
flowconversion data.IncludeendsthreadedforDN50andsmallerelementsandflangedor
welded forDN65andlargerelements.
2.Pressure Rating: 1725kPa.
3. Temperature Rating: 121deg.C.
E. PitotTube FlowElements: Differentialpressuredesignwithprobemadeforinsertion intopiping.
1.
Construction:Stainlesssteelprobe of length to span inside ofpipe, with brass fittings and

attached tagwithflowconversion data.
3.Temperature Rating:121deg.C.
2.12 TURBINE FLOWMETERS
I. Description: Insertion type;measures flowdirectly inliterspersecond.
1.
Construction: Bronze or stainlesssteelbody and plastic turbine or impeller, with integral

directreading scale.
2. Pressure Rating: 1035kPaminimum.
3. Temperature Rating: 82deg.Cminimum.
4. Display: Visualinstantaneous rateofflow.
5. Display: Visualinstantaneous rateofflow,withregister toindicatetotalvolume inliters.
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
6. Accuracy: Plusorminus21/2percent.
2.13 FLOWINDICATORS
A.Description: Instrument forvisualverification offlow;madeforinstallation inpiping systems.
1.
Construction: Bronzeorstainlesssteel body,withsightglassandplastic peltonwheel

indicator.
3.Temperature Rating: 93deg.C.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.1 METERANDGAGEINSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.Installmeters, gages,andaccessories according tomanufacturer's written instructions for

applications whereused.
3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION
A.Installthermometers andadjustverticalandtiltedpositions.
B.Installinthefollowing locations:
1.Inletandoutletofeachhydronic andchiller.
2. Inletandoutletofeachhydronic coilinairhandling unitsandbuiltup central
systems.
3.Inletandoutletofeachhydronic heatexchanger.
4.Inletandoutletofeachhydronic heatrecovery unit.
5.Inletandoutletofeachthermal storagetank.
6.Outsideair, supplyair,returnair, andmixedair ducts.
7. Eachductthermometer support flange.
C.Installseparable socketsinverticalposition inpipingteeswherefixedthermometers areindicated.

D.Installthermometer wellsinvertical position inpipingteeswheretestthermometers are
indicated.
1.Installwithstemextending tocenterofpipe.
2.Fillwellswithoilorgraphite andsecurecaps.
E.DuctThermometer Support Flanges: Installinwallofductwhereductthermometers are

indicated. Attachtoductwithscrews.
3.3PRESSUREGAGE INSTALLATION
Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A. Installpressure gagesinpipingteeswithpressuregage valvelocatedonpipeatmost

readable position.
B.Installdrytype pressure gagesinthefollowing locations:
1.Discharge ofeachpressurereducingvalve.
2.Building waterservice entrance.
3.Chilledwater andcondenserwater inletsandoutletsofchillers.
4.InletandOutletofeachhydronic coilinAirHandling Units.
C.
Installliquidfilledtype pressure gagesatsuction anddischarge ofeachpump,including fire

andbooster pumps.
D.Installpressuregage needlevalveandsnubber inpipingtopressure gages.
3.4 FLOWMEASURINGSYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.Installflowmetersinaccessible andmostreadable positions inpipingsystems.
B.Install flowmeasuringelements and meters atdischarge ofeach pump, atinlet ofeach hydronic coil
inbuiltup centralsystems, andelsewhere asindicated.
C. Install differentialpressuretypeflow elements with minimum straight lengths of pipe upstream and
downstream fromelement asprescribed bymanufacturer's written instructions.
D.Installconnection fittingsforattachment toportable flowmeters inaccessible locations.
E.Installpermanently mounted metersforflowelements onwallsorbrackets inaccessible locations.
F. Installconnections, tubing,andaccessoriesbetweenflowelementsandmetersas prescribedby

manufacturer's writteninstructions.
3.5 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A.Installflowmetersandcomponents according tomanufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A.Pipinginstallation requirements arespecified inotherDivision 15Sections. Drawings indicate

generalarrangement ofpipingandspecialties. Thefollowing arespecificconnection requirements:
1.
Install meters andgages adjacent tomachines andequipment toallow service and
maintenance.
2.Connect flowmeasuringsystemelements tometers.
3.Connect flowmeter transmitters tometers.
4.Connect thermalenergyflowmetertransmitters tometers.
Pa g e | 7
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
3.7 ADJUSTING ANDCLEANING
A.Calibrate metersaccording tomanufacturer's written instructions, afterinstallation.

B.Adjustfacesofmetersandgagestoproper angleforbestvisibility.
C.Cleanwindows ofmetersandgagesandcleanfactoryfinished surfaces. Replace cracked
andbrokenwindows, andrepairscratched andmarred surfaces withmanufacturer's

touchup paint.
ENDOFSECTION 15122
Pa g e | 8
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15170MOTORS
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.ThisSection includes basicrequirements forfactoryinstalled andfieldinstalled motors.

1.
Division 15Sections forapplication ofmotors andreference tospecific motor requirements

formotordriven equipment.
2. Division 16Sections forapplication ofmotors withVariable Frequency Drives(VFD).
1.3SUBMITTALS
A.
ProductData: Shownameplatedata and ratings;characteristics; mountingarrangements; size

andlocation ofwinding termination lugs,conduit entry,andgrounding lug;andcoatings.
B.FactoryTestReports: Forspecified tests.
C.
FieldTestReports:Indicateandinterprettest resultsfor compliancewithperformance

requirements.
A.Comply withrelatedelectrical Standards, referred toinDivision 16.

B. Comply withDEWAregulations forelectrical installations.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1BASICMOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A.Basicrequirements applytomechanical equipment motors, unlessotherwise indicated.

B.Motorsshallbeoftheenergyefficient design.
Section 15170Motors
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
C.
Motors 0.37 kW(1/2HP) andLarger: Three phase, 400Vupto150kW(200HP)andsoftstarters

or11,000Vfor150kW(250HP)andlarger.
D.Motorssmaller than0.37(1/2HP):Singlephase,230V.
E. Frequency Rating: 50Hz,unlessotherwise indicated.
F. Voltage Rating:Determined byvoltageofcircuittowhichmotorisconnected.
G.ServiceFactor: According toIEC60034and60072,unlessotherwise indicated.
H.
Capacity andTorque Characteristics:Rated forcontinuous duty andsufficient tostart, accelerate,

and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with indicated
operating sequence, andwithout exceeding nameplate ratingsorconsidering servicefactor.
I. Enclosure: Totallyenclosed, fancooled type,unlessotherwise indicated.

J. IndexofProtection (IP):MotorsshallbeIP55
K. Temperature Rise: Shall not exceed thepermissible limit fortheinsulation class based on50deg.
C(122 deg. F) ambient temperature,for outdoors conditions and 40deg. Cfor indoor conditions
unlessotherwise indicated.
L.Motors that utilize aVariable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall beinverter rated and shall comply with
Division 16,SectionMotorControlCenters.
2.2THREEPHASEMOTORS
A.Description: IEC60034and60072,medium induction motor.
1. DesignCharacteristics: IECStandards, unlessotherwise indicated.

2. EnergyEfficient Design: Premium efficiency Classeff1,unlessotherwise indicated.
Classification inaccordance withthedefinition setbytheEuropean Commission ofElectric
Machinery andPowerElectronics Manufacturers.
3.
Stator: Copperwindings,unlessotherwiseindicated. Multispeedmotorshaveseparate
winding foreachspeed.
4. Rotor:Squirrel cage,unlessotherwise indicated.
5.
Bearings:Doubleshielded,pre lubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
6. Temperature Rise:Matchinsulation rating,unlessotherwise indicated.
7.
Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, ClassBformotors located inairconditionedspaces
andClassFformotorslocatedoutside orinnonairconditioned spaces.
B.
Motors Used with ReducedInrush Controllers: Match wiring connectionrequirementsfor

indicatedcontroller, withrequiredmotorleadsbroughtto motorterminalboxto suitcontrol
method. Maximum permissible starting current shallbe5timestheFullLoadCurrent (FLC).
C.
Motors Used withVariableFrequencyControllers:Ratings, characteristics,and features

coordinated withandapproved bycontroller manufacturer.
1. Criticalvibration frequencies arenotwithinoperating rangeofcontroller output.

Section 15170Motors
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
2.
3.
4.
D.
Temperature Rise:MatchratingforClassFinsulation.
Insulation: ClassF.
Thermal Protection: Where indicated, conform to IEC
protected motors.
requirements
for
thermally
RuggedDutyMotors: Where indicated,motors are totally enclosed with 1.25 minimumservice

factor,greasedbearings, integralcondensate drains,andcappedreliefvents. Windings are
insulated with nonhygroscopic material. External finish is chemicalresistant paint over
corrosionresistantprimer.
E. SourceQualityControl: Perform thefollowing routine testsaccording toIEC:
1. Measurement ofwinding resistance.

2. Noload readings ofcurrent andspeedatratedvoltageandfrequency.
3. Lockedrotorcurrentatratedfrequency.
4. Highpotential test.
5. Alignment.
2.3SINGLEPHASE MOTORS
A.
Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one ofthe following, to suit starting torque
andotherrequirements ofspecific motorapplication.
1. Permanentsplit capacitor.
2. Splitphase start,capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start,capacitor run.
4.
Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, ClassBformotors located inairconditionedspaces
andClassFformotorslocatedoutside orinnonairconditioned spaces.
5. EnergyEfficient Design: Premium efficiency Classeff1,unlessotherwise indicated.
Classification inaccordance withthedefinition setbytheEuropean Commission ofElectric
Machinery andPowerElectronics Manufacturers.
B.ShadedPole Motors: Donotuse,unlessmotors aresmaller than0.037kW(1/20hp).
C.
Thermal Protection:Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens power

supply circuit tomotor when winding temperature exceeds asafevalue calibrated totemperature
ratingofmotorinsulation.Thermalprotection deviceautomatically resetswhenmotor
temperature returnstonormalrange,unlessotherwise indicated.
D.
Bearings: Ballbearing typeforbeltconnected motors andother motors withhighradial forces on

motorshaft.Sealed,prelubricated sleevebearings forothersinglephase motors.
PART3EXECUTION
3.1ADJUSTING
A.Useadjustable motormounting basesforbeltdriven motors.
Section 15170Motors
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
B.Alignpulleysandinstallbelts.
C. Tension according tomanufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Installpowerfeeders tomotors inraceways. Locateraceways closetomotorterminal boxanduse

liquidtightflexforfinalconnection tomotorterminal box.
E.
Motors located inclassified areas shall beinstalled inaccordance with IECrecommendationsfor

Hazardous (classified) Locations.
3.2COMMISSIONING
A.
Checkoperating motorsforunusualconditions duringnormaloperation. Coordinate withthe

commissioning oftheequipment forwhichthemotorisapart.
B. Takemeasurements andprepare alogofvoltage, current, frequency, andpower.

C. Reportunusual conditions.
D.Reportcurrentdeficiencies offieldinstalled units.
ENDOFSECTION 15170
Section 15170Motors
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15241MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.ThisSection includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases.

1. Division 15Section"Hangers andSupports" forpipehangerrestraints.
2. Division 15Section"MetalDucts"forflexible ductconnectors.
3. Division 15pipingSections forflexible pipeconnectors.
4. Division 15equipment Sections forHVACequipment.
1.3SUBMITTALS
A.ProductData: Indicatetypes, styles, materials,and finishesfor each type of isolatorspecified.

Include loaddeflection curves.
B.
ShopDrawings: Showdesigns andcalculations, certified byaprofessional engineer, forthe

following:
1.
DesignCalculations:Calculations forselectionof vibrationisolators,designof vibration

isolation bases,andselection ofseismic restraints.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details:Detail fabrication,including anchoragesand attachments
to the structure and to the supported equipment.Include auxiliary motor slides and rails,
andbaseweights.
3. SeismicRestraint Details: Detailfabrication andattachment ofrestraints andsnubbers.
A.
ProfessionalEngineer Qualifications: A professionalengineer who is legally registered and

qualifiedto practicein the jurisdictionwherethe Projectis locatedand who is experiencedin
providingengineeringservicesof the kind indicated. Engineeringservicesare definedas those
performed for design and installationsof vibration isolation bases and seismic restraints that are
similartothoseindicated forthisProjectinmaterial, design, andextent.
B.
Manufacturersrecommendations shall be consideredin selectionof vibrationand seismic

restraints. Allselection shallbecertified bymanufacturer.
Section 15241 Mechanical Vibration Controls
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1.5PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.Projectseismic zoneis2Awithazonefactorof0.15.
B.Building Importance Factor:1.0.
1.6COORDINATION
A.
Coordinatelayout and installationof vibration isolation and seismicrestraint devices with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, firesuppressionsystemcomponents, andpartition assemblies.
B.
Coordinate sizeandlocation ofconcrete housekeeping andvibration isolation bases. Castanchor

boltinsertsintobase.Concrete, reinforcement, andformwork requirements arespecifiedin
Division 3Sections.
C.
Coordinate installation ofroofcurbs, equipment supports, androofpenetrations. These items are

specified inDivision 7Sections.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
NoiseCriteria:
1.
Noiselevelsin all 8 octavebandsdueto equipment andductsystemsshallnotexceed

following NClevels:
TypeOfRoomNCLEVEL
Conference Rooms35
Corridors40
Lobbies, WaitingAreas 40
Offices, largeopen40
Offices, smallprivate35
2.
For equipmentwhich has no sound power ratings scheduledon the plans, the Contractor
shall select equipmentsuch that the foregoingnoise criteria, local ordinancenoise levels,
and ASHRAErequirementsare not exceeded.Selectionprocedureshall be in accordance
withASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook 2001,Chapter 7,SoundandVibration.
3. Anallowance, not toexceed 5db, may beadded tothe measured value tocompensate for
the variationof the room attenuatingeffect betweenroom test conditionprior to
occupancy and design condition after occupancy which may include the addition of sound
absorbingmaterial,such as furniture.This allowancemay not be taken after occupancy.
Theroomattenuating effect isdefined asthedifference between sound power level
emittedtoroomandsoundpressure levelinroom.
4. In the absenceof specifiedmeasurementrequirements,measureequipmentnoise levels
0.914mfromequipment andatanelevation ofmaximum noisegeneration.
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
B.
Machinery Airborne Sound Level Criteria: For each piece of machinery in the human work
environment, the maximum airborne sound levels shall not exceed 84 dB Aweighted scale,
continuous orintermittent, or140dBpeak sound pressurelevel, impact orimpulse, noise. Unless
otherwise specified the maximum equipmentairborne sound power level in dB shall not exceed
thefollowing data:
Maximum SoundPowerLevel(dB)
OctaveBandLevelCenterFrequency (Hz)
Equipment
AirHandling Unit
Chiller
Pumps
63
94
98
85
125
90
98
80
250
89
96
82
500 1000 2000 4000 8000

89
89
84
82
79
95
93
94
88
81
82
80
77
74
72
C.
Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Nonreciprocating Equipment:Not to exceed a self

excitedvibrationmaximumvelocityof 5 mm per second(0.20 inch per second)RMS,filter in,
when measuredwith a vibrationmeteron bearingcaps of machinein vertical,horizontal,and
axial directionsor measuredat equipmentmountingfeet if bearingsare concealed.
Measurements forinternally isolated fansandmotorsmaybemadeatthemounting feet.
D.
Materials:Rubber shall be natural rubber.Elastomershall be chloroprene. Shore A durometer

measurement of both materials shall range between 40 and 60. Inorganic materials such as
precompressed,highdensity,fibrous glass encased in a resilient moistureimpervious membrane
may beused inlieu ofspecified natural rubber and elastomers.Where this substitution ismade,
specifieddeflections shallbemodifiedby themanufacturing sourceto accommodate physical
characteristicsof inorganic materials and to provide equal or better vibration isolation. Weather
exposed metal vibrationisolatorparts shall be corrosion protected.Springs shall be chloroprene
coated.
2.2
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.
FloorMountings:
1. Double Deflection Neoprene (Type N):Shall include neoprene covered steel support plated
(topandbottom), frictionpads,andnecessary boltholes.
2.
Spring Isolators (Type S): Shall be freestanding,laterally stable and include acoustical
friction pads and leveling bolts. Isolators shall have aminimum ratio ofspring diameterto
operating spring height of1.0 and an additional travel tosolid equal to50percent ofrated
deflection.
3.
Pads (Type D), Washers (Type W), and Bushings (Type L): Pads shall be felt, cork, neoprene
waffle, neoprene and cork sandwich,neopreneand fiberglass,neoprene and steel waffle,
or reinforced duck and neoprene. Washers and bushings shall be reinforced duck and
neoprene. Sizepadsforamaximum loadof345kPa(50poundspersquare inch).
B.
Hangers: Shall be combinationneopreneand springs unless otherwisenoted and shall allow for
expansion ofpipe.
1.
Combination Neopreneand Spring(TypeH): Vibrationhangershall containa springand

doubledeflection neoprene element inseries.Springshallhaveadiameter notlessthan0.8
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
ofcompressed operating spring height. Spring shall have aminimum additional travel of50
percentbetweendesignheightand solid height.Springshall permita 15degreeangular
misalignment without rubbing onhangerbox.
2. SpringPosition Hanger (TypeHP):Similar tocombination neoprene andspring hanger
except hanger shallholdpiping atafixedelevation during installation andinclude a
secondary adjustment featuretotransfer loadtospringwhilemaintaining sameposition.
3.
Neoprene (TypeHN):Vibrationhangershallcontaina doubledeflection typeneoprene
isolationelement.Hangerrod shall be separatedfrom contactwith hangerbracketby a
neoprene grommet.
4.
Spring (Type HS):Vibration hanger shall contain acoiled steel spring inseries with a
neoprene grommet. Spring shall have adiameter notlessthan 0.8ofcompressed operating
spring height. Spring shall have aminimum additional travel of 50 percent between design
heightandsolidheight. Springshallpermita15degreeangularmisalignment without
rubbingonhangerbox.
5.
Hangersupportsforpiping50 mm(2 inches)andlargershallhavea pointerandscale
deflection indicator.
2.3VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES
A.
Rails (Type R): Designrails with isolatorbracketsto reduce mountingheightof equipmentand

cradlemachineshavinglegsor basesthatdo notrequirea completesupplementary base.To
assure adequate stiffness, height ofmembers shallbeaminimum of1/12oflongest base
dimension but not less than 100 mm (4 inches). Where rails are used with neoprene mounts for
smallfansorclosecoupled pumps, extendrailstocompensate overhang ofhousing.
B.
IntegralStructuralSteelBase(TypeB): Designbase with isolatorbracketsto reducemounting

heightofequipment thatrequire acomplete supplementary rigidbase.Toassureadequate
stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base dimension, but not less
than100mm(4inches).
C.
Inertia Base (Type I):Base shallbeareinforced concrete inertia base. Pourconcrete intoawelded
steel channel frame, incorporating prelocated equipment anchor bolts and pipe sleeves. Level the
concreteto providea smoothuniformbearingsurfacefor equipmentmounting.Providegrout
under uneven supports. Channel depth shall be aminimum of 1/12 of longest dimension of base
butnotlessthan 150mm (6inches). Form shall include 13mm (1/2inch) reinforcing barswelded
in placeon minimumof 203 mm (8 inch) centersrunningboth waysin a layer40 mm(11/2
inches) above bottom. Useheight saving brackets inallmounting locations. Weight ofinertia base
shall be equal toorgreater than weight ofequipment supported toprovide amaximum peakto
peakdisplacement of2mm(1/16inch).
PART3EXECUTION
3.1INSTALLATION
A.
Installand anchorvibration,sound,and seismiccontrol productsaccordingto manufacturer's

writteninstructions.
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
B.
Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, andsnubbers tovibration isolation bases. Boltisolator
baseplates tostructural floorsasrequired.
C.
Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers tovibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates tostructural supports asrequired.
D.
Fill concreteinertiabases,afterinstallingbaseframe,with21 MPaconcrete,andtrowelto a

smooth,hardfinish.Castinplace concrete isspecified inDivision 3.
E. Installpipeconnectors atconnections forequipment supported onvibration isolators.
3.2ADJUSTING ANDCLEANING
A.Adjust limit stops onrestrained spring isolators tomount equipment at normal operating height.
Afterequipment installation is complete,adjustlimitstopssotheyareoutof contactduring
normaloperations.
B.Adjustthrustrestraints foramaximum of6mmofmovement atstartandstop.
3.3SELECTION GUIDEFORVIBRATION ISOLATORS
ONGRADE
EQUIPMENT
ROTARY
SCREW
3mFLOORSPAN 9mFLOOR
12mFLOOR
15mFLOOR
SPAN
SPAN
SPAN
BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN
TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL
REFRIGERATION MACHINES
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
PUMPS
BASE
MOUNTED
UPTO
10HP
1.7
1.7
15HP
THRU
40HP
50HP
&
OVER
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
2.5
2.5
UPTHRU5HP
AIRHANDLING UNITPACKAGES
FLOORMOUNTED:
S
1
S
1
UPTO500
71/2HP&OVER:
S,TH 1.7 R S,TH 1.7
S,THR 1.7
S,THR 1.7
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
ONGRADE
3mFLOORSPAN
9mFLOOR
12mFLOOR
15mFLOOR
SPAN
SPAN
SPAN
EQUIPMENT BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN
TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL
RPM
R
R
501RPM&
S,TH 1
S,TH 1
R S,THR 1.7
R S,THR 1.7
OVER
R
R
NOTES:
1.Theselection guideisapplicable totheextentrequired ontheDrawings orinrelatedSectionsof

theSpecifications.
2.Forsuspended floorslighterthan100mmthickconcrete, selectdeflection requirements fromnext
higherspan.
3.Forseparate chillerbuilding ongrade,pumpisolators maybeomitted.
4.Directboltfirepumpstoconcrete base.Provide pads(D)fordomestic waterbooster pump

package.
5.Forprojects inseismic areas,useonlySS&DStypeisolators andsnubbers.
6.Isolators notrequired wherecooling towerislocatedongradeoronroofovermechanical room.
7.Suspended: Use"H"isolators ofsamedeflection asfloormounted.
ENDOFSECTION 15241
Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15420DRAINAGE ANDVENTPIPING
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes sanitary drainage and vent piping, and storm drainage piping inside building
andtolocations indicated.
1.
Division 2 Sections"SanitarySewerage"and "StormDrainage"for sanitarysewerageand

stormdrain
1.3DEFINITIONS
A.
SeweragePiping: Buildingsewerpipingoutsidebuildingthatconveyssanitaryseweragefrom
building.
B.
Drainage Piping:Building sewer piping outside building that conveys storm drainage from
building.
C.
Service EntrancePiping: Drainagepiping at entry into buildingbetween outside buildingsewer

pipingandinsidedrainage piping.
D.
Drainage andVentPiping: Piping inside building thatconveys wastewater andvapors from

fixtures andequipment throughout thebuilding..
E. Thefollowing areindustry abbreviations forplasticandotherpipingmaterials:
1. uPVC:Polyvinyl chloride, unplasticized.

2. RTRP:Reinforced thermosetting resinpipe.
1.4SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide components andinstallation capable ofproducing pipingsystems withthefollowing

minimum workingpressure ratings, unlessotherwise indicated:
1. Soil,Waste,andVentSystems: 30kPa.
2. StormDrainage Systems: 30kPa.
3. Sewerage, ForceMain PipingSystems: 690kPa.
Section 15420Drainage andVentPiping
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1.5SUBMITTALS
A.TestandInspection Reports: Specified in"FieldQualityControl" Article.
A.Provide listing/approval stamp, label,orothermarking onpipingmadetospecified standards.

B. Comply withASMEB31.9,"Building Services Piping," formaterials, products, andinstallation.
C. Complywith InternationalPlumbingCodes & Standardssuch as UniformPlumbingCode UPC
andAmerican SocietyofPlumbing Engineers ASPEdatabooks.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1PIPESANDTUBES
A.General:Applications of the followingpipeand tubematerialsareindicatedin Part3 "Piping

Applications" Article.
B.uPVC Plastic Pipe And Fittings: BS5255 (partially replaced byseries ofBSENs) and BS4515: Part
1, for aboveground, BS 4660 for belowground, with solventweld joints or joiningmaterialsto
relevant ASTMstandard asspecified below.
A.General:Applications of thefollowing pipingjoiningmaterialsareindicatedin Part3 "Piping

Applications" Article.
B.
Refer toDivision 15Section "Basic Mechanical Materials andMethods" forcommonly used joining
materials.
C.
Transition Couplings: Coupling orother manufactured fitting same size as,with pressure rating at
leastequalto,andwithendscompatible withpipingtobejoined.
D.
Flexible, Transition Couplings for Underground,NonpressurePiping:ASTMC1173 with

elastomeric sleeve. Include ends same sizes aspiping tobejoined and include corrosionresistant
metalbandoneachend.
1.
SleeveTypefor PlainEndPiping: Rubberor elastomeric sleeveand stainlesssteel band

assembly, fabricated tomatchoutside diameters ofpipingtobejoined. Include the
following:
a. SleevesforPlasticPiping: ASTMF477elastomeric seal.

b. SleevesforDissimilar Piping:Compatible withpipingmaterials tobejoined.
c. Bands:Stainlesssteel, oneateachpipeinsert.
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
2.
Gasket Type for DissimilarEnd Piping: Rubber orelastomeric compression gasket, made to
match inside diameter of pipe orhub, and outside diameter of adjoining pipe. Include the
following:
a. Gaskets forPlasticPiping: ASTMF477elastomeric seal.

b. Gaskets forDissimilar Piping:Compatible withpipingmaterials tobejoined.
2.3VALVES
A.Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for generaldutyvalves.Use valves specified for "Domestic
WaterSystems" applications.
PART3EXECUTION
3.1EXCAVATION
A.RefertoDivision 2Section "Earthwork" forexcavating, trenching, andbackfilling.
3.2PIPINGAPPLICATIONS
A.
Transition andspecial fittings withpressure ratings atleastequaltopiping pressure rating maybe

usedinapplications below,unlessotherwise indicated.
B.Flangesmaybeusedonaboveground piping,unlessotherwise indicated.
C. Soil,Waste, Drainage andVentPipingAboveand/orUnderground: Usethefollowing:
1. Allsizes:uPVCplasticpipe,andfittings.
D.
SewerageForce Mains, Above and/or Underground.Use the following:(equivalentBS Standard

suitable forworking pressure andapplication isacceptable).
1. Allsizes:uPVCSchedule 40PlasticPipe,andfittings.
3.3PIPINGINSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
RefertoDivision 15Section"BasicMechanical Materials andMethods" forbasicpiping

installation.
3.4SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPINGINSTALLATION
A.
Referto Division2 Sections"SanitarySewerage"and"StormDrainage"forsanitaryandstorm

sewerpiping.
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
B.
Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in sizes and locations
indicatedfor serviceentrancesinto building. Install cleanoutand extensionto grade at
connections ofbuilding sanitarydrainswithbuilding sanitary sewers.
C.
Extendbuilding stormdrainpipingandconnect tostormsewerpipinginsizesandlocations

indicatedfor serviceentrancesinto building. Install cleanoutand extensionto grade at
connections ofbuilding stormdrainsandbuilding stormsewers.
D.
Extend building sanitary drain, forcemain piping and connect tosanitary sewer piping in size and
location indicated for service entrance into building.Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or
equivalent, insidebuilding.
E.
Extendbuildingstormdrain,forcemainpipingandconnectto stormsewerpipingin sizeand

location indicated for service entrance into building.Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or
equivalent, insidebuilding.
F. Installwellpenetration systemateachserviceentrance pipepenetration through foundation wall.

Selectnumberof interlocking rubberlinksrequiredtomakeinstallation watertight. Referto
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve
seals.
3.5DRAINAGE ANDVENTPIPINGINSTALLATION
A.
Make changes in directionfor drainageand vent piping using appropriatebranches,bends, and

longsweepbends. Sanitarytees and shortsweep1/4 bends may be used on verticalstacks if
change indirection offlow isfrom horizontal tovertical. Uselongturn, double Ybranch and1/8
bendfittingsif 2 fixturesareinstalledbacktobackorsideby sidewithcommondrainpipe.
Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may beused onvent lines. Do notmake change indirection of
flow greater than 45 degrees. Use proper size of standardincreasersand reducersif different
sizesofpipingareconnected. Reducing sizeofdrainage pipingindirection offlowisprohibited.
B.
Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point ofeach system. Install true togrades and
alignment indicated, withunbrokencontinuity of invert.Placehubendsof pipingupstream.
Installrequiredgasketsaccording tomanufacturer's writteninstructions foruseof lubricants,
cements, andother installation requirements.Maintain swab inpiping andpullpast each joint as
completed.
C. Installdrainage andventpipingatthefollowing minimum slopes, unlessotherwise indicated:
1.
SanitaryBuildingDrain: 2 percentdownwardin directionof flowfor pipingDN80 and

smaller; 1percent downward indirection offlowforpipingDN100 andlarger.
2. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping:2percent downward indirection offlow.
3. StormBuilding Drain:1percent downward indirection offlow.
4. Horizontal, StormDrainage Piping: 2percent downward indirection offlow.
5. VentPiping: 1percent downtowardvertical fixtureventortowardventstack.
D.Installforcemainsatelevations indicated.
E. Install underground,uPVC plasticdrainagepiping accordingto ASTMD2321. Provideconcrete
protection foruPVCpipeinstalled atdepth1.2morless.
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
3.6JOINTCONSTRUCTION
A.
RefertoDivision15Section"BasicMechanical Materials andMethods" forbasicpipingjoint

construction.
B.
Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling
andfittingmanufacturer's written instructions.
C. uPVCPipingJoints: Joindrainage pipingaccording toBS5255andBS4515:Part1.
3.7VALVEINSTALLATION
3.8HANGER ANDSUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Refer toDivision 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.Install
thefollowing:
1. Riserclamps, MSSType8orType42,forverticalruns.
2.
Adjustablesteel clevis hangers,MSS Type1, for individual,straight,horizontalruns 30m
andless.
3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type43, forindividual, straight, horizontal runs longer than
30m.
4. Springhangers, MSSType52,forsupporting baseofverticalruns.
B. Installsupports according toDivision 15Section"Hangers andSupports."
C. Support vertical pipingandtubingatbaseandateachfloor.
D.Roddiameter maybereduced onesizefordoublerod hangers, with10mmminimum rods.
E.
Installhangersfor uPVCplasticpipingwith the followingmaximumspacingandminimumrod

diameters:
1.
DN32 and DN40:Maximumhorizontalspacing, 500mm with 10 mm minimum rod

diameter; maximum verticalspacing, 1200mm.
2. DN50: Maximumhorizontalspacing,600mm with 10 mm minimumrod diameter;
maximum verticalspacing, 1200mm.
3.
DN65 and DN100: Maximum horizontal spacing, 900mm with 12mm minimum rod
4. DN150:Maximum horizontal spacing,1200mmwith19mmminimum roddiameter;
maximum verticalspacing, 1800mm.
5.
DN200 through DN300: Maximum horizontal spacing, 2000mm with 22mm minimum rod
F.
Supportpiping and tubing not listed above accordingto MSSSP69 and manufacturer'swritten
instructions.
3.9CONNECTIONS
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.
Connect service entrance piping to exterior sewerage and drainage piping.Use transition fitting
tojoindissimilar pipingmaterials.
B. Connect drainage pipingtoserviceentrance piping,andextendtoandconnect tothefollowing:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping insizes indicated.Refer toDivision15Section

"Plumbing Fixtures."
2. Plumbing Specialties:Connect drainage and vent piping insizes indicated.Refer to
Division 15Section"Plumbing Specialties."
3.
Equipment: Connect drainage piping asindicated. Provide shutoff valve andunion foreach
connection. Useflangesinsteadofunionsforconnections DN65andlarger.
C. Connect forcemain pipingtoserviceentrance piping,andextendtoandconnect tothefollowing:
1. SumpPumps: Connect forcemain pipingtosumppump discharge.

2. Sewerage Pumps: Connect forcemain pipingtoseweragepump discharge.
A.Inspectdrainage andventpipingasfollows:
1. Donotenclose, cover, orputpiping intooperation untilitisinspected andapproved bythe

Engineer.
2. During installation,notify the Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection must be made.
Perform testsspecified belowinthepresence oftheEngineer.
a.
b.
RoughingInInspection: Arrange for inspectionof piping before concealingor

closingin afterroughingin andbeforesetting fixtures.
Final Inspection:Arrange for final inspection by theEngineer toobserve tests
specified belowandtoensurecompliance withrequirements.
3.
Reinspection:IftheEngineer finds thatpiping willnotpasstestorinspection, make

required corrections andarrange forreinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports andhavethemsignedbytheEngineer.
B.
Testdrainageand ventpipingaccordingto proceduresof theEngineeror, in absenceof such

procedures, asfollows:
1.
Test forleaks and defects innew piping and parts ofexisting piping that have been altered,
extended, orrepaired. Iftesting isperformed insegments, submit separate report foreach
test,complete withdiagram ofportionofpipingtested.
2.
Leave uncoveredand unconcealednew, altered, extended,or replaced drainage and vent
pipinguntilithasbeentestedandapproved. Exposeworkthathasbeencoveredor
concealed beforeithasbeentestedandapproved.
3.
RoughingIn Plumbing Test Procedure:Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughingin.Close openings in piping system and fill with water
to point of overflow,but not less than 3 m of head.Water level must not drop from 15
minutes beforeinspection startsthrough completion ofinspection. Inspect jointsforleaks.
4. Finished PlumbingTest Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connectionsand prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug ventstack
openings on roof and building drains where they leave building.Introduce air into piping
Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
system equal to pressureof 250Pa.Use Utube or manometerinserted in trap of water

closetto measurethis pressure. Air pressuremust remainconstantwithoutintroducing
additional airthroughout period ofinspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections forgas
andwaterleaks.
5.
Repairleaksanddefectsusingnewmaterialsandretestpipingorportionthereofuntil
satisfactory resultsareobtained.
6. Prepare reportsfortestsandrequired corrective action.
C.
Testforcemain piping according toprocedures oftheEngineer or,inabsence ofsuchprocedures,

asfollows:
1.
Leave uncoveredand unconcealednew, altered,extended,or replacedforcemainpiping

until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed
beforeithasbeentestedandapproved.
2.
Capandsubject pipingtostaticwater pressure of345kPaabove operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating ofpiping system materials. Isolate test source and allow
tostandfor4hours.Leaksandlossintestpressure constitute defectsthatmustbe
repaired.
3.
Repairleaksanddefectsusingnewmaterialsandretestpipingorportionthereofuntil
satisfactory resultsareobtained.
4. Prepare reportsfortestsandrequired corrective action.
3.11CLEANING ANDPROTECTING
A.Cleaninteriorofpipingsystem. Remove dirtanddebrisasworkprogresses.
B.
Protect drains during remainder ofconstruction period toavoid clogging with dirt and debris and
topreventdamage fromtrafficandconstruction work.
C. Placeplugsinendsofuncompleted pipingatendofdayandwhenworkstops.
D.
ExposeduPVC Piping: Protect plumbingvents exposedto sunlightwith 2 coats of waterbased

latexpaint.
ENDOFSECTION 15420
Pa g e | 7
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15530REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.
ThisSection includes refrigerant pipingusedforairconditioning applications, including pipes,

tubing, fittings, andspecialties; specialduty valves;andrefrigerants.
B.RelatedSections: Thefollowing Sectionscontainrequirements thatrelatetothisSection:

1.
Division 15 Section "MechanicalIdentification"for labeling and identifyingrefrigerant
piping.
2. Division 15Section"PipeInsulation" forpipeinsulation.
1.3SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data:Foreachvalvetypeandrefrigerant pipingspecialty specified.
B.
ShopDrawings: Show layout ofrefrigerant piping, specialties, andfittings, including pipe andtube
sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangementsand locations, slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor
penetrations, andequipment connection details. Show interface andspatial relationship between
pipingandequipment.
1.
Refrigerant piping indicated isschematic only. Sizeanddesign thelayout andinstallation of

the piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes, to ensure
properoperation andconformance withwarranties ofconnected equipment.
C.
MaintenanceData:For refrigerantvalves and piping specialtiesto include in the operationand

maintenance manualspecified inDivision 1.
A.Regulatory Requirements: Complywithprovisions ofthefollowing codes:
1. ASMEB31.5,"Refrigeration Piping.
B. UL Standard:Provide products complying with UL207, "RefrigerantContainingComponents and

Accessories, Nonelectrical"; orUL429,"Electrically Operated Valves."
C. ListingandLabeling: Provideproducts specified inthisSectionthatareULlistedandlabeled.
Section 15530Refrigerant Piping
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1.5EXTRAMATERIALS
A.
Furnishextra materialsdescribedbelow that match productsinstalled,are packagedwith

protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.Deliver to the
Employer.
1. Refrigeration OilTestKits:2each,containing everything required toconduct 1test.

2. Refrigerant: 2containers each,with10kgofrefrigerant.
3. FilterDryer Cartridges: 3ofeachtype.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1PIPESANDTUBES
A.HardCopper Tube:ASTMB280,TypeACR,drawntemper.
B. HardCopper Tube:ASTMB88M,TypeB,drawntemper.
2.2PIPEANDTUBEFITTINGS
A.CopperFittings: ASMEB16.22, wroughtcopper streamlined pattern.
A.BrazingFillerMetals: AWSA5.8,Classification BAg1(Silver).
2.4VALVES
A.
Diaphragm PacklessValves:3450kPaworkingpressureand135deg.C workingtemperature,

globe or angle pattern, forgedbrass or bronze body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless
steel diaphragms,rising stem and handwheel,stainlesssteelspring, nylon seat disc, with solder
endconnections.
B.
PackedAngleValves:3450kPa working pressure and 135 deg.C working temperature,forged

brass or bronze body,forgedbrassseal caps with coppergasket,back seating,rising stem and
seat,molded stempacking, withsolderend connections.
C.
CheckValvesDN25andSmaller:3450kPa operating pressure, 149deg.C operating

temperature; castbrass body, with removable piston, PTFE seat, and stainlesssteel spring;
straightthroughglobe design. Valve shallbestraightthroughpattern, with solderend
connections.
D.
Check Valves Larger thanDN25 :3100kPa operating pressure, 149deg.Coperating temperature;

castbronze body,withcastbronze orforgedbrass boltedbonnet; floatingpistonwith
mechanically retained PTFEseatdisc.Valveshallbestraightthrough oranglepattern,with
solderend connections.
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
E.
Service Valves: 3450kPa pressure rating, forgedbrass body with copper stubs, brass caps,
removable valvecore,integralballcheckvalve,withsolderend connections.
F.
Solenoid Valves: Conform toARI760; 121 deg.Ctemperature rating, 2760kPa working pressure;
forged brass, with PTFE valve seat, 2way straightthrough pattern, and solderendconnections;
manual operator; with NEMA250, Type1 solenoid enclosurewith 13mmconduit adapter, and
24Vnormally closedholdingcoil.
G.
PressureRegulatingValves: Conform toARI770; pilot operated, forged brass orcast bronze with
pilot operator,stainlesssteelbottom spring, pressuregagetappings,24V dc standardcoil, and
wroughtcopper fittings forsolderend connections.
H.
PressureRegulating Valves: Conformto ARI770; directacting,brass with pilot operator,

stainlesssteel diaphragm, standard coil,andsolderend connections.
I. Pressure Relief Valves:Straight or angle brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and
ASMElabeled, forstandard pressure setting.
J.
Thermal Expansion Valves: Conform toARI750; thermostaticadjustable,modulating type; size as

required and factory set for superheat requirements;solderendconnections;with sensing bulb,
distributor havingsideconnection forhotgas bypass line,andexternal equalizer line.
K. HotGas Bypass Valve:Adjustable, sized for capacity equal to last step ofcompressor unloading;
solderend connections.
2.5REFRIGERANT PIPINGSPECIALTIES
A.
Straightor AngleTypeStrainers:2960kPaworkingpressure;forgedbrass or steel bodywith

stainlesssteel wire orbrassreinforcedMonel screen, and screwed cleanout plug, with solderend
connections.
B.Straight,NonCleanableTypeStrainers:3450kPaworkingpressure; steelshellwithstainless
steelscreen,withsolderend connections.
C.
Moisture/LiquidIndicators: 3450kPa operating pressure, 93deg.C operating temperature;

forgedbrass body, with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window with colorcoded moisture
indicator, andsolderend connections.
D.
ReplaceableCore FilterDryers: 3450kPa operating pressure; steel shell, flange ring, and spring,
ductileironcover plate with steel cap screws,and wroughtcopper fittingsfor solderend
connections; withreplaceablecore kit,including gaskets, asfollows:
1.
FilterCartridge:Pleatedmediawithintegralendrings,stainlesssteel support,ARI730
ratedforcapacity.
2. FilterDryer Cartridge:Pleated media with solidcore sieve with activated alumina, ARI730
ratedforcapacity.
E.
Permanent FilterDryer:2140kPa maximum operating pressure, 107 deg.C maximum operating

temperature; steelshell,andwroughtcopper fittingsforsolderend connections; moldedfelt
coresurrounded bydesiccant.
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
F.
FlexibleConnectors:3450kPa operatingpressure;seamlesstinbronzeor stainlesssteel core,

hightensilebronzebraidcovering,solderendconnections,and syntheticcovering;dehydrated,
pressure tested,minimum 180mmlong.
2.6REFRIGERANT
A.ASHRAE 34,R22: Chlorodifluoromethane(forsmallsizesplitunitsonly).
PART3EXECUTION
3.1EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughingin for compliance with requirementsfor installation tolerances and other
conditions affectingperformance of refrigerant piping.Donotproceedwithinstallation until
unsatisfactory conditions havebeencorrected.
3.2APPLICATIONS
A.Aboveground, withinBuilding: TypeACRdrawncopper tubing.

B.Aboveground, withinBuilding: TypeBdrawncopper tubing.
3.3INSTALLATION
A.Installrefrigerant pipingaccording toASHRAE 15.
B.Basic piping installation requirementsare specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical

Materials andMethods."
C.
Install piping inshortanddirectarrangement, withminimum number ofjoints, elbows, and

fittings.
D.
Arrange piping toallow normal inspection andservice ofcompressor andother equipment. Install
valvesandspecialties inaccessible locations toallowforserviceandinspection.
E.
Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or between
pipesfor insulationinstallation.Usesleevesthroughfloors,walls,or ceilings,sizedto permit
installation offullthickness insulation.
F. Belowground, installcoppertubinginconduit. Ventconduit outdoors.
G.Insulate suction linesandliquidlines,butinsulate themtogether ifadjacent.
1.
Do not install insulationuntil system testing has been completedand all leaks have been
eliminated.
H.Installbranch linestoparallelcompressors ofequallength, andpipeidentically andsymmetrically.
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
I.
Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed
tomechanical injury.
J. Sloperefrigerant pipingasfollows:
1.
Install horizontalhotgas dischargepiping with a uniformslope of 0.4 percent downward

awayfromcompressor.
2. Installhorizontal suctionlineswithauniform slopeof0.4percentdownward to
compressor.
3.
Install traps anddouble risers where indicated and where required toentrain oilinvertical
runs.
4. Liquidlinesmaybeinstalled level.
K. Usefittingsforchanges indirection andbranchconnections.
L.
Install exposed piping atrightangles orparallel tobuilding walls. Diagonal runsarenotpermitted,

unlessexpressly indicated.
M.
Reduce pipesizesusingeccentric reducer fittingsinstalled withlevelsidedown.
N.
Providebypass around moistureliquid indicators inlineslargerthanDN50.
O.
Install unions to allow removalof solenoidvalves, pressureregulating valves, expansionvalves,

andatconnections tocompressors andevaporators.
P.
Install flexible connectors attheinlet anddischarge connection, atright angles toaxial movement
ofcompressor, paralleltocrankshaft.
Q. Installreplaceablecore filterdryers, withisolation valvesandvalvedbypass.

R. Installrefrigerant valvesaccording tomanufacturer's written instructions.
S.
When brazing, remove solenoidvalvecoils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems, seats, and
packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties.Do not apply heat near
bulbofexpansion valve.
T. Mountthermostatic expansion valvesinanyposition, closetoevaporator.

1. Installvalvesothatdiaphragm caseiswarmer thanbulb.
2.
Secure bulb toclean, straight, horizontal section ofsuction lineusing 2bulb straps. Donot
mountbulbinatraporatthebottomoftheline.
3. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where itwillreflect suction
linepressure atbulblocation.
U.
Install pressure relief valves asrequired byASHRAE 15. Pipe pressure relief valves onreceivers to
outdoors.
V.
Chargeandpurgesystems,aftertesting,and disposeof refrigerantfollowingASHRAE 15

procedures.
W. Chargesystemasfollows:
1. Installfilterdryer coreafterleaktest,butbeforeevacuation.
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
2.
Evacuate refrigerantsystem with vacuum pump, until temperatureof 1.7 deg.Cis

indicated onvacuumdehydration indicator.
3. Maintain vacuum foraminimum of5hours.
4. Breakvacuum withrefrigerant gasandchargeto14kPa.
3.4HANGERS ANDSUPPORTS
A.General:Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified inDivision 15Section "Hangers and
Supports." Provide according toASMEB31.5andMSSSP69.
B.Adjustable steelclevishangers forindividual horizontal runslessthan6minlength
C. Install hangersfor coppertubing with the followingmaximumspacingand minimumrod sizes.

Tubesizesarenominal orstandard tubesizesasexpressed inASTMB88M.
1. 15mm:Maximum span,1500mm;minimum rodsize,6mm.

D.Support vertical runsateachfloor.
3.5PIPEJOINTCONSTRUCTION
A.Basic pipe and tube joint constructionis specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials andMethods."
B.
Fillpipeandfittingswithaninertgas(nitrogen orcarbondioxide)duringbrazingtoprevent
formation ofscale.
3.6VALVEINSTALLATIONS
A.Installrefrigerant valvesaccording tomanufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Installvalvesonsuctionanddischarge ofcompressor, forgagetapsatcompressor inletand

outlet,forgagetapsathotgasbypassregulators, oninletandoutlet,andoneachsideof
strainers.
C.
Install check valves oncompressor discharge and oncondenser liquid lines onmultiple condenser
systems.
D.
Install refrigerantcharging (packedangle)valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff valve and
expansion valve.
E.
Install globe valves oneach side ofstrainers and dryers, inliquid and suction lines atevaporators,
andelsewhere asindicated.
F. Installafullsized, 3valvebypassaroundeachdryer.
Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
G.
Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansionvalve and hotgas bypass valve.Install solenoid
valvesinhorizontal lineswithcoilattop.
1.
Electrical wiringforsolenoid valvesisspecified inDivision 16Sections. Coordinate electrical

requirements andconnections.
H.Mountthermostatic expansion valvesinanyposition, closetoevaporator.
1. Whererefrigerant distributors areused,mountdirectly onexpansionvalve outlet.

2. Installvalvesothatdiaphragm caseiswarmer thanbulb.
3.
Secure bulb toclean, straight, horizontal section ofsuction lineusing 2bulb straps. Donot
mountbulbinatraporatthebottomoftheline.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where itwillreflect suction
linepressure atbulblocation.
I. Installpressureregulatingandreliefvalvesasrequired byASHRAE 15.
3.7SPECIALTIES APPLICATION ANDINSTALLATION
A.
Installliquidindicators inliquidlineleavingcondenser, inliquidlineleavingreceiver, andon

leavingsideofliquidsolenoid valves.
B.
Install strainers immediatelyupstream of each automatic valve, including expansion valves,

solenoid valves,hotgasbypassvalves, andcompressor suction valves.
C.
Installstrainerson mainliquidline wheremultipleexpansionvalveswith integralstrainersare

used.
D.
Install moistureliquidindicators in liquid lines between filterdryersand thermostaticexpansion

valvesandinliquidlinetoreceiver.
E. Installpressure reliefvalvesonASMEreceivers, andpipetooutdoors.
F.
Install replaceablecore filterdryersin vertical liquid line adjacentto receiversand before each
solenoid valve.
G.
Install permanentfilterdryersin lowtemperature systems,in systemsusing hermetic

compressors, andbeforeeachsolenoid valve.
H.
Installsolenoidvalvesin liquidline of systemsoperatingwith singlepumpoutor pumpdown

compressor control, inliquid lineofsingle ormultiple evaporator systems, and inoilbleeder lines
from flooded evaporatorsto stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line when system shuts
down.
I.
Installflexibleconnectors at or nearcompressors wherepipingconfiguration doesnotabsorb

vibration.
3.8CONNECTIONS
A.Electrical: Conform toapplicable requirements ofDivision 16Sections forelectrical connections.

Pa g e | 7
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.Inspectandtestrefrigerant pipingaccording toASMEB31.5,ChapterVI.
1.
Pressure testwith nitrogen to1380 kPa. Perform final tests at186kPa vacuum and1380
kPausinghalidetorchorelectronic leakdetector. Testtonoleakage.
B.
Testand adjustcontrolsandsafeties. Replacedamagedor malfunctioning controlsand

equipment.
C. Repairleaksusingnewmaterials; retest.
3.10ADJUSTING
A.Adjustthermostatic expansion valvetoobtainproperevaporator superheat requirements.
3.11CLEANING
A.
Beforeinstallationof coppertubingotherthanTypeACR,cleantubingandfittingswith
trichloroethylene.
3.12COMMISSIONING
A.Chargesystemusingthefollowing procedures:
1. Installcoreinfilterdryerafterleaktest,butbeforeevacuation.
2.
Evacuate refrigerantsystem with vacuum pump until temperatureof 1.67 deg.C is
indicated onvacuumdehydration indicator.
3. Duringevacuation, applyheattopockets, elbows, andlowspotsinpiping.
4.
Maintain vacuum on system for minimumof 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum
pumpandsystem.
5. Breakvacuum withrefrigerant gas,allowing pressure tobuildupto14kPa.
6. Completechargingof system,usingnewfilterdryer corein chargingline. Providefull
operating charge.
ENDOFSECTION 15530
Pa g e | 8
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15738SPLITSYSTEM AIRCONDITIONINGUNITS
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes splitsystem airconditioningunits consisting ofseparate evaporatorfanand

compressorcondensercomponents.Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and
maybeconnected toducts.
1.
Division 15Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls andSeismic Restraints" forisolation

pads,springisolators, andseismic restraints.
2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentationand Controls" for control devices not packaged
withunits.
1.3DEFINITIONS
A.
EvaporatorFan Unit: The part of the splitsystem airconditioning unit that containsa coil for
cooling andafantocirculate airtoconditioned space.
B.
CompressorCondenser Unit: The part of the splitsystem airconditioning unit that containsa
refrigerant compressor andacoilforcondensing refrigerant.
1.4SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include ratedcapacities; shipping, installed, andoperating weights; furnished

specialties; andaccessories foreachtypeofproduct indicated. Include performance datainterms
ofcapacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements,
andelectrical characteristics.
1.
SampleWarranty: Copyofmanufacturer's proposed warranty, statingobligations,

remedies, limitations, andexclusions.
B.
Shop Drawings:Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturerinstalledandfieldinstalled wiring.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer'scolor charts consistingof units of sections of units
showing thefullrangeofcolorsavailable forunitswithfactoryapplied colorfinishes.
Section 15738SplitAirConditioning Units
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
D.
Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specifiedin "FieldQualityControl"and

"Commissioning"Articles inPart 3ofthis Section.Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance withperformance requirements.
E.
Maintenance Data:Forsplitsystem airconditioning unitstoincludein maintenance manuals

specified inDivision 1.
F. Warranties: Warranties specified inthisSection.
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensionalrequirementsof splitsystem

units and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers'systems with equal
performance characteristics maybeconsidered.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, andAccessories:Listed and labeled asdefined inNFPA70,

Article100.
C.
Paintfinishshall be suitablefor hot and humidclimates.Unit shall be capableand suitableof

working atoutdoor ambient temperature of50deg.C.
D.
Soundpowerlevel,decibels reference, 10totheminus 12power watt, atthefanoperating speed

selectedto meetthe specifiedcapacity.Soundlevel shall not exceed40dBaat low speedand
48dBaathighspeed.
E.
Soundpowerlevel data or values for these units shall be obtainedin accordancewith the test
proceduresspecifiedin ANSI S12.23. Soundpowervalues apply to units providedwith factory
fabricated cabinetenclosures andstandard grilles.Valuesobtained forthestandard cabinet
modelswillbeacceptable forconcealed modelswithout separate testsprovided thereisno
variation between models as to the coil configuration,blowers, motor speeds, or relative
arrangement ofparts.Eachunitshallbefastened securely tothebuilding structure.
1.6COORDINATION
A.Coordinate sizeandlocationof concretebasesforunits.Castanchorbolt insertsintobases.

Concrete, reinforcement, andformwork arespecified inDivision 3Section "CastinPlace
Concrete."
B.
Coordinatesize, location,and connectiondetails with roof curbs, equipmentsupports,and roof

penetrations specified inDivision 7Section"RoofAccessories."
1.7WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed bymanufacturer agreeing torepair or

replacecomponentsof splitsystemairconditioning units that fail in materialsor workmanship
withinspecified warranty period.
B.Warranty Period:FiveyearsfromdateofSubstantial Completion.
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1.8EXTRAMATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed andthat arepackaged with
protective covering forstorage andidentified withlabelsdescribing contents.
1. Filters:Onesetoffiltersforeachunit.
2. FanBelts:Onesetofbeltsforeachunit.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
A.
Materials and equipmentshall be standard products of a manufacturerregularly engaged in the

manufacturingof such products,which are of a similar material,design and workmanship. The
standard products shall have been insatisfactory commercial orindustrial use for 5years prior to
bid opening.The 5 year use shall include applicationsof equipment and materials under similar
circumstancesand of similar size.The 5 years experienceshall be satisfactorilycompletedby a
productthathasbeensoldorisofferedforsaleonthecommercial marketthrough
advertisements,manufacturer'scatalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field
servicerecordshall not be acceptable.Productsshall be supportedby a serviceorganization.
Systemcomponents shallbeenvironmentally suitable fortheindicated locations.
2.2CONCEALED EVAPORATORFANCOMPONENTS
A.
Chassis: Galvanizedsteel with flanged edges, removablepanels for servicing,and insulationon

backofpanel.
1. Insulation: Faced,glassfiber ductliner.

2. DrainPans:Stainless steel,withconnection fordrain;insulated withpolystyrene.
B.RefrigerantCoil: Coppertube,with mechanically bondedaluminumfins, complyingwith

ARI210/240, andwiththermalexpansionvalve.
C.
Fan:Forwardcurved, doublewidth wheelofgalvanized steel;directly connected tomotor.
D.
FanMotor:Multispeed, PSCtype.
E. Filters: 25mmthick,permanent, washable, cleanable typeinaluminum frames.

F. WiringTerminations: Connect motortochassiswiringwithplugconnection.
2.3FLOORMOUNTED,EVAPORATORFANCOMPONENTS
A.Cabinet: Enameled steelwithremovable panelsonfrontandends.
1.
Discharge Grille: [Steel with surfacemountedframe] [Welded steel bars forming alinear
grilleandwelded intosupporting panel].
2. Insulation: Faced,glassfiber, ductliner.
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
3. DrainPans:Stainless steel,withconnection fordrain;insulated withpolystyrene..

C.
Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan,directly driven bymultispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted.
D.Filters: 25mmthick,permanent, washable, cleanable typeinaluminum frames.
2.4WALLORCEILINGMOUNTED,EVAPORATORFANCOMPONENTS
A.
Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels onfront and ends, and discharge drain pans with
drainconnection.

C.
Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven bymultispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted.
D.Filters: 25mmthick,permanent, washable, cleanable typeinaluminum frames.
2.5AIRCOOLED, COMPRESSORCONDENSERCOMPONENTS
A.
Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removablepanels for access to controls,weep
holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base.Provide brass service valves, fittings, and
gageportsonexterior ofcasing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealedwithcrankcase heaterandmounted onvibration isolation.

Compressor motorshallhavethermalandcurrentsensitive overloaddevices,startcapacitor,
relay,andcontactor.
1. Compressor Type:[Reciprocating] [Scroll].

2.
Twospeed compressor motor with manualreset highpressureswitch and automaticreset
lowpressure switch.
C. RefrigerantCoil: Coppertube,with mechanically bondedaluminumfins, complyingwith

ARI210/240, andwithliquidsubcooler.
D.Refrigerant:Environmentally Friendly refrigerant.
E. Fan:Aluminumpropellertype,directly connected tomotor.
F. Motor:Permanently lubricated, withintegralthermaloverload protection.

G.Mounting Base:Polyethylene.
2.6ACCESSORIES
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.Thermostat: [Lowvoltage withsubbase tocontrolcompressor andevaporator fan].
B.
Thermostat: [Wireless infrared functioningto remotely control compressorand evaporatorfan,

withthefollowing features:
1. Compressor timedelay.
2. 24hour timecontrolofsystemstopandstart.
3.
Liquidcrystal displayindicatingtemperature, setpointtemperature, timesetting,
operating mode,andfanspeed.
4. Fanspeed selection, including autosetting].
5. Interface withBMS
C. Thermostat: [DDCwalltype.Refertospecification section15900,clause2.5A]

D.Automaticreset timertoprevent rapidcyclingofcompressor.
E.
Refrigerant Line Kits: Softannealedcopper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, andsealed; factoryinsulated suction linewithflaredfittings atbothends.
PART3EXECUTION
3.1INSTALLATION
A.Installunitslevelandplumb.
B.
Install evaporatorfancomponentsusing manufacturer'sstandard mounting devices securely

fastened tobuilding structure.
C.
Install groundmounted,compressorcondensercomponents onminimum 100 mm thick,

reinforcedconcrete base; 100 mm larger on each side than unit.Concrete,reinforcement,and
formwork arespecified inDivision 3,"CastinPlace Concrete." Coordinate anchorinstallation
withconcrete base.
D.
Install roofmountedcompressorcondensercomponents on equipment supports specified in

Division 7Section "Roof Accessories."Anchor units tosupports with removable, cadmiumplated
fasteners.
E.
Install compressorcondenser componentson restrained,spring isolators with a minimumstatic

deflectionof 25 mm. Referto Division 15 Section"MechanicalVibrationControlsand Seismic
Restraints."
F.
Connectprechargedrefrigeranttubingto component's quickconnect fittings. Installtubingto

allowaccesstounit.
3.2CONNECTIONS
A.
Pipinginstallation requirements arespecifiedin otherDivision 15 Sections.Drawingsindicate

generalarrangement ofpiping,fittings, andspecialties.
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
B. Installpipingadjacent tounittoallowserviceandmaintenance.
C.
Unlessotherwiseindicated,connectpipingwith unionsand shutoffvalves to allow units to be

disconnected withoutdrainingpiping.RefertopipingsystemSections forspecificvalveand
specialty arrangements.
D.Groundequipment.
1.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer'spublished torque

tightening values. Ifmanufacturer'storque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL486AandUL486B.
A.
InstallationInspection: Engage a factoryauthorized service representativeto inspect field

assembledcomponentsand equipmentinstallation,includingpipingand electricalconnections,
andtoprepare awrittenreportofinspection.
B.
Leak Test:After installation,charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaksexist.
C.
Operational Test: Afterelectrical circuitry hasbeenenergized, startunitstoconfirm proper motor

rotationand unit operation. Removemalfunctioning units, replace with new components,and
retest.
D.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damagedand malfunctioningcontrols and
equipment.
3.4COMMISSIONING
A.
Engage a factoryauthorizedservice representativeto perform startup service, and report results

inwriting.
B.Verifythatunitsareinstalled andconnected according totheContract Documents.

C. Lubricate bearings, adjustbelttension, andchange filters.
D.Perform startupchecksaccording tomanufacturer's written instructions anddothefollowing:
1. Filloutmanufacturer's checklists.
2. Checkforunobstructed airflowovercoils.
3. Checkoperation ofcondenser capacitycontrol device.
4.
Verify that vibrationisolationdevicesand flexibleconnectorsdampenvibration
transmission tostructure.
3.5DEMONSTRATION
Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.
Engage afactoryauthorizedservice representativetotraintheEmployer's maintenance

personnel toadjust, operate, andmaintain splitsystem airconditioningunits. Refer toDivision 1
Section"[Demonstration andTraining] [Closeout Procedures]."
ENDOFSECTION 15738
Pa g e | 7
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15815METAL DUCTS
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.
ThisSection includes rectangular, round, andflatoval metal ductsandplenums forheating,

ventilating, andairconditioning systems inpressure classesfromminus500toplus2490Pa.
1.
Division 10Section "Louvers andVents"forintakeandrelieflouvers andventsconnected to
ductsandinstalled inexterior walls.
2. Division 15Section"DuctInsulation" forductinsulation.
3.
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories"for dampers,soundcontroldevices,ductmounted
accessdoorsandpanels, turning vanes,andflexible ducts.
4. Division 15Section"Diffusers, Registers, andGrilles."

5.
Division 15Section "HVAC InstrumentationandControls" forautomatic volumecontrol
dampers andoperators.
6.
Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing and final adjusting
ofmanualvolume dampers.
1.3SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Duct system design,as indicated,has been used to select and size airmovingand distribution
equipment andothercomponents ofairsystem.Changestolayoutorconfiguration ofduct
system must be specifically approved in writing by the Engineer.Accompany requests for layout
modificationswith calculationsshowing that proposed layout will provide original design results
without increasing systemtotalpressure.
B.
The Contractorshall submitcoordinatedservicesdrawingsbeforefabricationof ductwork.Any

modification required toductlayoutforcoordination withotherservices shallbeatnoextracost.
1.4SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:Forductlinerandsealingmaterials.
B.
ShopDrawings: Showdetailsofthefollowing:
1.
Fabrication,assembly,and installation,includingplans, elevations,sections,components,

andattachments tootherwork.
Section 15815MetalDucts
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
2. Ductlayoutindicating pressure classifications andsizesonplans.

3. Fittings.
4. Reinforcement andspacing.
5. Seamandjointconstruction.
6. Penetrations through firerated andotherpartitions
7.
Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment,vibration isolation,
seismic restraints, andductattachment.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn toscale and coordinating penetrations and
ceilingmounted items.Showthefollowing:
1. Ceilingsuspension assembly members.

2. Othersystems installed insamespaceasducts.
3.
Ceiling and wallmountedaccess doors and panels required to provide access to dampers
andotheroperating devices.
4. Coordinationwith ceilingmounted items,includinglightingfixtures,diffusers,grilles,
speakers, sprinkler heads,accesspanels,andspecialmoldings.
D.
Welding Certificates: Copies of certificatesindicating welding proceduresand personnel comply

withrequirements in"Quality Assurance" Article.
E.
Field Test Reports: Asspecified in"Field Quality Control" Article inPart 3ofthis Section. Indicate
andinterpret testresultsforcompliance withperformance requirements.
F.
Record(AsBuilt)Drawings: Indicateactual routing,fitting details,reinforcement, support,and

installed accessories anddevices.
A.
Welding Standards:Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel toperform welding

processesfor this Project accordingto AWS D1.1, "StructuralWeldingCodeSteel,"for hangers
andsupports; AWSD1.2,"Structural Welding CodeAluminum,"foraluminum supporting
members; andAWSD9.1,"SheetMetalWelding Code,"forductjointandseamwelding.
B.
ComplywithNFPA90A,"Installation of AirConditioning andVentilating Systems," unless

otherwise indicated.
C.
Comply with NFPA90B, "Installationof Warm Air Heating and Air ConditioningSystems,"unless
otherwise indicated.
D.Comply with NFPA96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection ofCommercial Cooking
Operations," Chapter 3,"DuctSystem," forrangehoodducts,unlessotherwise indicated.
E.
Mockups:Before installing duct systems, erect mockups representing system pressure

classifications higherthan500 Pa. Buildmockupsto complywith the followingrequirements,
usingmaterials indicated forcompleted Work:
1.
Locate mockups inthelocations andofthesizeindicated or,ifnotindicated, asdirected by

theEngineer. Mockup maybearepresentative sectionoftheactualductsystem.
2. Includetheminimum number ofeachofthefollowing features andfittings:
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
a. Fourtransverse joints.
b. Oneaccessdoor.
c. Twotypicalbranchconnections, eachwithatleastoneelbow.
d.
Two typical flexibleduct or flexibleconnectorconnectionsfor each duct and
apparatus.
3.
Perform tests specified in"Field Quality Control" Article. Modify mockup construction and
perform additional testsasrequired toachieve specified minimum acceptable results.
4. Obtain theEngineer's approval ofmockups beforestarting Work.
5.
6. Whendirected, demolish andremove mockups fromProjectsite.
7.
Approved mockups inanundisturbed condition atthe time ofSubstantial Completion may
become partofthecompleted Work.
A.
Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with
labels indicatingmanufacturer, productname and designation,color, expirationperiod for use,
potlife,curingtime,andmixinginstructions formulticomponent materials.
B.
Storeandhandlesealantandfirestopping materials according tomanufacturer's written

recommendations.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1SHEETMETALMATERIALS
A.Galvanized,Sheet Steel: Lockformingquality;ASTMA653/A653M, Z275 coatingdesignation;

millphosphatizedfinishforsurfaces ofductsexposed toview.
B.
AluminumSheets: ASTMB209M , Alloy3003, Temper H14, sheet form with standard,oneside

brightfinishforductsexposed toviewandwithmillfinishforconcealed ducts.
C.
ReinforcementShapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcementwhere installed on galvanized,

sheetmetalducts;compatible materials foraluminum andstainlesssteel ducts.
D.
TieRods: Galvanized steel, 8mmminimum diameter for900mmlength orless;10mmminimum

diameter forlengths longerthan900mm.
2.2DUCTLINER
A.General: Comply withNFPA90AorNFPA90BandNAIMA's "Fibrous GlassDuctLinerStandard."
B.
Materials: ASTMC1071 with coated surface exposedto air streamto preventerosionof glass
fibers. Duct liner shall be faced with black, strong, durable and dimensionallystable woven glass
fiber.
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1. Thickness: 25mm.
2. Thermal Conductivity (kValue): 0.037at24deg.Cmeantemperature.
3.
FireHazard Classification: Maximum flamespreadrating of 25 and smokedeveloped
ratingof50,whentestedaccording toASTMC411.
4. LinerAdhesive: Comply withNFPA90AorNFPA90BandASTMC916.
5.
Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable foradhesive attachment, mechanical
attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as
recommended bythemanufacturer andwithout causing leakage induct.
a.
Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a23kg tensile, deadload testperpendicular to

ductwall.
b.
Fastener Pin Length:As required for thickness of insulationand without projecting
morethan3mmintoairstream.
c. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners:Comply with firehazard classification
ofductlinersystem.
2.3SEALANT MATERIALS
A.
Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or
masticnaturebutincludes tapesandcombinations ofopenweave fabricstripsandmastics.
1. JointandSeamTape:50mmwide;glassfiber fabricreinforced.
2.
Tape SealingSystem: Wovenfiber tapeimpregnated with a gypsummineralcompound
and a modified acrylic/siliconeactivator to react exothermicallywith tape to form a hard,
durable, airtight seal.
3.
Joint and Seam Sealant: Onepart,nonsag, solventreleasecuring, polymerizedbutyl
sealant, formulated withaminimum of75percent solids.
4. Flanged Joint Mastics: Onepart, acidcuring, silicone, elastomeric jointsealants, complying
withASTMC920,TypeS,GradeNS,Class25,UseO.
2.4HANGERS ANDSUPPORTS
A.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powderactuatedfasteners, or structuralsteelfasteners

appropriate forbuilding materials.
1.
Use powderactuated concretefastenersfor standardweight aggregateconcretesor for

slabsmorethan100mmthick.
2. Exception:Do not use powderactuatedconcrete fasteners for lightweightaggregate
concretes orforslabslessthan100mmthick.
B. HangerMaterials: Galvanized, sheetsteelorround,allthreaded steelrod.
1. Hangers Installed inCorrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized,allthread rod.

2.
Straps and Rod Sizes:Comply with SMACNA's"HVAC Duct ConstructionStandardsMetal
andFlexible" forsheetsteelwidthandthickness andforsteelroddiameters.
C.
DuctAttachments: Sheetmetalscrews, blindrivets,orselftapping metalscrews; compatible with

ductmaterials.
D.Trapeze andRiserSupports: Steelshapescomplying withASTMA36/A36M.

Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1. Supports forGalvanizedSteel Ducts:Galvanized steelshapesandplates.

2. Supports forStainlessSteel Ducts:Stainlesssteel support materials.
3.
Supports forAluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials, unlessmaterials are
electrolytically separated fromductwork.
2.5RECTANGULAR DUCTFABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
with galvanized,sheet steel, accordingto SMACNA's"HVAC Duct ConstructionStandardsMetal
and Flexible."Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie
rodapplications, andjointtypesandintervals.
1.
2.
Lengths: Fabricaterectangularducts in lengths appropriateto reinforcementand rigidity

classrequired forpressure classification.
Materials:Free from visual imperfections such aspitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
anddiscolorations.
B.StaticPressure Classifications: Unlessotherwise indicated, construct ductstothefollowing:
1. SupplyDucts,Constant Volume andUpstream ofTerminal Units:1500Pa.

2. SupplyDucts,Downstream ofTerminal Units:500Pa.
3. ReturnDucts:500Pa,negative pressure.
4. Exhaust Ducts: 500Pa,negative pressure.
C.
Cross Breaking orCross Beading: Cross break orcross bead duct sides 480mm and larger and0.9
mmthickorless,withmorethan0.93sq.mofunbraced panelarea,unlessductsarelined.
2.6SHOPAPPLICATION OFLINERINRECTANGULAR DUCTS
A.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at
linercontact surface area. Multiple layersofinsulation toachieve indicated thickness are
prohibited.
B.Applyadhesive tolinerfacingindirection ofairflownotreceiving metalnosing.

C. Butttransverse jointswithout gapsandcoatjointwithadhesive.
D.
Foldandcompress linerin cornersof rectangular ductsorcutandfittoensurebuttededge

overlapping.
E.
Donot apply liners inrectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except atcorners ofducts, unless
ductsizeandstandard linerproduct dimensions makelongitudinal jointsnecessary.
F. Applyadhesive coatingonlongitudinal seamsinductswithairvelocity of12.7m/s.
G.
Secure liner with mechanicalfasteners 100 mm from corners and at intervals not exceeding 300
mm transverselyaround perimeter;at 75 mm from transversejoints and at intervals not
exceeding 450mmlongitudinally.
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
H.
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either
channelor"Z"profileorareintegrallyformedfromductwall.Fabricateedgefacingsat the
following locations:
1. Fandischarge.
2. Intervals oflinedductpreceding unlinedduct.
3. Upstream edgesoftransverse jointsinducts.
I.
Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness as specified for
duct,securedto ductswith mechanicalfastenersthat maintainmetalliner distancefrom duct
without compressing insulation.
1. SheetMetalLinerPerforations: 2.4mmdiameter, withanoverallopenareaof23percent.
J.
Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed inducts toattach dampers, turning vane assemblies,
and other devices.Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) orother buildout means are
optional; when used, secure buildouts toduct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, orwelds. Terminate
lineratfiredampers atconnection tofiredamper sleeve.
2.7ROUND ANDFLATOVAL DUCTFABRICATION
A.
General: Diameter asapplied toflatoval ducts inthis Article isthe diameter ofthe size ofround
ductthathasacircumference equaltoperimeter ofagivensizeofflatoval duct.
B.RoundDucts:Fabricate supplyductsofspiralseam,galvanized steelaccordingtoSMACNA's

"HVACDuctConstruction StandardsMetal andFlexible."
C.
FlatOval Ducts:Fabricate supplyductswithstandard spirallockseamsorwithbuttwelded

longitudinalseams accordingto SMACNA's"HVAC Duct ConstructionStandardsMetal and
Flexible."
1. Round Mitered Elbows:Welded constructionwith the following metal thickness for
pressure classesfromminus500toplus500Pa:
a. Ducts75to660mminDiameter: 0.7mm.
b. Ducts685to915mminDiameter: 0.85mm.
c.Ducts940to1270mminDiameter: 1.0mm.
d.Ducts1320to1525mminDiameter: 1.3mm.
e. Ducts1575to2130mminDiameter: 1.6mm.
2.
Round Mitered Elbows:Welded constructionwith the following metal thickness for

pressure classesfrom500to2490Pa:
a. Ducts75to355mminDiameter: 0.7mm.
b.
Ducts380to660mminDiameter: 0.85mm.
c.
d.
e.
3.
FlatOval Mitered Elbows:Welded constructionwith same metal thickness as longitudinal

seamflatoval duct.
Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
4.
90Degree,TwoPiece,MiteredElbows: Use only for supply systems,or exhaustsystems

formaterialhandlingclassesAandB;andonlywherespacerestrictions donotpermitusing
1.5bendradiuselbows. Fabricate withsinglethickness turningvanes.
5.
Round Elbows, 200 mm and Smaller: Fabricatedieformedelbows for 45 and 90degree
elbowsand pleatedelbowsfor 30, 45, 60, and 90 degreesonly. Fabricatenonstandard
bendangle configuration ornonstandard diameter elbowswithgoredconstruction.
6. Round Elbows, 225through 355mm: Fabricate gored orpleated elbows for30,45,60,and
90degrees, unlessspacerestrictions require amitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard
bendangle configuration ornonstandard diameter elbowswithgoredconstruction.
7.
RoundElbows,LargerThan355 mm,and All FlatOvalElbows: Fabricategoredelbows,
unlessspacerestrictions require amitered elbow.
8. DieFormedElbows for Sizes through 200 mm and All Pressures: 1.0 mm thick with two
pieceweldedconstruction.
9. RoundGoredElbow MetalThickness: Sameasnonelbow fittingsspecified above.
10.FlatOval ElbowMetalThickness: Sameaslongitudinal seamflatoval ductspecified above.
11.PleatedElbowsforSizesthrough 355mmandPressures through 2490Pa:0.55mm.
2.9FIRESTOPPING
C
A.
FireResistantSealant:Provideonepartelastomeric sealantformulated forusein a through
penetration firestopsystemforfillingopenings aroundductpenetrations throughwallsand
floors,havingfireresistance ratings.
PART3EXECUTION
3.1DUCTINSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Ductinstallation requirements arespecified inotherDivision 15Sections. Drawings indicate

generalarrangement ofducts,fittings, andaccessories.
B. Construct andinstalleachductsystem forthespecific ductpressure classification indicated.

C. Installroundandflatoval ductsinlengths notlessthan3.7m,unless interrupted byfittings.
D.Installductswithfewestpossible joints.
E. Installfabricated fittingsforchanges indirections, changes insizeandshape,andconnections.
F. Installcouplings tighttoductwallsurfacewithaminimum ofprojections intoduct.
G.
Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally,parallel and perpendicularto
building lines;avoiddiagonal runs.
H.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction,columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements ofbuilding.
I. Installductswithaclearance of25mm,plusallowance forinsulation thickness.
Pa g e | 7
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
J.
Concealductsfrom viewin finishedspaces. Do not encasehorizontalruns in solidpartitions,

unlessspecifically indicated.
K.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire and smokecontroldampers, lighting layouts, and
similarfinished work.
L.
ElectricalEquipmentSpaces: Routeductworkto avoid passingthroughtransformervaultsand

electrical equipment spacesandenclosures.
M.
Whereductsare exposedto viewin machineroomsand in spaceswithoutsuspendedceiling,

coverwithaluminum jacketing toprotectagainstaccidental damage.
N.
NonFireRatedPartition Penetrations:Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior

walls, and are exposedto view, concealspace betweenconstructionopeningand duct or duct
insulationwith sheet metal flangesof same metal thicknessas duct. Overlapopeningon four
sidesbyatleast38mm.
O.
FireRated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts passthrough interior partitions andexterior walls,
install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers
arespecifiedin Division 15 Section"DuctAccessories."Firestopping materialsandinstallation
methods arespecified inDivision 7Section"ThroughPenetrationFirestop Systems."
3.2HANGING ANDSUPPORTING
A.Install rigid round, rectangular,and flatoval metal duct with support systems indicated in
SMACNA's "HVACDuctConstruction StandardsMetal andFlexible."
B.
Supporthorizontal ductswithin600mmof eachelbowandwithin1200mmof eachbranch

intersection.
C. Support vertical ductsatamaximum intervalof5mandateachfloor.
D.Install upper attachments tostructures withanallowable loadnotexceeding onefourth offailure

(prooftest) load.
E. Installconcrete insertsbeforeplacingconcrete.
F.
Install powderactuatedconcrete fasteners after concrete isplaced andcompletely cured. Donot

usepowderactuatedconcrete fasteners forlightweightaggregateconcretes orforslabslessthan
100mmthick.
3.3CONNECTIONS
A.Connect equipment withflexible connectors according toDivision 15Section"DuctAccessories."
B.For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections,comply with SMACNA's"HVAC Duct
Construction StandardsMetal andFlexible."
Pa g e | 8
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.
Disassemble, reassemble, andsealsegmentsof systemsasrequiredtoaccommodate leakage

testing andasrequired forcompliance withtestrequirements.
B.
Conduct tests, inpresence oftheEngineer, atstatic pressures equal tomaximum design pressure
of system or section being tested. Ifpressure classificationsare not indicated, test entire system
at maximumsystem design pressure. Do not pressurizesystems above maximumdesign
operating pressure. Givesevendays'advance noticefortesting.
C.
Determine leakage from entire system orsection ofsystem by relating leakage tosurface area of
testsection.
D.
MaximumAllowableLeakage: Comply with requirementsfor Leakage Classification3 for round

andflatoval ducts,andLeakage Classification 6forpressure classifications from500to2490Pa.
E. Remake leakingjointsandretestuntilleakage islessthanmaximum allowable.
F. Leakage Test:Perform testsaccording toSMACNA's "HVACAirDuctLeakage TestManual."

G.Perform leakage testonsupplyductsconstructed topressure higherthan500Pa.
3.5ADJUSTING
A.Adjustvolumecontrol dampers inducts,outlets, andinletstoachieve designairflow.
B.RefertoDivision 15Section"Testing, Adjusting, andBalancing" fordetailed procedures.
3.6CLEANING
A.Aftercompleting systeminstallation, includingoutletfittingsanddevices,inspectthesystem.

Vacuum ductsbeforefinalacceptance toremove dustanddebris.
ENDOFSECTION 15815
Pa g e | 9
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15820DUCTACCESSORIES
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.ThisSection includes thefollowing:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manualvolume dampers.
3. Fireandsmokedampers.
4. Ductsilencers.
5. Turning vanes.
6. Ductmounted accessdoorsandpanels.
7. Flexibleducts.
8. Flexibleconnectors.
9. Ductaccessory hardware.
1.
Division 10Section "Louvers andVents"forintakeandrelieflouvers andventsconnected to
ductsandinstalled inexterior walls.
2. Division 13Section"FireAlarm" forductmounted fireandsmokedetectors.
3. Division 15Section"Diffusers, Registers, andGrilles."
4.
Division 15 Section"HVACInstrumentation and Controls"for electricand pneumatic
damper actuators.
1.3SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data:Forthefollowing:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manualvolume dampers.
3. Fireandsmokedampers.
4. Ductsilencers.
5. Ductmounted accessdoorsandpanels.
6. Flexibleducts.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detailequipmentassembliesand indicatedimensions, weights,loadings,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field
connection. Detailthefollowing:
Section 15820DuctAccessories
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1. Specialfittings andmanual andautomaticvolumedamperinstallations.

2.
Fireandsmokedamper installations, including sleevesandductmounted accessdoors
andpanels.
C. Product Certificates: Submit certified testdataondynamic insertion loss; selfnoise power levels;
andairflowperformance data,staticpressure loss,dimensions, andweights.
A.NFPACompliance: Comply withthefollowing NFPAstandards:
1. NFPA90A,"Installation ofAirConditioning andVentilating Systems."

2. NFPA90B,"Installation ofWarmAirHeating andAirConditioning Systems."
1.5EXTRAMATERIALS
A.
Furnishextra materialsdescribedbelow that match productsinstalled,are packagedwith

protective covering forstorage, andareidentified withlabelsdescribing contents.
1. FusibleLinks:Furnish quantity equalto10percent ofamount installed.
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1SHEETMETALMATERIALS
A.Galvanized, SheetSteel: Lockforming quality;ASTMA653/A653M,Z275coatingdesignation;

millphosphatizedfinishforsurfaces ofductsexposed toview.
B.
AluminumSheets: ASTMB209M, Alloy3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with standard,oneside

brightfinishforductsexposed toviewandmillfinishforconcealed ducts.
C.
ReinforcementShapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcementwhere installed ongalvanized,

sheetmetalducts;compatible materials foraluminum andstainlesssteel ducts.
D.
TieRods: Galvanized steel, 8mmminimum diameter for900mmlength orless;10mmminimum

diameter forlengths longerthan900mm.
2.2BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A.
Description: Suitableforhorizontal orverticalinstallations. Dampersshallnotproducenoise

whileinoperation.
B.
Frame: 1.3mmthick,galvanized, sheetsteel,withwelded corners andmounting flange.
C.
Frame:1.6mmthickextruded aluminum, withmounting flange.
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
D.Blades: 0.6mmthick,rollformed aluminum.

E. Blades: 1.2mmthickaluminum sheet.
F. BladeSeals:Neoprene.
G. BladeAxles:Nonferrous.
H.BladeAxles:Galvanized steel.
I. TieBarsandBrackets: Aluminum.
J. TieBarsandBrackets: Galvanized steel.

K. ReturnSpring:Adjustable tension.
2.3MANUALVOLUMEDAMPERS
A.
General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for
stability. Include locking device toholdsingleblade dampers inafixed position without vibration.
Closeductpenetrations fordamper components tosealductconsistent withpressure class.
1.
Pressure Classifications of500PaorHigher: Endbearings orother sealsforductswithaxles

fulllengthofdamper bladesandbearings atbothendsofoperating shaft.
B.
LowLeakage VolumeDampers: Multipleor singleblade, parallelor opposedblade designas

indicated, lowleakage rating,withlinkage outside airstream, andsuitable forhorizontal or
verticalapplications.
1.
SteelFrames: Hatshaped, galvanized, sheet steelchannels, minimum of1.6mmthick, with

miteredand weldedcorners;frameswith flangeswhere indicatedfor attachingto walls;
andflangeless frameswhereindicated forinstalling inducts.
2.
AluminumFrames: Hatshaped,1.6 mm thick, extrudedaluminum channels;frames with
flanges where indicatedfor attachingto walls; and flangelessframes where indicatedfor
installing inducts.
3. RollFormed SteelBlades: 1.6mmthick,galvanized, sheetsteel.
4. RollFormed Aluminum Blades: 2.5mmthickaluminum sheet.
5. ExtrudedAluminumBlades: 1.2mmthickextruded aluminum.
6. BladeAxles:Nonferrous.
7. BladeAxles:Galvanized steel.
8. TieBarsandBrackets: Aluminum.
9. TieBarsandBrackets: Galvanized steel.
C.
Jackshaft:25 mm diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipebearingassembly

mounted onsupports ateachmullion andateachendofmultipledamper assemblies.
1.
Lengthand Numberof Mountings: Appropriateto connectlinkageof each damperof a

multipledamper assembly.
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
D.
DamperHardware: Zincplated,diecastcore with dial and handle made of 2.4 mm thick zinc
plated steel, and a19mm hexagon locking nut. Include center hole tosuit damper operatingrod
size.Include elevated platform forinsulated ductmounting.
2.4FIREDAMPERS
A.General: Labeled toUL555.
B.FireRating: Oneandonehalf hours.
C. FireRating: Oneandonehalf andthreehours.
D.
Frame: SMACNATypeA with bladesin air stream;fabricatedwith rollformed,0.85 mm thick

galvanized steel;withmitered andinterlocking corners.
E.
Frame: SMACNA TypeBwith blades outofairstream; fabricated with rollformed, 0.85 mmthick
galvanized steel;withmitered andinterlocking corners.
F. Mounting Sleeve:Factory orfieldinstalled galvanized, sheetsteel.
1. Minimum Thickness: 1.3mmor3.5mmthickasindicated, andlengthtosuitapplication.

2.
Exceptions:Omitsleevewheredamperframewidthpermitsdirectattachment of
perimetermountingangles on each side of wall or floor, and thicknessof damperframe
complies withsleeverequirements.
G.Mounting Orientation: Vertical orhorizontal asindicated.
H.
Blades: Rollformed, interlocking, 0.85 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In place of interlocking
blades,usefulllength, 0.85mmthick,galvanized steelbladeconnectors.
I. Horizontal Dampers: Include abladelockandstainlesssteel negatorclosure spring.

J. FusibleLink:Replaceable, [74][100]deg.Crated.
2.5SMOKE DAMPERS
A.General: Labeled toUL555S. Combination fireandsmoke dampers shallbelabeled foroneand

onehalfhour ratingtoUL555.
B.FusibleLink:Replaceable, [74]or[100]deg.Crated.
C. FrameandBlades: 1.6mmthick,galvanized, sheetsteel.
D.
MountingSleeve:Factoryinstalled, 1.3 mm thick, galvanized,sheet steel; length to suit wall or

floorapplication.
E. Damper Motors: Provide formodulating ortwoposition action.
1.
PermanentSplitCapacitororShadedPole Motors: Withoilimmersed andsealed gear

trains.
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
2. SpringReturn Motors:Equipwithanintegralspiralspring mechanism whereindicated.

Enclose entirespringmechanism inaremovable housing designed forservice or
adjustments.Sizeforrunning torque rating of17Nxmandbreakaway torque rating of17
Nxm.
3.
Outdoor Motors and Motors in OutsideAir Intakes:Equip with Oring gaskets designed to
makemotorsweatherproof.Equipmotorswith internalheatersto permitnormal
operation atminus40deg.C.
4. NonspringReturnMotors: Fordampers largerthan2.3sq.m,sizemotorforrunning
torqueratingof17Nxmandbreakaway torqueratingof34Nxm.
5. TwoPosition Motor:230V,singlephase,50Hz.
6. TwoPosition Motor:400V,3phase,50Hz.
7. Modulating, SpringReturn Motor:230V,singlephase,50Hz.
8. Modulating, SpringReturn Motor:400V,3phase,50Hz.
2.6DUCTSILENCERS
A.
General:Factoryfabricated andtested,roundor rectangular silencerwithperformance

characteristics andphysical requirements asindicated.
B.
Fire Performance: Adhesives,sealers, packing materials,and accessorymaterialsshall have fire

ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed when tested according to
ASTME84.
C.
Rectangular Units: Fabricatecasingswitha minimumof 0.85mm thick,solidsheetmetalfor

outercasingand0.55mmthick,perforated sheetmetalforinnercasing.
D.RoundUnits:Casingswithsheetmetalthicknesses fordiameters listedbelow:
1. Upto600mm:0.85mm.
2. 650through 1000mm:1.0mm.
3. 1050through 1300mm:1.3mm.
4. 1350through 1500mm:1.6mm.
5. Casingsfabricated ofspirallockseam ductmaybeonesizethinnerthanthatindicated.
6.
Interior Partitions and Baffles:At least 0.85 mm and designed for minimumaerodynamic
losses.
E. SheetMetalPerforations: 3mmdiameter forinnercasingandbafflesheetmetal.
F.
FibrousAcousticFill Material:Inertandverminproof fibrousmaterial,packedundernotless

than5percent compression.
G.
Fabricatesilencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwisereact to
systempressure variations.
1. Donotusenuts,bolts,andsheetmetalscrewsforunitassemblies.
2. Lockformandsealorcontinuously weldjoints.
3.
SuspendedUnits: Factoryinstalled suspensionhooksor lugs attachedto framein
quantities andspacedtoprevent deflection ordistortion.
4. Reinforcement: Crossortrapeze anglesforrigidsuspension.
H.SourceQualityControl: Perform thefollowing factorytests:
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
Acoustic Performance:Test according toASTME477, with airflow inboth directions

through silencer.
2.
Recordacousticratings,includingdynamicinsertionloss and selfnoisepowerlevels,for
bothforwardflow(airandnoiseinsamedirection) andreverseflow(airandnoisein
opposite directions) withanairflowofatleast10m/sfacevelocity.
3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightnessat 200 percentof associatedfan static pressureor
1500Pastatic pressure, whichever isgreater.
1.
2.7TURNING VANES
A.Fabricate tocomply withSMACNA's "HVACDuctConstruction StandardsMetal andFlexible."
B.
ManufacturedTurning Vanes:Fabricate of 38 mm wide, curved blades set 19 mm o.c.; support

with bars perpendicular toblades set 50mm o.c.; andsetinto side strips suitable formounting in
ducts.
C.
AcousticTurningVanes: Fabricateof airfoilshaped aluminumextrusionswith perforatedfaces

andfibrousglass fill.
2.8DUCTMOUNTED ACCESSDOORSANDPANELS
A.
Door shall be rigid and airtight with neoprenegaskets and two or more chromeplated enamel
paintedsteelhingesandquickfastening lockingdevices.Providedoorsaslargeaspractical.
Include vision panel where indicated.Include 25by25 mm butt orpiano hinge and cam latches.
Accessdoorsupto300X300mmshallhavetwocamlocks,largersizesshallhavefourcamlocks.
B.
Mount doors, if possible,so that air pressureholds them closed. As an alternative,removable

accessdoorsmaybeused.
C.
Access doors shall be constructedfrom stampedsheet metal and consist of an inner and outer
door panel.Where insulated doors are needed, the inner door shall consist of two panels spot
weldedtogetherwhichtotallyencapsulate insulation identicaltocorresponded ductwork
insulation. The inner and outer doors shall be joined by bolts and threadedhandlesin such a
configuration that thepanels can bedrawn together tosecure thedoor totheduct inasandwich
fashion.
D.
Thehandles shallbehighimpact plastic withthreaded metal inserts. Conical springs shallbeused

between the door panels to facilitateinstallationand removal of the door.Fireproofneoprene
gasket shallbeused around theoutside edgeoftheinner orouter panel, butnotboth, tosealthe
door.
E. Thistypeofdoorisapproved foruseonrectangular, roundandflatoval ductwork.
2.9FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.General: Flameretarded ornoncombustiblefabrics, coatings, andadhesives complying with

UL181,Class1.
Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
B.
Standard MetalEdged Connectors:Factory fabricated with astrip offabric 89mm wide attached
to two strips of 70 mm wide, 0.7 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8 mm aluminum sheets.
Selectmetalcompatible withconnected ducts.
C.
ExtraWide MetalEdged Connectors: Factory fabricated withastripoffabric146mmwide

attached totwo strips of70mm wide, 0.7 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or0.8mm aluminum
sheets.Selectmetalcompatible withconnected ducts.
D.
Transverse MetalEdged Connectors:Factory fabricated with astrip offabric 89 mm wide

attached totwostrips of111mmwide,0.7mmthick,galvanized, sheetsteelor0.8mmaluminum
sheets.Selectmetalcompatible withconnected ducts.
E.
Conventional, IndoorSystemFlexibleConnectorFabric:Glassfabricdoublecoatedwith
polychloroprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 880g/sq.m.

2. TensileStrength: 84N/mminthewarp,and63N/mminthefilling.
F.
Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with a
syntheticrubber,weatherproof coating resistant tothesun'sultraviolet raysandozone
environment.

G.
HighTemperatureSystem Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber and
having a minimumweight of 542 g/sq. m and tensile strength of 50 N/mm in the warp, and 32
N/mminthefilling.
H.HighCorrosiveEnvironment SystemFlexibleConnectors:Glassfabriccoatedwitha chemical

resistant coating.

2.10FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A.General: Comply withUL181,Class1.
B.
FlexibleDucts,Uninsulated: Spiralwound steelspringwithflameproof vinylsheathing.
C.
FlexibleDucts,Uninsulated: Corrugated aluminum.
D.
FlexibleDucts,Insulated: Factoryfabricated,insulated, roundduct,complywithASTMC553,

TypeII,withanouterjacket enclosing 38mmthick withthermal Conductivity of0.038W/mK at20
deg.C(68deg.F)meantemperature, glassfiber insulation around acontinuous innerliner.
Acoustic insertion loss shall not be less than 3 dB per 300 mm (foot) of straight duct, at 500 Hz,
basedon150mm(6inch)duct,of750m/min(2500fpm).
1. Reinforcement: Steelwire helixencapsulated ininnerliner.
Pa g e | 7
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
2. Outer Jacket: Glassreinforced,silver Mylarwithacontinuous hanging tab,integral fibrous

glasstape,andnylonhanging cordoraluminum foil.
3. InnerLiner:Polyethylene film.
E. Pressure Rating:1500Papositive, 125Panegative.
2.11ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and
gasket. Sizetoallow insertion ofpitot tube andother testing instruments, andlength tosuitduct
insulation thickness.
B.Splitter Damper Accessories:Zincplated damper blade bracket; 6mm,zincplated operating rod;

andaductmounted, balljoint bracket withflatrubbergasketandsquarehead setscrew.
C.
Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainlesssteel band with cadmiumplatedhex screw totighten band with a
wormgear action,insizes75to450mmtosuitductsize.
D.
Adhesives: High strength,quick setting,neoprenebased, waterproof,and resistantto gasoline

andgrease.
PART3EXECUTION
3.1INSTALLATION
A.
Installductaccessories according toapplicable detailsshowninSMACNA's "HVACDuct

Construction StandardsMetal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards" forfibrousglass ducts.
B. Installvolumedampers inlinedduct;avoiddamage toanderosion ofductliner.

C. Providetestholesatfaninletandoutletandelsewhere asindicated.
D.Installfireandsmokedampers according tomanufacturer's ULapproved written instructions.
1. Installfusible linksinfiredampers.
E.
Install duct access panels foraccess toboth sides ofduct coils. Install duct access panels
downstream fromvolume dampers, firedampers, turningvanes,andequipment.
1.
Install duct access panels toallow access tointerior ofductsforcleaning, inspecting,

adjusting, andmaintaining accessories andterminal units.
2. Installaccesspanelsonsideofductwhereadequate clearance isavailable.
F. Labelaccess doorsaccording toDivision 15Section"Mechanical Identification."
3.2ADJUSTING
A.Adjustductaccessories forpropersettings.
Pa g e | 8
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
B.Adjustfireandsmokedampers forproperaction.
C.
Finalpositioning ofmanualvolume dampers isspecified inDivision15Section "Testing, Adjusting,

andBalancing."
ENDOFSECTION 15820
Pa g e | 9
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15855DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, ANDGRILLES
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.ThisSection includes ceilingandwallmounted diffusers, registers, andgrilles.

1.
Division 10 Section"Louversand Vents"for fixedandadjustablelouversand wall vents,

whether ornottheyareconnected toducts.
2. Division 15Section "DuctAccessories" forfireandsmokedampers andvolumecontrol
dampers notintegral todiffusers, registers, andgrilles.
3.
Division 15Section "Testing, Adjusting, andBalancing" forbalancing diffusers, registers, and
grilles.
1.3DEFINITIONS
A.
Diffuser: Circular,square,or rectangularair distributionoutlet,generallylocatedin the ceiling

and comprisingdeflectingmembersdischargingsupplyair in variousdirectionsand planesand
arranged topromote mixingofprimary airwithsecondary roomair.
B.
Grille: Alouvered orperforated covering foranopening inanairpassage, whichcanbelocated in

asidewall, ceiling,orfloor.
C. Register: Acombination grilleanddamper assembly overanairopening.
1.4SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data:Foreachmodelindicated, includethefollowing:
1.
Data Sheet: For each type ofair outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate
construction, finish,andmounting details.
2.
Performance Data: Include throwanddrop,staticpressure drop,andnoiseratings foreach
typeofairoutletandinlet.
3.
Scheduleof diffusers,registers,and grilles indicatingdrawingdesignation,room location,
quantity, modelnumber, size,andaccessories furnished.
4. Assembly Drawing: Foreach typeofairoutlet andinlet; indicate materials andmethods of
assembly ofcomponents.
Section 15855Diffuser Registers Grilles
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
B.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans andwallelevations drawn toscale toshow

locations andcoordination ofdiffusers, registers, grillesandaccess panelswithotheritems
installed inceilingsandwalls.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection:Manufacturer'scolor charts showing the full range of colors
available fordiffusers, registers, andgrilleswithfactoryapplied colorfinishes.
D.
SamplesforVerification: Ofdiffusers, registers, andgrilles,inmanufacturer's standard sizes,

showingthe full rangeof colors. PrepareSamplesfrom the samematerialto be used for the
Work.
A.
ProductOptions: Drawingsand schedulesindicatespecificrequirementsof diffusers,registers,

and grillesand are basedon the specificrequirementsof the systemsselected. Other
manufacturers' productswithequalperformance characteristics maybe considered.Referto
Division 1Section"Product Requirements."
B.NFPACompliance: Install diffusers, registers, andgrilles according toNFPA90A,"Standard forthe

Installation ofAirConditioning andVentilating Systems."
C.
Location ofceiling mounted diffusers shallbeaspercoordinated ceiling drawings prepared bythe

Contractor. Colorandfinishofdiffusers shallmatchwithapproved ceilingcolourandtobe
submitted forEngineers approval..
PART2PRODUCTS
2.1AIRDIFFUSION DEVICECONSTRUCTION
A.
Airdiffusiondevice construction and mounting shall preclude flutter, rattle, or vibration. Devices
shall have the modificationsand accessoriesnecessaryfor mountingin indicatedsurface
construction.
B. Colorselection shallbeasdirected bytheEngineer.
C.
Supply diffusers shallbeprovided withcombination damper andequalizing grid.Dampers shallbe

extractingsplittertype,exceptasotherwise indicated.
D.
Supply diffusers shall be selected to give required throw to nearest wall. Terminal velocity isnot
to exceed 0.5 m/s specified air quantity. Velometer velocities through diffuser are not to exceed
3.0m/s.Supply diffusers aretobeabletodeliverairforcooling at15deg.Cbelowroom
temperature withoutcausingobjectionable conditions.
E. Airdiffusiondevice volume and pattern adjustmentsshall be made from the face of the device.
Volume adjustments shallbemadebyremovable key.
F. Gaskets shallbeprovided forsupplyterminal airdevicesmounted infinished surfaces.

G.Exterior andexposed edgesshallberolled,orotherwise stiffened androunded.
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
H.For ductworkof pressureclasses1000to 2500Pa (4 to 10 inchwatergage),providesponge

rubbergasketbetween flangesandwallorceiling.
I.
Sizeairoutlets forminimum noise levels, nottoexceed 30dbatspecified airquantity, as

measured ontheAscaleofastandard noiselevelmeter,unlessspecified otherwise
2.2MANUFACTUREDUNITS
A.Diffusers, registers, andgrillesaredescribed attheendofthisSection.

B.Diffusers, registers, andgrillessizesareindicated onDrawings.
2.3SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.Testing:Testperformance according toASHRAE 70,"MethodofTestingforRatingthe

Performance ofAirOutletsandInlets."
PART3EXECUTION
3.1EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas where diffusers, registers, andgrilles aretobeinstalled forcompliance with

requirementsfor installationtolerancesand other conditionsaffecting performanceof
equipment. Donotproceed withinstallation untilunsatisfactory conditions havebeencorrected.
3.2INSTALLATION
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer'swritten
instructions, Coordination Drawings, originaldesign, andreferenced standards.
B.
CeilingMountedOutlets andInlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement ofducts, fittings, and

accessories. Airoutlet andinlet locations have been indicated toachieve design requirements for
air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where
indicated,as much as practicable. For units installed in layin ceiling panels, locate units in the
center of the panel.Where architecturalfeatures or other items conflict with installation,notify
theEngineer foradetermination offinallocation.
C.
Install diffusers,registers,and grilles with airtight connectionto ducts and to allow service and
maintenance ofdampers, airextractors, andfiredampers.
3.3ADJUSTING
A.
After installation,adjust diffusers,registers,and grilles to air patternsindicated,or as directed,

beforestarting airbalancing.
3.4CLEANING
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.
After installation ofdiffusers, registers, andgrilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces
to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged
finishes.
3.5
3.6DIFFUSER SCHEDULE
A.Diffuser TypeSCD,RCD,SLDorPSD:<.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Material:Aluminum.
Finish:Bakedenamel, color to be selected and approved by the Engineer.
DuctConnection: Round or Square; as indicated on drawings.
FaceSize:asindicated on drawings.
Maximum NoiseCriterion Rating: 30 NC.
FaceStyle:Round,Square, Rectangular, Panel, Perforated, flowbar linearslot,
indicated ondrawings.
Mounting: Layin,Snapin.
Pattern: Adjustable, one way, 2 way, 3 way or 4 way.
Dampers: asindicated on drawings Combination volume and patterncontrol.
Accessories: Includethe following as applicable:
or Linear as
a. Equalizer deflectors.
b. Smudge ring.
c. Plasterring.
d. Extractor.
e. Patterncontroller.
f.
Blankoff panel,endcapsandmitered cornersonlineardiffusers.
g.
Operating keys.
h.
Insulated supply and return plenums for slot and linear disffusers with volume
dampers onplenum supplyinlet.
B.Diffuser Type
1. Material: Heavygaugesteel
2. Finish:Bakedenamel, colortobeselected andapproved bytheengineer.
3. Ductconnection: roundorsquare asindicated ondrawings.
4. Facesize:Asindicated ondrawings.
5. Maximum noise:Criterion rating:40NC.
6. Facestyle:Roundorasindicated ondrawings.
7. Mounting: Layin,snapin.
8.
Pattern: Adjustable ring operated for ring through operation. Airflow discharge tobe
adjustable fromhorizontal toverticalandviceversa.
9. Damper: Ringoperated.
10.Accessories: Includethefollowing asapplicable:
a. Equalizer deflectors.
b. Smudge ring.
c. Plasterring.
d. Extractor.
Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
e. Patterncontroller.
f. Blankoff panel,endcapsandmiteredcornersonlineardiffusers.
g. Operating keys.
h. Insulated supply and return plenums for slot and linear disffusers with volume
dampers onplenum supplyinlet.
C. JetDiffuser \Nozzle.
1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Finish:Powdercoated, colortobeselected andapproved bytheEngineer.
3. Size:asindicated ondrawings.
4. Maximum NoiseCriterion Rating: 35NC.
5. FaceStyle:Round.
6. Mounting: Frontmounting flange.
7. Pattern: Adjustable, swiveldeflection within+\30degrees.
8. Accessories: Includethefollowing asapplicable:
a. Insulated supply andreturnplenums .
3.7REGISTER SCHEDULE
A.SupplyRegister TypeSR
2. Finish:Bakedenamel, colortobeselected andapproved bytheEngineer.
3. FaceBladeArrangement: Adjustable horizontal
4. RearBladeArrangement: Adjustable vertical.
5. Frame:25mmwide
6. Mounting: Concealed
7. Damper Type:Adjustable opposedblade assembly
8. Accessories: Includeplasterframe.
B.ReturnandExhaust Register TypesRR&ER
2. Finish:Bakedenamel, colortobeselected andapproved bytheEngineer.
3. FaceBladeArrangement: Fixedhorizontal
4. Frame:25mmwide
5. Mounting: Concealed
6. Damper Type:Adjustable opposedblade assembly
7. Accessories: Includeplasterframe.
ENDOFSECTION 15855
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
SECTION 15990TESTING, ADJUSTING, ANDBALANCING
PART1GENERAL
1.2SUMMARY
A.
ThisSection includes testing, adjusting, andbalancing HVAC systems toproduce design objectives,
including thefollowing:
1.
Balancing airflow andwaterflowwithin distribution systems, including submains, branches,

andterminals, toindicated quantities according tospecified tolerances.
2. Adjusting totalHVACsystems toprovide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance ofHVACequipment.
4. Settingquantitative performance ofHVACequipment.
5. Verifying thatautomatic controldevicesarefunctioning properly.
6. Measuring soundandvibration.
7. Reporting resultsoftheactivities andprocedures specified inthisSection.
B.RelatedSections include thefollowing:
1.
Testing and adjustingrequirementsunique to particularsystems and equipmentare

included intheSections thatspecify thosesystems andequipment.
2. Field qualitycontroltesting to verify that workmanshipquality for system and equipment
installation isspecified insystemandequipment Sections.
1.3DEFINITIONS
A.
Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce
fanspeedoradjustadamper.
B.
Balance: To proportionflows within the distributionsystem, includingsubmains,branches,and

terminals, according todesignquantities.
C.
Draft: Acurrent ofair,whenreferring tolocalized effect caused byoneormorefactors ofhighair

velocity, low ambient temperature, ordirection ofairflow, whereby more heat iswithdrawn from
aperson's skinthanisnormally dissipated.
D.
Procedure:An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable

results.
E. ReportForms: Testdatasheetsforrecording testdatainlogicalorder.

Section 15990Testing, Adjusting andBalancing
Pa g e | 1
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
F.
Terminal: A point wherethe controlledmedium,such as fluid or energy,entersor leavesthe

distribution system.
G.Test:Aprocedure todetermine quantitative performance ofasystemorequipment.
H.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the
testing, adjusting, andbalancing procedures.
I. AABC:Associated AirBalance Council.
J. AMCA:AirMovement andControlAssociation.
K. NEBB:National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
L.SMACNA: SheetMetalandAirConditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4SUBMITTALS
A.
QualityAssuranceSubmittals: Within 30days from theEngineer's Notice toCommence, submit 2

copiesofevidence thatthetesting,adjusting, andbalancing AgentandthisProject'stesting,
adjusting,and balancingteammembersmeetthe qualifications specifiedin the "Quality
Assurance" Articlebelow.
B.
ContractDocumentsExamination Report: Within45 days from the Engineer'sNoticeto

Commence, submit 2copies oftheContract Documents review report asspecified inPart3ofthis
Section.
C. Strategies andProcedures Plan: Within 60daysfromtheEngineer's Notice toCommence, submit

2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and stepbystepprocedures as
specified in Part3 "Preparation"Article below.Include a complete set of report forms intended
foruseonthisProject.
D.
Certified Testing, Adjusting, andBalancing Reports: Submit 2copiesofreports prepared, as

specifiedinthisSection,onapproved formscertifiedbythetesting,adjusting, andbalancing
Agent.
E. SampleReportForms: Submit 2setsofsampletesting, adjusting, andbalancing reportforms.
A.Agent Qualifications:Engage atesting, adjusting, andbalancing agent certified byeither AABC or

NEBB,oranother agency acceptable totheEngineer.
B.
Testing, Adjusting, andBalancing Conference: MeetwiththeEmployer's andtheEngineer's

representatives on approvalof the testing,adjusting,andbalancingstrategiesandprocedures
plantodevelop amutual understanding ofthedetails. Ensuretheparticipation oftesting,
adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service
representatives, HVAC controls Installer,and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance
noticeofscheduled meeting timeandlocation.
Pa g e | 2
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1. AgendaItems:Include atleastthefollowing:
a. Submittal distribution requirements.

b. Contract Documents examination report.
c. Testing, adjusting, andbalancing plan.
d. Workschedule andProjectsiteaccessrequirements.
e.
Coordination andcooperation oftradesandsubcontractors.
f.
Coordination ofdocumentation andcommunication flow.
C.
Certification ofTesting, Adjusting, andBalancing Reports: Certify thetesting, adjusting, and

balancing fielddatareports. Thiscertification includes thefollowing:
1.
2.
Reviewfielddatareportstovalidateaccuracy ofdataandtopreparecertified testing,

adjusting, andbalancing reports.
Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing,
adjusting,andbalancingplanandtheprocedures specifiedandreferenced in this
Specification.
D.
Testing,Adjusting,and BalancingReports: Use testing,adjusting,and balancingAgent'sreport

formsasapproved bytheEngineer.
E.
InstrumentationType, Quantity, and Accuracy:As described in [AABC national standards]

[NEBB's "Procedural Standards forTesting, Adjusting, andBalancing ofEnvironmental Systems,"
Section II,"Required Instrumentation forNEBBCertification"].
F.
InstrumentationCalibration:Calibrate instruments at least every 6months or more frequently if

required bytheinstrument manufacturer.
1.6PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
EmployerOccupancy: The Employermay occupy completedareas of the buildingbefore

SubstantialCompletion.Cooperatewith the Employerduringtesting,adjusting,and balancing
operations tominimize conflicts withtheEmployer's operations.
1.7COORDINATION
A.
Coordinatethe efforts of factoryauthorized service representativesfor systems and equipment,

HVACcontrols installers, andothermechanics tooperate HVACsystems andequipment to
support andassisttesting,adjusting, andbalancing activities.
B.Notice: Provide 7days'advance noticeforeachtest.Include scheduled testdatesandtimes.
C.
Perform testing, adjusting, andbalancing after leakage andpressure tests onairand water
distribution systems havebeensatisfactorily completed.
PART2PRODUCTS (NotApplicable)
PART3EXECUTION
Pa g e | 3
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
3.1EXAMINATION
A.
Examine Contract Documents tobecome familiar withproject requirements and todiscover

conditions insystems' designs thatmaypreclude propertesting, adjusting, andbalancing of
systems andequipment.
1. Contract Documents aredefined intheConditions ofContract.

2.
Verifythatbalancing devices, suchastestports,gagecocks,thermometer wells,flow
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by
theContract Documents. Verify thatquantities andlocations ofthese balancing devices are
accessibleand appropriatefor effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
B.Examine approved submittal dataofHVACsystems andequipment.

C. Examine projectrecorddocuments described inDivision 1Section "Record(AsBuilt) Documents."
D.Examinethe Engineer'sdesigndata,includingHVACsystemdescriptions, statementsof design
assumptionsfor environmentalconditionsand systems' output, and statementsof philosophies
andassumptions aboutHVACsystemandequipment controls.
E.
Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data
to projectconditions andrequirements, includingsystemeffectsthatcancreateundesiredor
unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all orpart ofasystem. Calculate system
effect factors to reduce the performanceratings ofHVAC equipment when installed under
conditionsdifferentfrom those presentedwhen the equipmentwas performancetested at the
factory. To calculatesystemeffects for air systems,use tables and charts found in AMCA201,
"Fans and Systems," Sections 7through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC SystemsDuctDesign,"
Sections 5and6.Compare thisdatawiththedesigndataandinstalled conditions.
F.
Examinesystemand equipmentinstallationsto verify that they are completeand that testing,

cleaning,adjusting,andcommissioning specifiedin individualSpecification Sectionshavebeen
performed.
G.Examine systemandequipment testreports.
H.
Examine HVAC system andequipment installations toverify that indicated balancing devices, such
as test ports, gage cocks, thermometerwells, flowcontroldevices, balancing valves and fittings,
andmanual volume dampers, areproperly installed, andtheirlocations areaccessible and
appropriate foreffective balancing andforefficient systemandequipment operation.
I. Examine systems forfunctional deficiencies thatcannotbecorrected byadjusting andbalancing.
J.
Examine airhandling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,
beltsarealigned andtight,andequipment withfunctioning controls isreadyforoperation.
K.
Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight.Verify that pipe
penetrations andotherholesaresealed.
L.Examine strainers forcleanscreensandproperperforations.
M.Examine valvesforproper installation fortheirintended function.

Pa g e | 4
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
N. Examine heattransfer coilsforcorrectpipingconnections andforcleanandstraight fins.
O. Examine equipment forinstallation andforproperly operating safetyinterlocks andcontrols.

P. Examine automatic temperature systemcomponents toverifythefollowing:
1. Dampers, valves,andothercontrolled devicesoperate bytheintended controller.
2. Dampers andvalvesareintheposition indicated bythecontroller.
3.
Integrity ofvalves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness offully closed
andfullyopenpositions.
4.
Automatic modulating andshutoffvalves,including2wayvalvesand3waymixingand
diverting valves,areproperly connected.
5. Thermostats arelocatedtoavoidadverse effectsofsunlight, drafts,andcoldwalls.
6. Sensors arelocatedtosenseonlytheintended conditions.
7. Sequence ofoperation forcontrolmodesisaccording totheContract Documents.
8.
Controller setpointsaresetat designvalues.Observeandrecordsystemreactionsto
changes inconditions. Recorddefault setpointsifdifferent fromdesignvalues.
9. Interlocked systems areoperating.
Q.
Report deficiencies discovered before andduring performance oftesting, adjusting, and balancing
procedures.
3.2PREPARATION
A.
Preparea testing,adjusting,and balancingplan that includesstrategiesand stepbystep

procedures.
B. Complete systemreadiness checksandprepare systemreadiness reports. Verifythefollowing:
1. Permanent electrical powerwiringiscomplete.

2. Hydronic systems arefilled,clean,andfreeofair.
3. Automatic temperaturecontrolsystems areoperational.
4. Equipment andductaccessdoorsaresecurely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, andfiredampers areopen.
6. Isolating andbalancing valvesareopenandcontrolvalvesareoperational.
7.
Ceilings areinstalled incritical areaswhereairpattern adjustments arerequired andaccess
tobalancing devices isprovided.
8. Windows anddoorscanbeclosedsodesignconditions forsystemoperations canbemet.
3.3GENERAL TESTING ANDBALANCING PROCEDURES
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
inSMACNA's "HVACSystemsTesting, Adjusting, andBalancing" andthisSection.
B.
Cut insulation,ducts, pipes, and equipmentcabinets for installationof test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.
Restorevaporbarrierandfinishaccording totheinsulation Specifications forthisProject.
Pa g e | 5
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
C.
Mark equipment settings withpaint orother suitable, permanent identification material, including
dampercontrolpositions, valve indicators, fanspeedcontrollevers, and similar controls and
devices, toshowfinalsettings.
3.4FUNDAMENTAL AIRSYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer'soutlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheckthe summationof requiredoutlet volumeswith
required fanvolumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams ofsystems' "asbuilt" ductlayou
C. Determine thebestlocations inmainandbranchductsforaccurate ductairflowmeasurements.
D.Checktheairflow patterns fromtheoutsideair louvers anddampers andthereturn andexhaust

airdampers, through thesupplyfan discharge andmixingdampers.
E. Locatestartstop anddisconnect switches, electrical interlocks, andmotorstarters.

F. Verifythatmotorstarters areequipped withproperly sizedthermalprotection.
G.Checkdampers forproperposition toachievedesired airflow path.
H.Checkforairflow blockages.
I. Checkcondensate drainsforproperconnections andfunctioning.

J. Checkforproper sealingofairhandling unitcomponents.
3.5CONSTANTVOLUMEAIRSYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A.Theprocedures inthisArticle apply toconstantvolumesupply, return, andexhaustair systems.

Additionalproceduresare requiredfor variableairvolume, multizone,dualduct,inductionunit
supplyair systems and process exhaustair systems. These additional procedures are specified in
otherarticles inthisSection.
B.
Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximumallowablerpm listed by the fan
manufacturer.
1. Measure fanstaticpressures todetermine actualstaticpressure asfollows:
a.
Measureoutlet static pressureas far downstreamfrom the fan as practicableand

upstream fromrestrictions inductssuchaselbowsandtransitions.
b. Measure staticpressure directly atthefanoutletorthrough theflexible connection.
c.
Measure inlet static pressure of singleinletfans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream fromflexibleconnection anddownstream fromductrestrictions.
d.
Measureinlet staticpressureof doubleinlet fans throughthe wall of the plenum
thathousesthefan.
2. Measure staticpressure acrosseachairhandling unitcomponent.

Pa g e | 6
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
a.
Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
mustchange filters.
3.
Measure staticpressures entering andleavingotherdevices suchassoundtraps,heat

recovery equipment, andairwashers underfinalbalanced conditions.
4.
Compare design datawithinstalled conditions todetermine variations indesign static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compareactual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective
actiontoaligndesignandactualconditions.
5. Adjustfan speedhigheror lowerthan designwiththe approvalof the Engineer.Make
required adjustmentsto pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connectionsto
accommodate fanspeed changes.
6.
Donotmakefanspeed adjustments thatresultin motoroverload.Consultequipment
manufacturersabout fanspeed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fanmotor
amperageto ensurethat no overloadwill occur. Measureamperagein full cooling,full
heating, andeconomizer modestodetermine themaximum required brakehorsepower.
C.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows
withinspecified tolerances.
1.
Measure staticpressureata pointdownstream fromthebalancing damperandadjust

volume dampers untiltheproperstaticpressure isachieved.
a.
Wheresufficientspacein submainsand branchductsis unavailable for Pitottube

traverse measurements,measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
thetotalairflowforthatzone.
2.
Remeasure each submain andbranch duct after allhave been adjusted. Continue toadjust
submains andbranchductstodesignairflows withinspecified tolerances.
D.Measure terminal outlets andinletswithout making adjustments.
1.
Measure terminal outlets using a directreadinghood or the outlet manufacturer'swritten

instructions andcalculating factors.
E.
Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances of
design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers
attheairterminals.
1.
Adjusteachoutletinthesameroomorspacetowithinspecified tolerances ofdesign

quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract
Documents.
2. Adjustpatterns ofadjustable outletsforproperdistribution without drafts.
3.6FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FORHYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system.Checkthesumof branchcircuit flowsagainstapprovedpumpflowrate. Correct
variations thatexceedplusorminus5percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams ofsystems' "asbuilt" pipinglayouts.

Pa g e | 7
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
C.
Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
generalpreparation procedures specified above:
1. Openallmanualvalvesformaximum flow.
2. Checkexpansion tankliquidlevel.
3. Checkmakeupwaterstationpressure gageforadequate pressure forhighest vent.
4. Checkflowcontrol valvesforspecified sequence ofoperation andsetatdesignflow.
5.
Set differentialpressure control valves at the specified differential pressure.Do not set at
fullyclosedposition whenpumpispositivedisplacementtype,unlessseveral terminal
valvesarekeptopen.
6. Setsystemcontrols sothatautomatic valvesarewideopentoheatexchangers.
7.
Checkpumpmotor load. If motoris overloaded, throttlemain flowbalancing deviceso
thatmotornameplate ratingisnotexceeded.
8. Checkairventsforaforceful liquidflowexitingfromventswhenmanually operated.
3.7HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A.
Determine water flow atpumps. Use the following procedures, except forpositivedisplacement
pumps:
1.
Verify impeller size byoperating thepump with thedischarge valve closed. Verify with the
pump manufacturerthat this will not damage pump. Read pressure differential across the
pump. Convertpressureto headand correctfor differencesin gage heights. Notethe
point on the manufacturer'spump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the
intended impeller size.
2.
Check system resistance.With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump
andmark thepump manufacturer's headcapacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until
designwaterflowisachieved.
3.
Verify pumpmotorbrake horsepower. Calculatethe intendedbrake horsepowerfor the
system based on the pump manufacturer'sperformancedata.Comparecalculatedbrake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motornameplate amperage.
4. Reportflowratesthatarenotwithinplusorminus5percent ofdesign.
B.Setcalibrated balancing valves,ifinstalled, atcalculated presettings.
C. Measure flowatallstations andadjust,wherenecessary, toobtain firstbalance.
1.
System components thathaveCvrating oranaccurately cataloged flowpressuredrop

relationship maybeusedasaflowindicating device.
D.
Measure flow at main balancingstation and set main balancingdevice to achieve flow that is 5
percent greaterthandesignflow.
E. Adjustbalancing stations towithinspecified tolerances ofdesignflowrateasfollows:
1. Determine thebalancing stationwiththehighestpercentage overdesignflow.

2.
Adjusteach stationin turn, beginningwith the stationwith the highestpercentageover
designflowandproceeding tothestationwiththelowestpercentage overdesignflow.
3. Recordsettingsandmarkbalancing devices.
Pa g e | 8
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
F.
Measure pump flow rate and make final measurementsof pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads,andsystems' pressures andtemperatures, including outdoorair temperature.
Measure thedifferentialpressurecontrolvalvesettings existing attheconclusions ofbalancing.

MOTORS
G.Motors, 1/2HPandLarger: Testatfinalbalanced conditions andrecordthefollowing data:
1. Manufacturer, model,andserialnumbers.
2. Motorhorsepower rating.
3. Motorrpm.
4. Efficiency ratingifhighefficiency motor.
5. Nameplate andmeasured voltage, eachphase.
6. Nameplate andmeasured amperage, eachphase.
7. Starterthermalprotectionelementrating.
3.8CHILLERS
A.
Balance water flow through each evaporator towithin specified tolerances ofdesign flow with all
pumps operating.With only one chiller operating in amultiple chiller installation, do not exceed
theflow forthemaximum tube velocity recommended bythechiller manufacturer.Measure and
recordthefollowing datawitheachchilleroperating atdesignconditions:
1. Evaporator waterentering andleaving temperatures, pressure drop,andwaterflow.

.
2.
Evaporatorand condenserrefrigeranttemperaturesand pressures,using instruments
furnished bythechillermanufacturer.
3. Powerfactoriffactoryinstalled instrumentation isfurnished formeasuring kW.
4. ThekWinputiffactoryinstalled instrumentation isfurnished formeasuring kW.
5. Capacity: Calculate intonsofcooling.
3.9CONDENSING UNITS
A.
Verify proper rotation offans and measure entering and leavingair temperatures.Record
compressor data.
3.10TEMPERATURE TESTING
A.
Duringtesting,adjusting,and balancing,reportneed for adjustmentin temperature regulation

withintheautomatic temperaturecontrolsystem.
B.
Measure indoor wet and drybulb temperatures every other hour for aperiod of 2 successive 8
hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings.
Measure whenthebuilding orzoneisoccupied.
C. Measure outsideair, wetanddrybulb temperatures.
Pa g e | 9
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
3.11TEMPERATURECONTROLVERIFICATION
A.Verifythatcontrollers arecalibrated andcommissioned.
B.
Check transmitter andcontroller locations andnoteconditions that would adversely affect control
functions.
C. Recordcontroller settings andnotevariances between setpointsandactualmeasurements.

D.Verifyoperation oflimitingcontrollers (i.e.,highandlowtemperature controllers).
E. Verifyfreetravelandproperoperation ofcontroldevices suchasdamper andvalveoperators.
F.
Verifysequenceof operationof controldevices.Noteair pressuresanddevicepositionsand

correlate withairflow andwaterflow measurements.Notethespeed ofresponse toinput
changes.
G.Confirm interaction ofelectrically operated switchtransducers.

H.Confirm interaction ofinterlock andlockout systems.
I. Verifymaincontrolsupplyair pressure andobserve compressor anddryeroperations.
J.
Record voltages of power supply and controlleroutput. Determineif the system operates on a
grounded ornongrounded powersupply.
K. Noteoperation ofelectric actuators usingspringreturnforproperfailsafe operations.
3.12TOLERANCES
A.SetHVACsystemairflow andwaterflowrateswithinthefollowing tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, andExhaust Fans:Plus5toplus10percent.

2. AirOutlets andInlets:0tominus10percent.
3. CoolingWater FlowRate:0tominus5percent.
3.13REPORTING
A.
Initial ConstructionPhase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified

in"Examination" Article above, prepare areport ontheadequacy ofdesign forsystems' balancing
devices. Recommendchangesand additionsto systems'balancingdevicesto facilitateproper
performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions toHVAC systems and
generalconstruction toallowaccessforperformance measuring andbalancing devices.
B.
StatusReports: As Workprogresses,preparereportsto describecompletedprocedures,

proceduresin progress,and scheduledprocedures.Includea list of deficienciesand problems
found insystems being tested andbalanced. Prepare aseparate report foreach system andeach
building floorforsystems serving multiple floors.
3.14FINALREPORT
Pa g e | 10
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
A.General:Typewritten,or computer printout in letterqualityfont, on standard bond paper, in 3

ringbinder,tabulated anddivided intosections bytestedandbalanced systems.
B.
Includea certification sheetinfrontof bindersignedandsealedbythecertifiedtestingand

balancing engineer.
1. Includealistoftheinstruments usedforprocedures, alongwithproofofcalibration.

C. FinalReportContents: Inaddition tothecertified fieldreportdata,includethefollowing:
1. Pumpcurves.
2. Fancurves.
3. Manufacturers' testdata.
4. Fieldtestreportsprepared bysystemandequipment installers.
5. Other informationrelative to equipmentperformance,but do not include approvedShop
Drawings andProduct Data.
D.
General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data inthe
finalreport,asapplicable:
1. Titlepage.
2. Nameandaddressoftesting, adjusting, andbalancing Agent.
3. Projectname.
4. Projectlocation.
5. Engineer's nameandaddress.
6. Contractor's nameandaddress.
7. Reportdate.
8. Signature oftesting, adjusting, andbalancing Agentwhocertifies thereport.
9. Summary ofcontents, including thefollowing:
a. Designversusfinalperformance.
b. Notable characteristics ofsystems.
c. Description ofsystemoperation sequence ifitvariesfromtheContract Documents.
10.Nomenclature sheetsforeachitemofequipment.
11.Dataforterminal units,including manufacturer, typesize,andfittings.
12.Notestoexplainwhycertainfinaldatainthebodyofreportsvaryfromdesignvalues.
13.Testconditions forfansandpumpperformance forms,including thefollowing:
a. Settings foroutside, return, andexhaustair dampers.

b. Conditions offilters.
c. Coolingcoil,wetanddrybulb conditions.
d. Faceandbypassdamper settings atcoils.
e.
Fandrivesettings, including settings andpercentage ofmaximum pitchdiameter.
f.
Inletvanesettingsforvariableairvolumesystems.
g. Settings forsupplyair, staticpressure controller.
h. Othersystemoperating conditions thataffectperformance.
E.
SystemDiagrams: Includeschematiclayoutsof air and hydronicdistributionsystems. Present

withsingleline diagrams andinclude thefollowing:
Pa g e | 11
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
1. Quantities ofoutside, supply,return, andexhaust airflows.

2. Waterandsteamflowrates.
3. Duct,outlet,andinletsizes.
4. Pipeandvalvesizesandlocations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
F. AirHandling UnitTestReports: Forairhandling unitswithcoils,includethefollowing:
1. UnitData:Include thefollowing:
a. Unitidentification.
b. Location.
c. Makeandtype.
d. Modelnumber andunitsize.
e.
Manufacturer's serialnumber.
f.
Unitarrangement andclass.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheavemake,sizeinmm,andbore.
i.
Sheavedimensions, centertocenter andamount ofadjustments inmm.
j.
Number ofbelts,make,andsize.
k. Number offilters,type,andsize.
2. MotorData:Includethefollowing:
a. Makeandframetypeandsize.
b. Horsepower andrpm.
c. Volts,phase, andhertz.
d.
Fullload amperage andservicefactor.
e.
Sheavemake,sizeinmm,andbore.
f. Sheavedimensions, centertocenter andamount ofadjustments inmm.
3. TestData:Include designandactualvaluesforthefollowing:
a. Totalairflow rateinL/s.
b.
Totalsystem staticpressure inPa.
c.
Fanrpm.
d. Discharge staticpressure inPa.
e. Filterstaticpressure differential inPa.
f.
Cooling coil staticpressure differential in Pa.
g.
Heating coil staticpressure differential inPa.
h.
Outside airflowinL/s.
i. Returnairflow inL/s.
j. Outsideair damper position.
k. Returnair damper position.
l. Vortexdamper position.
G.ApparatusCoil TestReports: Forapparatus coils,include thefollowing:
1. CoilData:Includethefollowing:
Pa g e | 12
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
a. Systemidentification.
b. Location.
c. Coiltype.
d. Number ofrows.
e. Finspacing inmmo.c..
f. Makeandmodelnumber.
g. Faceareainsq.m.
h. TubesizeinDN.
i. Tubeandfinmaterials.
j.Circuiting arrangement.
a. AirflowrateinL/s.
b.
Average facevelocity inm/s.
c.
Airpressure dropinPa.
d. Outsideair, wetanddrybulb temperatures indeg.C.
e. Returnair, wetanddrybulb temperatures indeg.C.
f.
Enteringair, wetanddrybulb temperatures indeg.C.
g.
Leavingair, wetanddrybulb temperatures indeg.C.
h.
WaterflowrateinL/s.
i. Waterpressure differential inkPa.
j.
Enteringwater temperature indeg.C.
k.
Leavingwater temperature indeg.C.
l.
Refrigerant expansion valveandrefrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suctionpressure inkPa.
n.
Refrigerant suctiontemperature indeg.C.
o.
Inletsteampressure inkPa.
H.FanTestReports: Forsupply, return, andexhaust fans,include thefollowing:
1. FanData:Includethefollowing:
a. Systemidentification.
b. Location.
c. Makeandtype.
d. Modelnumber andsize.
e.
f.
Arrangement andclass.
g. Sheavemake,sizeinmm,andbore.
h. Sheavedimensions, centertocenter andamount ofadjustments inmm.
2. MotorData:Includethefollowing:
a. Makeandframetypeandsize.
b. Horsepower andrpm.
c. Volts,phase, andhertz.
d.
e.
Sheavemake,sizeinmm,andbore.
f. Sheavedimensions, centertocenter andamount ofadjustments inmm.
g. Number ofbelts,make,andsize.
Pa g e | 13
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
a. Totalairflow rateinL/s.
b.
Totalsystem staticpressure inPa.
c.
Fanrpm.
d. Discharge staticpressure inPa.
e. Suctionstaticpressure inPa.
I.
Round, FlatOval,and RectangularDuct TraverseReports: Includea diagramwith a grid

representing theductcrosssection andrecordthefollowing:
1. ReportData:Includethefollowing:
a. Systemandairhandling unitnumber.
b. Location andzone.
c. Traverse airtemperature indeg.C.
d. Ductstaticpressure inPa.
e. Ductsizeinmm.
f. Ductareainsq.m.
g. DesignairflowrateinL/s.
h. Designvelocity inm/s.
i. ActualairflowrateinL/s.
j.
Actualaverage velocity inm/s.
k.
Barometric pressure inPa.
J. Packaged ChillerReports: Foreachchiller,include thefollowing:
b. Makeandmodelnumber.
c. Manufacturer's serialnumber.
d. Refrigerant typeandcapacity inL.
e. Startertypeandsize.
f. Starterthermal protection size.
g. .
2. Evaporator TestReports: Include designandactualvaluesforthefollowing:
a. Refrigerant pressure inkPa.

b. Refrigerant temperature indeg.C.
c. Enteringwater temperature indeg.C.
d. Leavingwater temperature indeg.C.
e. Enteringwater pressure inkPa.
f. Waterpressure differential inkPa.
3. Compressor TestData:Include designandactualvaluesforthefollowing:
a. Makeandmodelnumber.
b.
c.
Suctionpressure inkPa.
Pa g e | 14
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
d.
Suctiontemperature indeg.C.
e.
Discharge pressure inkPa.
f.
Discharge temperature indeg.C.
g.
Oilpressure inkPa.
h. Oiltemperature indeg.C.
i. Voltage ateachconnection.
j. Amperage foreachphase.
k. ThekWinput.
l. Crankcase heaterkW.
m.Chilledwatercontrolsetpointindeg.C.
n. Condenser watercontrolsetpointindeg.C.
o. Refrigerant lowpressurecutoffsetpointinkPa.
p. Refrigerant highpressurecutoffsetpointinkPa.
4. Refrigerant TestData:Includedesignandactualvaluesforthefollowing:
a. Oillevel.
b. Refrigerant level.
c.
ReliefvalvesettinginkPa.
d.
Unloader setpointsinkPa.
e.
Percentage ofcylinders unloaded.
f.
Bearing temperatures indeg.C.
g. Vaneposition.
h. Lowtemperaturecutoffsetpointindeg.C.
K.
Compressorand CondenserReports: For refrigerantside of unitarysystems,standalone

refrigerantcompressors,aircooledcondensingunits, or watercooledcondensingunits, include
thefollowing:
b. Location.
c. Unitmakeandmodelnumber.
d. Manufacturer's compressor serialnumbers.
e. Compressor make.
f. Compressor modelandserialnumbers.
g. Refrigerant weight inkg.
h. Lowambient temperature cutoffindeg.C.
a. Inletduct staticpressure inPa.

b. Outletduct staticpressure inPa.
c. Enteringair, drybulb temperature indeg.C.
d. Leavingair, drybulb temperature indeg.C.
e. Controlsettings.
f. Unloader setpoints.
g.
Lowpressurecutout set point in kPa.
h.
Highpressurecutoutsetpoint inkPa.
i.
Suctionpressure inkPa.
Pa g e | 15
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
j. Suctiontemperature indeg.C.
k. Condenser refrigerant pressure inkPa.
l. Condenser refrigerant temperature indeg.C.
m.Oilpressure inkPa.
n. Oiltemperature indeg.C.
o. Voltage ateachconnection.
p. Amperage foreachphase.
q. ThekWinput.
r.Crankcase heaterkW.
s.Number offans.
t.Condenser fanrpm.
u. Condenser fanairflowrateinL/s.
v. Condenser fanmotormake,framesize,rpm,andhorsepower.
w. Condenser fanmotorvoltage ateachconnection.
x. Condenser fanmotoramperage foreachphase.
3. PumpTestData:Include designandactualvaluesforthefollowing:
a. Makeandmodelnumber.
b.
c.
Motormakeandframesize.
d. Motorhorsepower andrpm.
e. Voltage ateachconnection.
f.Amperage foreachphase.
g. WaterflowrateinL/s.
4. WaterTestData:Include designandactualvaluesforthefollowing:
a.
Enteringwater temperature indeg.C.
b.
Leavingwater temperature indeg.C.
c. Watertemperature differential indeg.C.
d. Enteringwater pressure inkPa.
e. Leavingwater pressure inkPa.
f.
Waterpressure differential inkPa.
g.
WaterflowrateinL/s.
h. BleedwaterflowrateinL/s.
5. AirData:Include designandactualvaluesforthefollowing:
a. DuctairflowrateinL/s.
b. Inletduct staticpressure inPa.
c. Outletduct staticpressure inPa.
d. Average enteringair, wetbulb temperature indeg.C.
e. Average leavingair, wetbulb temperature indeg.C.
f. Ambient wetbulb temperature indeg.C.
L.
Pump TestReports: Forpumps, include thefollowing data. Calculate impeller sizebyplotting the
shutoffheadonpumpcurves.
Pa g e | 16
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Makeandsize.
e. Modelandserialnumbers.
f. WaterflowrateinL/s.
g. Waterpressure differential inkPa.
h.
Required netpositive suctionheadinkPa.
i.
Pumprpm.
j. Impeller diameter inmm.
k. Motormakeandframesize.
l. Motorhorsepower andrpm.
m.Voltage ateachconnection.
n. Amperage foreachphase.
o.
p.
Sealtype.
a. StaticheadinkPa.
b. Pumpshutoffpressure inkPa.
c. Actualimpeller sizeinmm.
d. Fullopen flowrateinL/s.
e. Fullopen pressure inkPa.
f.
Finaldischarge pressure inkPa.
g.
Finalsuctionpressure inkPa.
h. Finaltotalpressure inkPa.
i. Finalwater flowrateinL/s.
j. Voltage ateachconnection.
k. Amperage foreachphase.
M.Instrument Calibration Reports: Forinstrument calibration, includethefollowing:
1. ReportData:Includethefollowing:
a. Instrument typeandmake.
b. Serialnumber.
c. Application.
d. Datesofuse.
e. Datesofcalibration.
3.15ADDITIONAL TESTS
A.
Within90 days of completingtesting,adjusting,and balancing,performadditionaltestingand

balancing toverifythatbalancedconditions arebeingmaintained throughout andtocorrect
unusualconditions.
B.
Seasonal Periods: Ifinitialtesting, adjusting, andbalancing procedures werenotperformed

during nearpeak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and
adjusting duringnearpeak summer andwinterconditions.
Pa g e | 17
ACESPROPERTYLIMITED
ENDOFSECTION 15990
Pa g e | 18

Mep Specifications

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Mep Specifications

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CH C

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

SCOPE AND EXTENT OF WORKS

CENTRALLY MONITORED SELF CONTAINED EMERGENCY LIGHTING

MASTER DIGITAL SATELLITE AND TERRRESTRIAL ANTENNAE

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS

Main L.V. ACB/MCCB Distribution Board, designated as MDB shall be form 4

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

All Sub-main L.V. MCCB Distribution Boards designated SMDBs.

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

High quality high performance Satellite Master Antennae System for

END OF SECTION 16000

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS

These Specifications cover the supply, delivery, storage, installation, connection,

General Requiremenst and Conditions

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

All equipment shall be manufactured by reputable manufacturers of

STANDARDS AND CODES

Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA) Wiring Regulations.

Maximum ambient temperature : 55 degrees C (to be reviewed).

ELECTRICITY SUPPLY AND SERVICE CONDITIONS

380V +/- 5%, 3 phase, 4-wire

solidly earthed, TNT system

General Requiremenst and Conditions

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

STATUTORY APPROVALS, FEES AND INSPECTION

30 MVA, supplied from a 1500 kVA transformer

CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES AND SUPPLIERS.

The contractor shall coordinate with the plumbing works sub-contractor to

General Requiremenst and Conditions

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

TENDER DRAWINGS AND POSITIONS OF FITTINGS.

Approximate locations of various items of electrical equipment inclusive of

General Requiremenst and Conditions

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

WORKING AND AS FITTED DRAWINGS AND OPERATING MAUALS

General Requiremenst and Conditions

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

The cost of the training programme shall be deemed to be included in the

As a guide to the quality of workmanship required, names of three

INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

General Requiremenst and Conditions

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

Insulation resistance tests between conductors, and between conductors

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING.

General Requiremenst and Conditions

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION MARKS.

NOTES FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS.

Each Final MCB Distribution Board shall be sectionalized as indicated in

END OF SECTION 16010

General Requiremenst and Conditions

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS

INSTRUCTIONS AND GUIDELINES FOR CONDUIT INSTALLATIONS

No conduits of diameter smaller than 20 mm shall be used.

Containment Systems for Wiring and Cabling

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

Regulations BS 7671:2001. Should these differ in any way with the

Containment Systems for Wiring and Cabling